(1,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C
Copyright 2025 SUBARU CORPORATION
(2,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
(3,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
This manual describes the following vehicle type.
(2,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
(1,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Table of Contents
Keys and Doors ........................................................................................................ 125 Chapter 2
Instruments and Controls....................................................................................... 157 Chapter 3
Climate Control ......................................................................................................... 255
Audio ........................................................................................................................... 271 Chapter 5
Interior Equipment ................................................................................................... 273 Chapter 6
Starting and Operating............................................................................................ 295 Chapter 7
Driving Tips ............................................................................................................... 391 Chapter 8
In Case of Emergency ............................................................................................. 419 Chapter 9
Appearance Care ...................................................................................................... 447 Chapter 10
Maintenance and Service ....................................................................................... 455 Chapter 11
Specifications............................................................................................................ 503 Chapter 12
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects .................................... 517 Chapter 13
Index............................................................................................................................ 535 Chapter 14
Chapter 4
Chapter 1Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags ..............................................................................43
Illustrated Index ...........................................................................................................13
Introduction ....................................................................................................................1
HSHybrid System..............................................................................................................27
(2,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
(3,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
sint
*
Warranties ........................................................... 2
Warranties for U.S.A. ............................................. 2
Warranties for Canada ........................................... 2
Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ............... 2
*
How to Use This Owner’s Manual ..................... 2
Using Your Owner’s Manual ................................... 2
Safety Warnings .................................................... 3
Safety Symbol ....................................................... 4
Abbreviation List ................................................... 4
*
Vehicle Symbols ................................................. 5
*
Safety Precautions When Driving ..................... 5
Seatbelt and SRS Airbag........................................ 5
Child Safety........................................................... 5
Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide) ................ 6
Drinking and Driving.............................................. 7
Drugs and Driving ................................................. 7
Driving When Tired or Sleepy................................ 7
Modification of Your Vehicle .................................. 8
Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving ................. 8
Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation
System ............................................................... 8
Driving with Pets................................................... 8
Tire Pressures....................................................... 8
On-Road and Off-Road Driving .............................. 9
Attaching Accessories .......................................... 9
Vehicle Operation.................................................. 9
*
General Information ..........................................11
California Perchlorate Advisory ............................ 11
Noise from under the Vehicle ............................... 11
Vehicle Data Recording ........................................ 11
Event Data Recorder ............................................ 11
Introduction
0
Introduction
(4,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Warranties
s00aa
& Warranties for U.S.A.
s00aa01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranties
. Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
. California Emissions Control Sys-
tems Warranties
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
s00aa05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties except for U.S.A.
and Canada
s00aa06
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Read these warranties carefully.
How to Use This Owner’s
Manual
s00ab
& Using Your Owner’s Manual
s00ab01
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
Each chapter in this manual begins with a
brief table of contents. This will usually
allow you to tell at a glance whether or not
a chapter contains the information you
want.
Introduction
This chapter informs you general informa-
tion before driving.
Illustrated Index
This chapter informs you about the vehicle
layout with illustrations.
Chapter HS: Hybrid System
This chapter explains the characteristics of
the hybrid system.
Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS
Airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Warranties
2
(5,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Chapter 2: Keys and Doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
to use the instruments and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate Control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you about your audio
system.
Chapter 6: Interior Equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and Operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving Tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In Case of Emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance Care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service
This chapter informs you when you need to
take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer Information and
Reporting Safety Defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
For EyeSight system:
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle
shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of equipment.
& Safety Warnings
s00ab02
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to you
or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understanding
of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
How to Use This Owner’s Manual
3
0
Introduction
(6,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Safety Symbol
s00ab03
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
& Abbreviation List
s00ab04
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
ABS Anti-lock brake system
A/C Air conditioner
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
AVH Auto Vehicle Hold
AWD All-wheel drive
BSD Blind Spot Detection
CVT
Continuously variable trans-
mission
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
EV Electric Vehicle
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
Abbreviation Meaning
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LCA Lane Change Assist
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
OBD On-board diagnostics
RAB
Reverse Automatic Braking
system
RCTA Rear Cross Traffic Alert
RON Research octane number
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
SRH
Steering Responsive Head-
light
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
How to Use This Owner’s Manual
4
(7,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Vehicle Symbols
s00ac
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and Indicator Lights” �P24.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions care-
fully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
Safety Precautions When
Driving
s00ad
& Seatbelt and SRS Airbag
s00ad01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag
does not replace the safety ben-
efits of wearing a seatbelt. Used
in combination with the seat-
belts, the SRS airbag offers vehi-
cle occupants the best possible
protection in the event of a ser-
ious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not seated
in the proper upright position
when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries.
Because the SRS airbag needs
enough space for deployment,
the driver should always sit up-
right and well back in the seat as
far from the steering wheel as
practical while still maintaining
full vehicle control and the front
passenger should move the seat
as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” �P56.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)” �P91.
& Child Safety
s00ad02
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Symbols
5
0
Introduction
(8,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. SUBARU strongly recommends
that ALL infants and children
(including those in child restraint
systems) sit in the REAR seat
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. According
to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning child re-
straint systems, refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” �P72.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position when
children sit in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opens the door
and falls out. Refer to “Child
Safety Locks” �P149.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” �P150.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the ve-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
temperature in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to them.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” �P56.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child Restraint Systems” �P72.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)” �P91.
& Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon
Monoxide)
s00ad03
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
Safety Precautions When Driving
6
(9,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
& Drinking and Driving
s00ad04
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking – even if you drink just a
little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent
causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects
all people differently, you may have con-
sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
below the legal limit. The safest thing you
can do is never drink and drive. However if
you have no choice but to drive, stop
drinking and sober up completely before
getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and Driving
s00ad05
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or fatal
accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can make
you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
have a medical condition that requires you
to take drugs, please consult with your
doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving When Tired or Sleepy
s00ad06
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentive-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
– CONTINUED –
Safety Precautions When Driving
7
0
Introduction
(10,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead
find a safe place to rest if you are tired or
sleepy. On long trips, you should make
periodic rest stops to refresh yourself
before continuing on your journey. When
possible, you should share the driving with
others.
& Modification of Your Vehicle
s00ad07
WARNING
Do not remove the genuine SUBARU
navigation and/or audio system.
Doing so could cause the following
functions to be inoperable.
. Combination meter display
. Rear view image and help lines
. Vehicle settings
. Climate control
. Clock
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Use of Cell Phones/Texting
and Driving
s00ad16
CAUTION
Do not talk on a cell phone or text
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and lead to an
accident. If you use a cell phone to
talk or text, first pull off the road and
park in a safe place. In some States/
Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on
a phone while driving, but only if the
phone is hands-free.
& Driving Vehicles Equipped
with Navigation System
s00ad09
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
not operate the controls of the
navigation system while driving.
The loss of attention to driving could
lead to an accident. If you wish to
operate the controls of the naviga-
tion system, first take the vehicle off
the road and stop it in a safe
location.
& Driving with Pets
s00ad10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can be
hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling harness
which can be secured to the rear seat with
a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the
front passenger’s seat. For further infor-
mation, consult your veterinarian, local
animal protection society or pet shop.
& Tire Pressures
s00ad11
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire at least once a month and
Safety Precautions When Driving
8
(11,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire inflation pressure label. For detailed
information, refer to “Tires and Wheels”
�P475.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly be-
come hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
& On-Road and Off-Road Driv-
ing
s00ad13
This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Your vehicle has a higher ground clear-
ance and higher center of gravity, making it
more likely to roll over than ordinary
passenger cars. It also handles and
maneuvers differently from other passen-
ger cars. For this reason, please read
carefully the following section and follow
the instructions and precautions in order to
prevent serious injury or death due to loss
of control, rollover and other accidents.
Refer to “On-Road and Off-Road Driving”
�P396.
& Attaching Accessories
s00ad15
WARNING
. Do not attach any accessories,
labels or stickers (other than
properly placed inspection stick-
ers) to the windshield. Such
items may obstruct your view.
. If it is necessary to attach an
accessory (such as an electronic
toll collection (ETC) device or
security pass) to the windshield,
consult your SUBARU dealer for
details on the proper location.
. Do not connect any unauthorized
accessories or devices to the
data link connector (OBDII port).
This connector should be used
only with compatible diagnostic
devices for inspection and main-
tenance by an authorized service
technician using authorized ser-
vice tools. Connecting unauthor-
ized devices, such as a driver-
behavior tracking device, may
adversely affect vehicle systems,
including safety systems, or al-
low others to access information
stored in your vehicle. The use of
unauthorized devices may also
cause unexpected malfunctions,
such as a drained battery, or may
damage vehicle systems. The
manufacturer’s warranty will not
cover any part that malfunctions,
fails, or is damaged due to the
use of an unauthorized device
with the data link connector.
& Vehicle Operation
s00ad18
! Before leaving vehicle unattended
s00ad1801
CAUTION
Always lock your vehicle and carry
your access key fob with you.
There is a risk for vehicle theft or
unauthorized persons tampering
with the vehicle or installing mal-
icious electronic devices.
– CONTINUED –
Safety Precautions When Driving
9
0
Introduction
(12,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Key number plate storage
s00ad1802
NOTE
. The key number is required when
repairing the vehicle or making a
spare access key fob. If you lose the
plate with these numbers stamped
on it, you will not be able to make a
spare access key fob. To prevent it
from being stolen, do not leave it in
the vehicle and store it in a safe
place. Refer to “Keyless Access with
Push-Button Start System” �P126.
. If you lose your key, we recommend
that you delete the lost access key
fob registration to prevent theft.
Only a SUBARU dealer can delete
key fob registration. We recommend
that you consult your SUBARU deal-
er. Refer to “Key Replacement”
�P140.
! Vehicle modifications
s00ad1803
WARNING
. Do not install parts, make custom
adjustments or perform wiring or
other operations that are not
suitable for the vehicle.
. Do not connect accessories to
the vehicle wiring or connectors
unless they are genuine SUBARU
products. SUBARU’s vehicle war-
ranty does not cover any mal-
functions resulting from con-
necting the vehicle to products
other than those specified.
. It may be illegal to modify the
vehicle by installing parts other
than genuine SUBARU parts.
Consult your SUBARU dealer
about the kinds of parts (tires,
wheels, mufflers, etc.) you can
legally install on your vehicle.
! Device installation
s00ad1804
WARNING
Connecting devices that are not
intended to be used in the vehicle
or in a particular connector can
adversely affect the vehicle system
or cause the 12 V battery to dis-
charge. It may also cause personal
information leaks or unauthorized
remote operation of vehicle fea-
tures, resulting in unforeseen com-
plications. Any complication caused
by connecting a device other than
one intended to be used in the
vehicle is not covered by the manu-
facturer’s warranty. SUBARU also
bears no responsibility for any such
complication.
. The vehicle trouble diagnosis
connector should only be used
to connect the vehicle data link
connector (OBDII) for inspection
and maintenance purposes.
. Use the USB port only for data
communication with your vehicle
and for device charging.
! Suspicious device handling
s00ad1805
WARNING
If you find an unrecognized device
on your vehicle, consult your
SUBARU dealer immediately.
Any problem or safety risk due to the
connection of an unauthorized de-
vice is not covered by the manufac-
turer’s warranty. SUBARU also
bears no responsibility for any such
cause.
Safety Precautions When Driving
10
(13,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Deleting personal information from
vehicle
s00ad1806
CAUTION
When transferring ownership of
your vehicle, delete the personal
information registered in the vehicle
by performing a Factory Data Reset.
For details about the Factory Data
Reset, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the audio and navi-
gation system.
Note that certain personal informa-
tion inputted in the Head Unit and
the phone number of any paired
device will remain in vehicle data
logs even after the Factory Data
Reset. These data logs are strictly
for quality assurance purposes and
not viewable by any subsequent
purchaser. To have those logs de-
leted permanently from the vehicle,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
General Information
s00ak
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
s00ak03
Certain vehicle components, such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries, may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& Noise from under the Vehicle
s00ak01
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position. However, this does not
indicate a malfunction. This noise is
caused by the operation of the fuel
evaporation leakage checking system
and the operation is normal. The noise
will stop after approximately 15 min-
utes.
& Vehicle Data Recording
s00ak08
The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated
computers that will record certain data,
such as:
. Vehicle speed
. Engine speed
. Engine control information
. Shift state information
. Driving information, etc.
! Data usage
s00ak0801
SUBARU may use the data recorded in
this computer to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and
improve quality.
SUBARU will not disclose the recorded
data to a third party except:
. With the consent of the vehicle owner or
with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
. In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency
. For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit
. For research purposes where the data
is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
& Event Data Recorder
s00ak04
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
– CONTINUED –
General Information
11
0
Introduction
(14,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
General Information
12
(15,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
sill
*
Exterior .............................................................. 14
*
Interior ............................................................... 16
*
Instrument Panel............................................... 19
*
Steering Wheel.................................................. 20
*
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/
Switches .......................................................... 21
*
Combination Meter ........................................... 22
U.S.-Spec. Models ................................................22
Canada-Spec. Models...........................................23
*
Warning and Indicator Lights.......................... 24
Illustrated Index
1
Illustrated Index
(16,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Exterior
s00ay
1 Engine hood (page 462)
2 Headlights (page 227, 495)
3 Turn signal lights (page 236, 495)
4 Windshield wipers (page 238, 488)
5 Moonroof (page 154)
6 Roof rails (page 404)
7 Outside mirrors (page 251)
8 Side turn signal lights (page 236, 495)
9 Door locks (page 143)
10 Tire pressure (page 478)
11 Flat tires (page 422)
12 Tire chains (page 401)
13 Fog light (page 235, 495)
14 Tie-down hooks (page 436)
15 Towing hook (right side) (page 435)
Exterior
14
(17,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Rear window defogger (page 241)
2 Rear wiper (page 240)
3 Fuel filler door and cap (page 298)
4 Child safety locks (page 149)
5 Tie-down holes (page 436)
6 Lights (page 227, 495)
7 Turn signal lights (page 236, 495)
8 Rear gate (page 153)
9 Towing hook (page 435)
Exterior
15
1
Illustrated Index
(19,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Center information display (page 201)/
Climate control (page 258)/Audio*
2
/Na-
vigation system*
2 USB power supply (page 281)/AUX*
3 Wireless charger (page 282)
4 Glove box (page 277)
5 Select lever (page 316)
*: For details about how to use the audio and
navigation system (if equipped), refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –
Interior
17
1
Illustrated Index
(20,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Map light switches (page 274)
2 Moonroof tilt switch (page 155)
3 Moonroof slide switch (page 155)
4 Door interlock switch (page 274)
5 Buttons for MySubaru Connected Ser-
vices
NOTE
For models with MySubaru Connected
Services: Refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for MySubaru Connected
Services.
Interior
18
(21,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Instrument Panel
s00ba
1 Power window switches (page 150)
2 Remote control mirror switch (page 252)
3 Combination meter (page 162)
4 Hazard warning flasher switch (page
162)
5 Camera for Driver Monitoring System
(page 378)
6 Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 252)
7 Fuse box (page 494)
8 Hood release knob (page 462)
9 Fuel door release switch (page 298)
10 Illumination brightness control dial (page
165)
11 EV (Electric Vehicle) drive mode switch
(page 31)
12 Electronic parking brake switch (page
336)
13 View monitor switch (page 344)
14 Seat heater switches (page 49)
15 Accessory power outlet (page 280)
16 Cup holder (page 278)
Instrument Panel
19
1
Illustrated Index
(22,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Steering Wheel
s00bb
1 Audio control switch*
1
2 Talk switch for voice command system*
1
3 Cruise control switches*
2
4 Shift paddles (page 321)
5 SI-DRIVE switch (page 323)
6 Heated Steering Wheel switch (page
253)
7 SRS airbag (page 91)
8 Horn (page 254)
9 Hands-free phone switch*
1
10 Control switches for combination meter
display (page 193)
*1: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Steering Wheel
20
(23,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
s00bc
1 Windshield wiper (page 237)
2 Mist (page 238)
3 Windshield washer (page 239)
4 Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 240)
5 Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 239)
6 Wiper control lever (page 238)
7 Light control switch (page 227)
8 Fog light switch (page 235)
9 Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 227)
10 Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 230)
11 Turn signal lever (page 236)
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
21
1
Illustrated Index
(24,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Combination Meter
s00bd
& U.S.-Spec. Models
s00bd01
1 Power meter (page 162)
2 Combination meter display (page 190)
3 Digital speed screen (page 199)
4 Speedometer (page 162)
5 Fuel gauge (page 164)
6 Trip meter and odometer (page 163)
7 Select lever/gear position indicator (page
186)
8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page
164)
Combination Meter
22
(25,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Canada-Spec. Models
s00bd03
1 Power meter (page 162)
2 Combination meter display (page 190)
3 Digital speed screen (page 199)
4 Speedometer (page 162)
5 Fuel gauge (page 164)
6 Trip meter and odometer (page 163)
7 Select lever/gear position indicator (page
186)
8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page
164)
Combination Meter
23
1
Illustrated Index
(26,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Warning and Indicator Lights s00be
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 167
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
167
Rear seatbelt warning
light
169
SRS airbag system
warning light
170
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag ON indicator
light
170
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag OFF indicator
light
170
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator light
171
Charge warning light 172
Oil pressure warning
light
172
Engine low oil level
warning light
172
/ ABS warning light 174
Mark Name Page
/
Brake system warning
light
175
/
Electronic parking
brake indicator light
176
Door open indicator
light
178
Engine hood open
warning light
178
Low fuel warning light 177
All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light
178
Power steering warning
light
178
Auto Vehicle Hold indi-
cator light
177
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light
179
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF indicator light
180
Mark Name Page
Access key warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
180
Security indicator light 185
Turn signal indicator
lights
186
High beam indicator
light
186
High beam assist indi-
cator
186
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
186
LED headlight warning
light
186
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
186
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
186
Front fog light indicator
light
187
Headlight indicator light 186
Warning and Indicator Lights
24
(27,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Mark Name Page
Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.-
spec. models)
173
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
178
BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator
187
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator
187
Vehicle detected in ad-
jacent lane indicator
187
SI-DRIVE indicator
185
185
X-MODE indicator 187
Hill descent control in-
dicator light
187
Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
188
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
188
Mark Name Page
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
188
Sonar Audible Alarm
OFF indicator (if
equipped)
188
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem operation indicator
light (green) (if
equipped)
188
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem warning light (yel-
low) (if equipped)
188
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem OFF indicator light
(if equipped)
188
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop in-
dicator light (if
equipped)
189
Hybrid READY indica-
tor light
189
Hybrid fail lamp 189
Hybrid system overheat
warning light
189
EV (Electric Vehicle)
indicator
189
EV (Electric Vehicle)
drive mode indicator
31
Mark Name Page
Pedestrian alert system
warning indicator light
189
Warning and Indicator Lights
25
1
Illustrated Index
(28,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(29,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
shs
HS-1. Hybrid System Features................................ 28
Hybrid System Operation Mode.............................29
Control When Driving in Each Mode......................29
EV (Electric Vehicle) Drive Mode ...........................31
Pedestrian Alert System .......................................32
Energy Flow Screen..............................................33
HS-2. Hybrid System Precautions .......................... 35
High Voltage Battery and High Voltage Battery
Air Intake ...........................................................39
Emergency Shut Off System.................................39
Hybrid System Warning Message .........................40
HS-3. Hybrid Vehicle Driving Tips .......................... 40
HS-4. Troubleshooting ............................................ 42
When Messages Are Displayed.............................42
Hybrid System
HS
Hybrid System
(30,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
HS-1. Hybrid System Fea-
tures
shsaa
The hybrid system is a system excellent in
both economical efficiency of electric
vehicles and practicality of hybrid vehicles.
The EV driving range will vary in accor-
dance with conditions such as vehicle
speed, the amount of charge remaining
in the high voltage battery and the usage of
the climate control system. The gasoline
engine may also be used simultaneously
in accordance with driving conditions.
If the amount of electricity remaining in the
high voltage battery becomes low, the
vehicle is automatically controlled in such
a way that it can be driven as a hybrid
vehicle through the joint use of the gaso-
line engine.
NOTE
. However, as the gasoline engine is
used depending on the situation
even in driving using only the elec-
tric motor, and the gasoline engine is
provided on board as a power
source in driving using both the
electric motor and engine. For that
reason it is necessary to refuel the
vehicle. Check the fuel amount and
refill immediately when the fuel level
becomes low. Refer to “Fuel”
�P297.
. If the vehicle is not used for a long
time, the 12 V battery may discharge.
In this event, charge the 12 V battery.
In order to prevent the high voltage
battery from becoming extremely
low in charge, and turn the ignition
switch off after the gasoline engine
has stopped automatically. (If the
gasoline engine does not start up
even after approximately 10 sec-
onds have passed since the Hybrid
READY indicator light came on, the
ignition switch can be turned off
without any further action.)
. There may be no engine sound or
vibration even though the vehicle is
able to move with the Hybrid READY
indicator light is illuminated. For
safety, apply the parking brake and
make sure to shift the select lever
position to “P” when parked.
. The following sounds or vibrations
may occur when the hybrid system
is operating and are not malfunc-
tions.
– Electric motor sounds may be
made by the vehicle.
– Sounds may be heard from the
high voltage battery when the
hybrid system starts or stops.
– Relay operating sounds such as
a snap or soft clank will be
emitted from the high voltage
battery, the cargo area, when the
hybrid system is started or
stopped.
– Sounds from the hybrid system
may be heard when the back door
is open.
– Sounds may be heard from the
transmission when the gasoline
engine starts or stops, when
driving at low speeds, or during
idling.
– Engine sounds may be heard
when accelerating sharply.
– Sounds may be heard due to
regenerative braking when the
brake pedal is depressed or as
the accelerator pedal is released.
– Vibration may be felt when the
gasoline engine starts or stops.
– Cooling fan sounds may be heard
from the air intake.
. For details about maintenance, re-
pair, recycling, and disposal, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer. Do not
dispose of the vehicle yourself.
Hybrid System Features
28
(31,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Hybrid System Operation
Mode
shsaa01
The system switches automatically be-
tween being powered by only the electric
motor and powered by both the electric
motor and engine according to the driving
conditions and changes in the charge level
of the high voltage battery.
When in EV driving, the EV indicator
illuminates on the combination meter.
Refer to “EV (Electric Vehicle) Indicator”
�P189.
NOTE
. When the charge level of the high
voltage battery is high, EV driving is
used. However the engine may start
automatically at times of high load or
when driving at high speed.
. When the charge level of the high
voltage battery is low, both the
engine and electric motor are used
for driving. However if the charge
level recovers as a result of regen-
erative braking or other charging, EV
driving can be used again.
& Control When Driving in Each
Mode
shsaa03
! Driving using only the electric motor
shsaa0301
The EV driving range will vary in accor-
dance with conditions such as vehicle
speed, the amount of charge remaining
in the high voltage battery and the usage of
the climate control system. In order to drive
only on the electric motor power for a long
time, observe the following.
. Avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
deceleration and be sure to drive
smoothly. If you repeatedly accelerate,
the high voltage battery charge will
deplete quickly. Also, EV driving may
be canceled by rapid acceleration or
high vehicle speed.
. Restrain your speed as much as
possible. The distance that can be
driven in driving using only the electric
motor will reduce considerably at high
speeds.
NOTE
. EV driving range
– The EV driving range changes in
accordance with the charge sta-
tus of the high voltage battery
and the speed of the vehicle.
– Even if there is enough charge
remaining in the high voltage
battery, EV driving may be can-
celed and both the gasoline en-
gine and the electric motor are
used depending on the situation.
. Even if there is a sufficient amount of
electricity remaining in the high
voltage battery, EV driving may be
canceled and both the gasoline en-
gine and the electric motor are used
depending on the situation. EV driv-
ing will be returned automatically
after EV driving becomes possible
again.
EV driving may be canceled auto-
matically in the following circum-
stances:
– Power is needed temporarily, for
example when the accelerator
pedal is depressed firmly or when
accelerating suddenly.
– The temperature of the hybrid
system is high because the vehi-
cle has been left in the sun,
driven on a hill, driven at high
speeds, etc.
– The temperature of the hybrid
system is low.
– The climate control system is in
operation.
– The defroster button is pressed.
– The system determines that the
gasoline engine needs to be
– CONTINUED –
Hybrid System Features
29
HS
Hybrid System
(32,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
started.
The gasoline engine may also
operate in circumstances other
than those listed above, depend-
ing on conditions.
! Driving using both the electric mo-
tor and engine
shsaa0302
In driving using both the electric motor and
engine, controls are primarily carried out
as follows in accordance with the driving
conditions.
. The gasoline engine stops when the
vehicle is stopped.*
. During start off, the electric motor
(traction motor) drives the vehicle.
. During hybrid system driving, the gaso-
line engine and electric motor (traction
motor) are controlled effectively, and
the vehicle is driven with optimum fuel
efficiency. Also, when necessary, the
electric motor (traction motor) operates
as an electrical generator to charge the
high voltage battery.
. When the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed heavily, the drive force from
both the gasoline engine and the
electric motor (traction motor) is used
to accelerate.
*: When the high voltage battery requires
charging or the engine is warming up, the
gasoline engine will not automatically stop.
NOTE
The gasoline engine starts and stops
automatically. However, it may not stop
automatically in the following condi-
tions:
. During gasoline engine warm-up
. During high voltage battery char-
ging
. When the temperature of the high
voltage battery is high or low.
. The defroster button is pressed.
Depending on the circumstances, the
gasoline engine may also not stop
automatically in situations other than
those above.
If the function for stopping the engine
automatically does not operate for two
to three days, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Repeatedly driving short-distances
when the gasoline engine is cold leads
to poor fuel economy because the
gasoline engine starts and stops fre-
quently.
! When braking (regenerative brak-
ing)
shsaa0303
The electric motor (traction motor) charges
the high voltage battery.
The EV driving range can be extended by
actively using this regenerative braking to
store electricity in the high voltage battery.
Moreover, as fuel consumption is also
reduced when driving using both the
electric motor and engine, the regenera-
tive braking system can be used effec-
tively.
NOTE
. In the following situations, kinetic
energy is converted to electric en-
ergy and deceleration force can be
obtained in conjunction with the
recharging of the high voltage bat-
tery.
– The accelerator pedal is released
while driving with the select lever
position in “D” or “M”.
– The brake pedal is depressed
while driving with the select lever
position in “D” or “M”.
. When the high voltage battery is
fully charged, it is not recharged by
regenerative braking.
Hybrid System Features
30
(33,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& EV (Electric Vehicle) Drive
Mode
shsaa07
EV (Electric Vehicle) drive mode switch
EV (Electric Vehicle) drive mode indicator
When you press the EV drive mode switch,
the EV drive mode indicator lights up and
you will be able to run the vehicle in EV
drive mode.
When the EV drive mode switch is pressed
again, the vehicle returns to the hybrid
system driving mode (running the vehicle
using the engine and the electric motor).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the system
may not switch the driving mode to
EV drive mode. When the system
does not switch to EV drive mode, a
beep sounds and a warning mes-
sage is displayed on the combina-
tion meter display.
– The temperature of the hybrid
system is high because the vehi-
cle has been left in the sun,
driven on a hill, driven at high
speeds, etc.
– The temperature of the hybrid
system is low.
– The engine is warming up.
– The high voltage battery power
icon displayed on the energy flow
screen is low.
– The vehicle speed is high.
– Additional power is needed tem-
porarily, for example when the
accelerator pedal is depressed
firmly or when the vehicle accel-
erates suddenly.
– The defroster button is pressed.
– The climate control system is in
operation.
– Adaptive Cruise Control* is acti-
vated.
– Conventional Cruise Control* is
activated.
*: For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
. If you start the hybrid system when
the engine is cold, the system will
automatically start warming up the
engine, and it will not be possible to
switch to EV drive mode. After the
hybrid system starts operating and
the hybrid READY indicator light
illuminates, press the EV drive mode
switch before the engine starts.
. In the following cases, while you are
driving the vehicle in hybrid mode,
the system may automatically
switch to hybrid system driving
(running the vehicle using the en-
gine and the electric motor). This
occurs when the EV drive mode is
canceled. The EV drive mode indi-
cator will then flash and turn off. A
message will then be displayed on
the combination meter display.
– The power of the traction battery
displayed on the Energy flow
– CONTINUED –
Hybrid System Features
31
HS
Hybrid System
(34,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
screen is low.
– The vehicle speed is high.
– Additional power is needed tem-
porarily, such as when you de-
press the accelerator pedal firmly
or when the vehicle accelerates
suddenly.
& Pedestrian Alert System
shsaa06
When driving with the gasoline engine
stopped, a sound which changes in vo-
lume in accordance with the driving speed
will sound in order to warn people nearby
of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will
stop when the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 22 mph (36 km/h).
The sound is produced continuously by the
system while the vehicle is reversing.
NOTE
. The pedestrian alert system warning
indicator light blinks when a mal-
function occurs in the pedestrian
alert system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection. Refer to
“Pedestrian Alert System Warning
Indicator Light” �P189.
. In the following cases, the pedes-
trian alert system may be difficult for
surrounding people to hear.
– In very noisy areas
– In the wind or the rain
Also, as the pedestrian alert system
is installed on the front of the
vehicle, it may be more difficult to
hear from the rear of the vehicle.
Hybrid System Features
32
(35,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Energy Flow Screen
shsaa08
The status of the energy flow is shown on the combination meter display as follows.
. Power from the engine to wheels: Orange
. Power from the electric motor to wheels: Green
. Charging energy flow from the engine and wheels to the high voltage battery: Aqua blue
Display Status Display Status Display Status
When driving
using only the
engine power
When char-
ging the high
voltage battery
by using the
engine power
while the vehi-
cle is stopped
When char-
ging the high
voltage battery
with the regen-
erative brakes
When driving
using only the
electric motor
power
When there is
no energy cur-
rent
— —
When char-
ging the high
voltage battery
while driving
using the en-
gine power
When the
electric motor
is assisting the
engine
—
—
In addition, if a warning or malfunction is detected in the hybrid system, an interruption screen will be displayed on the combination meter
display. For details, refer to “Telltale Screen” �P195.
– CONTINUED –
Hybrid System Features
33
HS
Hybrid System
(36,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. High voltage battery power is consumed more than usual when driving only using the electric motor power for a long time.
. High voltage battery power is consumed more than usual when the vehicle is continuously or repeatedly driven only using
the electric motor power. Although this is not a problem, avoid stop-and-go driving as much as possible by methods such
as checking traffic reports before you start driving.
Hybrid System Features
34
(37,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
HS-2. Hybrid System Precau-
tions
shsab
WARNING
. Take care when handling the
hybrid system, as it contains a
high voltage system (about 650
volts at maximum) as well as
parts that become extremely hot
when the hybrid system is oper-
ating. Obey the warning labels
attached to the vehicle. The high
voltage system is very danger-
ous and improper operation can
cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or
serious injury.
. When driving on the electric mo-
tor alone, there is no sound
coming from the engine. There-
fore, there is a possibility that the
surrounding people do not notice
the vehicle starting and ap-
proaching. Pay attention to your
surroundings while driving.
– CONTINUED –
Hybrid System Precautions
35
HS
Hybrid System
(38,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Air compressor
2 Power control unit
3 Electric motor (traction motor)
4 High voltage battery
5 High voltage battery cooling fan
6 Service plug
7 High voltage cable (orange)
8 12 V battery
CAUTION
Do not remove the warning label for
high voltage battery attached to the
top of the high voltage battery.
Hybrid System Precautions
36
(39,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
. The vehicle has high voltage DC
and AC systems as well as a 12
volts system. DC and AC high
voltage is very dangerous and
can cause severe burns and
electric shock that may result in
death or serious injury.
– Never touch, disassemble, re-
move or replace the high vol-
tage parts, cables or their
connectors.
– The hybrid system will be-
come hot after starting as the
system uses high voltage. Be
careful of both the high vol-
tage and the high tempera-
ture, and always obey the
warning labels attached to
the vehicle.
. Observe the following precau-
tions to reduce the risk of death
or serious injury when an acci-
dent occurs:
– Pull your vehicle off the road,
apply the parking brake, shift
the select lever position to
“P”, and turn the hybrid sys-
tem off.
– Do not touch the high voltage
parts, cables or connectors.
– If electric wires are exposed
inside or outside your vehicle,
an electric shock may occur.
Never touch exposed electric
wires.
– Do not touch the battery if
liquid is leaking from or ad-
hering to it.
If electrolyte (organic electro-
lyte) from the high voltage
battery comes into contact
with eyes or skin, it could
cause blindness or skin
wounds. In the event that it
comes into contact with eyes
or skin, wash it off immedi-
ately with a large amount of
water, and seek immediate
medical attention.
– If electrolyte is leaking from
the high voltage battery, do
not approach the vehicle.
In the event that the high
voltage battery is damaged,
the internal construction of
the battery will prevent a large
amount of electrolyte from
leaking out. However, any
electrolyte that does leak out
will give off a vapor. This
vapor is an irritant to skin and
eyes and could cause acute
poisoning if inhaled.
– Do not bring burning or high-
temperature items close to the
electrolyte. The electrolyte
may ignite and cause a fire.
– If a fire occurs in the hybrid
vehicle, leave the vehicle as
soon as possible. Never use a
fire extinguisher that is not
meant for electric fires. Using
even a small amount of water
may be dangerous.
– Carefully inspect the ground
under the vehicle. If you find
that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, the fuel system may
have been damaged. Leave
the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble.
. Never resell, hand over or modify
the high voltage battery. To pre-
vent accidents, hybrid batteries
that have been removed from a
disposed vehicle are collected
through a SUBARU dealer. Do
not dispose of the battery your-
self. Unless the battery is prop-
erly collected, the following may
occur, resulting in death or ser-
– CONTINUED –
Hybrid System Precautions
37
HS
Hybrid System
(40,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
ious injury:
– The high voltage battery may
be illegally disposed of or
dumped, and it is hazardous
to the environment or some-
one may touch a high voltage
part, resulting in an electric
shock.
– The high voltage battery is
intended to be used exclu-
sively with your hybrid vehi-
cle. If the high voltage battery
is used outside of your vehicle
or modified in any way, acci-
dents such as electric shock,
heat generation, smoke gen-
eration, explosion and elec-
trolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing
over your vehicle, the possibi-
lity of an accident is extremely
high because the person re-
ceiving the vehicle may not be
aware of these dangers.
. If your vehicle is disposed of
without the high voltage battery
having been removed, there is a
danger of serious electric shock
if high voltage parts, cables and
their connectors are touched. In
the event that your vehicle must
be disposed of, the high voltage
battery must be disposed of by
your SUBARU dealer. If the high
voltage battery is not disposed of
properly, it may cause electric
shock that can result in death or
serious injury.
NOTE
. High voltage parts and cables on the
hybrid vehicles incorporate electro-
magnetic shielding. Therefore they
emit approximately the same
amount of electromagnetic waves
as conventional gasoline powered
vehicles or home electronic appli-
ances.
. Your vehicle may cause sound inter-
ference in some third party-pro-
duced radio parts.
. The high voltage battery has a
limited service life.
The high voltage battery capacity
(the ability to hold a charge) reduces
with time and use in the same way as
other rechargeable batteries. The
extent at which capacity reduces
changes drastically depending on
the environment (ambient tempera-
ture, etc.) and usage conditions,
such as how the vehicle is driven
and how the high voltage battery is
charged. This is a natural character-
istic of lithium-ion batteries, and is
not a malfunction.
Also, even though the distance that
can be driven using only the electric
motor decreases when the high
voltage battery capacity reduces,
driveability does not significantly
become worse.
. When the high voltage battery is
extremely cold (below −228F
(−308C)) under the influence of the
outside temperature, it may not be
possible to start the hybrid system.
In this case, try to start the hybrid
system again after the temperature
of the high voltage battery increases
due to the outside temperature in-
crease.
. Do not place a ferromagnetic sub-
stance in the cargo area. It could
have a negative impact on electric
devices.
Hybrid System Precautions
38
(41,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& High Voltage Battery and
High Voltage Battery Air In-
take
shsab01
High voltage battery air intake
There is a high voltage battery air intake on
the left side of the vehicle, near the rear
seat for the purpose of cooling the high
voltage battery. If the high voltage battery
air intake become blocked, the high
voltage battery may overheat, which will
lead to a reduction in high voltage battery
output.
CAUTION
. Make sure not to block the high-
voltage battery air intake with
anything, such as a plastic cover,
or luggage. The high voltage
battery may overheat and be
damaged.
. Do not wet or allow foreign sub-
stances to enter the high voltage
battery air intake as this may
cause a short circuit and damage
to the high voltage battery.
. Do not carry large amounts of
water, such as water cooler bot-
tles, in the vehicle. If water spills
onto the high voltage battery, the
battery may be damaged. Have
the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer.
. Do not cover the high voltage
battery air intake (located on the
left next to the rear seat) with
luggage or clothes. It is important
that no liquids or any other sub-
stances or objects be allowed to
enter the air intake. Please advise
passengers in this area to use
care around the air intake to
prevent any debris from entering.
Doing so may result in overheat-
ing or malfunctioning of the high
voltage battery.
. When the seatbelt for the rear left
seat is not in use, remove it from
the window-side belt guide and
retract it fully to avoid blocking
the high voltage battery air in-
take.
. If “High Voltage Battery Cooling
Performance Reduced” and “Bat-
tery Air Cooling Filter Is Clogged
Check Owner’s Manual” are dis-
played on the combination meter
display, check that nothing is
blocking the high voltage battery
air intake. If the message con-
tinues to be displayed when the
high voltage battery air intake is
not blocked, clean the high vol-
tage battery air intake to prevent
it from clogging. For details, refer
to “Cleaning the High Voltage
Battery Air Intake” �P452.
. Clean the high voltage battery air
intake periodically to prevent it
from clogging. For details, refer
to “Cleaning the High Voltage
Battery Air Intake” �P452.
& Emergency Shut Off System
shsab02
When a certain level of impact is detected
by the impact sensor, the emergency shut
off system blocks off the high voltage
current and stops the fuel pump to mini-
mize the risk of electrocution and fuel
leakage. If the emergency shut off system
– CONTINUED –
Hybrid System Precautions
39
HS
Hybrid System
(42,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
activates, your vehicle will not restart. To
restart the hybrid system, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
& Hybrid System Warning Mes-
sage
shsab03
A message is automatically displayed
when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid
system or an improper operation is at-
tempted.
If a warning message is shown on the
combination meter display, read the mes-
sage and follow the instructions.
NOTE
If a warning light comes on or a warning
message is displayed, the hybrid sys-
tem may not start. Contact your
SUBARU dealer.
HS-3. Hybrid Vehicle Driving
Tips
shsac
WARNING
. Always start the hybrid system
while sitting in the driver’s seat.
Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while starting the hybrid
system under any circum-
stances. Doing so may cause an
accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
. When restarting the hybrid sys-
tem after an emergency shut-
down while driving, press the
ignition switch. When restarting
the hybrid system after stopping
the vehicle, change the select
lever position to “P” and then
press the ignition switch.
For economical and ecological driving, pay
attention to the following points.
. Use of power meter
Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping
the power meter within the Eco area. Refer
to “Power Meter” �P162.
. Select lever position operation
Shift the select lever position to the “D”
position when stopped at a traffic light, or
when driving in heavy traffic.
Shift the select lever position to the “P”
position when parking.
Selecting the “N” position has no positive
effect on fuel consumption. In the “N”
position, the gasoline engine operates
but electricity cannot be generated. Also,
when using the climate control system,
etc., the high voltage battery power is
consumed.
If the remaining power of the high voltage
battery is low, the vehicle may become
inoperable.
Even if you are able to drive the vehicle,
the AWD system or EyeSight system may
not function normally.
. Accelerator pedal/brake pedal op-
eration
– Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid
abrupt acceleration and decelera-
tion. Gradual acceleration and de-
celeration will make more effective
use of the electric motor (traction
motor) without having to use gaso-
line engine power.
– Avoid repeated acceleration. Re-
peated acceleration consumes high
voltage battery power, resulting in
poor fuel consumption. Battery
power can be restored by driving
with the accelerator pedal slightly
released.
Hybrid Vehicle Driving Tips
40
(43,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
– Make sure to operate the brakes
gently and in a timely manner when
braking. A greater amount of elec-
trical energy can be regenerated
when slowing down.
. Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration,
as well as long waits at traffic lights, will
lead to high fuel and electricity consump-
tion. Check traffic reports before leaving
and avoid delays as much as possible.
When driving in a traffic jam, gently release
the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to
move forward slightly while avoiding over-
use of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can
help control excessive electricity and fuel
consumption.
. Highway driving
Control and maintain the vehicle at a
constant speed. Before stopping at a toll
booth or similar, allow plenty of time to
release the accelerator and gently apply
the brakes. A greater amount of electrical
energy can be regenerated when slowing
down.
Hybrid Vehicle Driving Tips
41
HS
Hybrid System
(44,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
HS-4. Troubleshooting shsaf
& When Messages Are Displayed
shsaf04
Messages related to the high voltage battery are displayed on the combination meter display. When this occurs, follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
Symptom Likely cause Correction procedure
If “Hybrid System Output Reduced” is
displayed.
This message may appear while driving under severe
operating conditions, not a malfunction. For example,
when driving up a long steep hill or driving up a steep
hill in reverse.
If this message is displayed, the hybrid system over-
heat warning light also illuminates at the same time.
Refer to “
Hybrid System Overheat Warning Light” �P189.
If “High Voltage Battery Cooling Per-
formance Reduced” and “Battery Air
Cooling Filter Is Clogged Check
Owner’s Manual” are displayed.
This message may appear if the high voltage battery
cooling filter is clogged or the high voltage battery air
intake is blocked or obstructed.
Clean the high voltage battery air intake to prevent it
from clogging. Refer to “
Cleaning the High Voltage
Battery Air Intake” �P452.
If “High Voltage Battery Inspection
Required See Your Retailer” is dis-
played.
The high voltage battery is scheduled to be inspected
or replaced.
If you continue to drive the vehicle without having the
battery inspected, the hybrid system will eventually no
longer start.
Consult your SUBARU dealer to have your vehicle
inspected.
If “High Voltage Battery Level Low”
and “Charging Will Start after Shifting
to Position Other Than N” are dis-
played.
The shift position is set to “N” for a certain period of time
and the charge of the high voltage battery is low.
If you want to move the vehicle, set the shift position to
“P” and restart the hybrid system.
If “No Driving” and “Check Owner’s
Manual” are displayed.
A serious malfunction has occurred in the hybrid
system that prevents the vehicle from running.
Consult your SUBARU dealer to have your vehicle
inspected.
If “Hybrid System Disabled” is dis-
played.
The hybrid system is in need of inspection.
Consult your SUBARU dealer to have your vehicle
inspected.
NOTE
If you see a message other than any of the above and the problem persists, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Troubleshooting
42
(45,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s01
1-1. Front Seats........................................................ 44
Power Seat ...........................................................47
Manual Seat..........................................................47
Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................48
1-2. Seat Heater........................................................ 49
1-3. Rear Seats ......................................................... 50
Important Precautions about the Hybrid System....51
Folding Down the Rear Seatback ..........................51
Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................54
Armrest ................................................................56
1-4. Seatbelts............................................................ 56
Seatbelt Safety Tips..............................................56
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................57
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency
Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ..............................58
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ........................58
Fastening the Seatbelt ..........................................58
Seatbelt Maintenance............................................66
1-5. Seatbelt Extender ............................................. 66
1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners ..................................... 68
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner ..............69
Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt
Pretensioners .....................................................70
System Monitors...................................................70
System Servicing..................................................71
Precautions against Vehicle Modification ..............71
1-7. Rear Seat Reminder ......................................... 72
1-8. Child Restraint Systems .................................. 72
Safety Precautions................................................72
Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint
Systems.............................................................74
Choosing a Child Restraint System ......................75
When Installing the Forward Facing Child
Restraint System on the Front Passenger’s
Seat ...................................................................76
Installing Child Restraint Systems with
ALR/ELR Seatbelt...............................................77
Installing a Booster Seat or Booster Cushion .......83
Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use
of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ..........85
Tether Anchorages ...............................................90
1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)............................................... 91
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag
System ..............................................................91
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag
System for Accessories and Any Objects ...........94
General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag
System and Children ..........................................97
Components ........................................................99
SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System......... 101
SRS Front Seat Side Airbag, SRS Rear Seat
Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag ................ 113
SRS Airbag System Monitors ............................. 120
SRS Airbag System Servicing ............................ 121
Precautions against Vehicle Modification............ 122
How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer
concerning Modifications for Persons with
Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced
Airbag System ................................................. 123
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(46,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1-1. Front Seats
s01aa
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing, as personal injury or loss of
vehicle control may occur.
. Before adjusting the seat, ensure
nothing is blocking the adjusting
mechanism.
. After adjusting the seat, move it
back and forth to ensure the seat
is securely locked. If it is not, it
may move suddenly or the seat-
belt may not operate properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking mechanism
and cause an accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
back and upright in the seat. To
reduce the risk of sliding under
the seatbelt in a collision, the
front seatbacks should always
be used in the upright position
while the vehicle is running. If the
front seatbacks are not in the
upright position and a collision
occurs, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not seated
in the proper upright position
when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries.
Because the SRS airbag needs
enough space for deployment,
the driver should always sit up-
right and well back in the seat as
far from the steering wheel as
practical while still maintaining
full vehicle control, and the front
passenger should move the seat
as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. SUBARU strongly recommends
that ALL infants and children
(including those in child restraint
systems) sit in the REAR seat
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Front Seats
44
(47,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. According
to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning child re-
straint systems, refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” �P72.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the seat-
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may interfere
with the proper operation of the
following systems and could result
in serious injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS front seat side airbag
. SRS seat cushion airbag (if
equipped)
. Front seat heater
. Power seat (if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
Front Seats
45
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(48,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
Do not press your feet onto the
instrument panel. Doing so may
prevent the occupant detection
function of the SRS airbag system
and SRS airbag from functioning
correctly. This may result in serious
injury or death in the event of an
accident.
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
Front Seats
46
(49,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Power Seat
s01aa02
! Driver’s seat
s01aa0208
1 Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2 Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3 Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4 Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
5 Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of
the switch.
& Manual Seat
s01aa01
! Forward and backward adjustment
s01aa0101
1. Sit in the seat to adjust.
2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to
the desired position, and then release
the lever.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
– CONTINUED –
Front Seats
47
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(50,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Reclining the seatback
s01aa0102
1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the
seatback to the desired position, and
then release the lever.
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
pulling up the lever. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
& Head Restraint Adjustment
s01aa04
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints backwards.
Doing so will prevent the head
restraints from functioning as
intended. Therefore, when the
head restraints are removed, all
head restraints must be rein-
stalled properly to protect vehicle
occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat
head restraints are designed to
be installed into the rear seats
only. Do not attempt to install the
front seat head restraints into the
rear seats, or the rear seat head
restraints into the front seats.
Both the driver’s seat and front passen-
ger’s seat are equipped with head re-
straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-
ble in the following ways.
! Head restraint height adjustment
s01aa0401
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
Front Seats
48
(51,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
NOTE
It is not possible to remove or install the
head restraint without reclining the
front seatback. Reclining the front seat-
back and then remove or install the
head restraint.
1-2. Seat Heater
s01ab
The seat heater is equipped in the front
seats.
The seat heater operates when the ignition
switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
CAUTION
. Do not put hard or heavy objects
or ones with protrusions on the
seat, and do not stab the seat
with sharp objects, such as pins
or needles.
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn off the seat heater.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the hybrid system is not
running can cause 12 V battery dis-
charge.
– CONTINUED –
Seat Heater
49
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(52,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 HI – Rapid heating
2 LO – Normal heating
3 Off
A Left-hand side
B Right-hand side
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or
“HI” position on the switch, as desired,
depending on the temperature.
Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
1-3. Rear Seats
s01ac
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits back
and upright in the seat. Do not place
cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. By doing so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Rear Seats
50
(53,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
as it could tumble forward and injure
passengers in the event of a sudden
stop or accident.
& Important Precautions about
the Hybrid System
s01ac07
High voltage battery air intake
CAUTION
The high voltage battery air intake is
located next to the rear seat on the
left. Conform to the following in-
structions to prevent overheating of
the high-voltage battery or malfunc-
tion of the hybrid system.
. Do not put any objects near the
high voltage battery air intake.
. Clean the high voltage battery air
intake periodically to prevent it
from clogging.
. When the seatbelt for the rear left
seat is not in use, remove it from
the window-side belt guide and
retract it fully to avoid blocking
the high voltage battery air in-
take.
. It is important that no liquids or
any other substances or objects
be allowed to enter the air intake.
Advise passengers in this area to
use care around the air intake to
prevent any debris from entering.
. If water or any objects enter it, it
may malfunction. When a large
amount of water or any objects
enter it, contact your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
& Folding Down the Rear Seat-
back
s01ac02
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the rear
seat. Not doing so creates a risk
of injury or property damage if
the seatback suddenly folds
down.
– CONTINUED –
Rear Seats
51
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(54,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
which could cause serious injury
or death.
1 Striker
WARNING
When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precautions. Failure to do so
may lead to serious injury or an
accident because the operation effi-
ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
. The seatbelt should not pass
behind the striker for the seat-
back.
CAUTION
. Do not hang luggage etc. on the
striker. The possibility exists that
the seatback may not be able to
be fixed firmly in place. This
could lead to unexpected acci-
dents
. When returning the seatback to
its original position, raise the
seatback while holding it. Do not
hold the belt guide or strap when
raising the seatback.
. Do not hang anything on the lock
release strap or belt guide.
Rear Seats
52
(55,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Do not insert the lock release
strap into the hole of the strap
attachment part.
! Folding down the rear seatback
s01ac0202
Window-side belt guide
1. To remove the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in
the belt guide, and then slide the rest of
the belt out.
2. Lower the head restraint.
Lock release straps
3. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock
release straps upwards then fold the
seatback down.
NOTE
When operating the lock release straps,
pull them upward. If you pull the lock
release straps forward or diagonally,
there will be some resistance that
makes the straps feel heavy or slow to
respond, and smooth operation will not
be possible.
! Return the rear seatback
s01ac0204
WARNING
. When returning the seatback to
its original position, observe the
following precaution.
Failure to observe the precaution
may damage the seatbelt, impair-
ing its effectiveness, and possi-
bly result in a serious injury.
. When returning the seatback to
its original position, pull the
seatbelt out towards the vehicle
exterior so that it will not be
caught between the seatback
and the trim.
– CONTINUED –
Rear Seats
53
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(56,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place.
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, shake it slightly to
confirm that it is securely in place. If
it is not securely fixed in place, it
may suddenly fold down in the event
of sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area. Both
could cause serious injury or death.
Window-side belt guide
To pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide, draw out the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in the
belt guide, and then slide the rest of the
belt in so that the entire belt fits inside the
belt guide.
CAUTION
When the seatbelt for the rear left
seat is not in use, remove the
seatbelt from the guide and retract
it fully to avoid blocking the high
voltage battery air intake. Other-
wise, the high voltage battery may
overheat and malfunction. For de-
tails, refer to “High Voltage Battery
and High Voltage Battery Air Intake”
�P39.
& Head Restraint Adjustment
s01ac03
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
the head restraints are removed,
all head restraints must be re-
installed properly to protect ve-
hicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat
head restraints are designed to
be installed into the rear seats
only. Do not attempt to install the
front seat head restraints into the
rear seats, or the rear seat head
restraints into the front seats.
Rear Seats
54
(57,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Rear windows side seating position
s01ac0301
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
After installing the head restraint, make
sure it is securely locked.
NOTE
When the head restraint cannot be
pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
cient clearance between the head re-
straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
then perform the installation and re-
moval tasks.
! Rear center seating position
s01ac0302
1 Incorrect (retracted position)
2 Correct (extended position)
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
– CONTINUED –
Rear Seats
55
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(58,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
& Armrest
s01ac01
To lower the armrest, pull the armrest’s top
edge.
WARNING
. Make sure to have the rear pas-
sengers wear the seatbelts be-
fore lowering the armrest. If the
rear passengers wear the seat-
belts after lowering the armrest,
seatbelts cannot provide maxi-
mum restraint, causing serious
injuries.
. To avoid serious injury, never
allow passengers to sit on the
center armrest while the vehicle
is in motion.
1-4. Seatbelts
s01ae
& Seatbelt Safety Tips
s01ae01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-
port only one person. Never use a
single belt for two or more per-
sons – even children. Otherwise,
in an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
Seatbelts
56
(59,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. SUBARU strongly recommends
that ALL infants and children
(including those in child restraint
systems) sit in the REAR seat
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. According
to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning child re-
straint systems, refer to “Child
Restraint Systems” �P72.
This vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record whether the seatbelt is in use by the
front passenger when an SRS frontal, side
or curtain airbag deploys.
! Infants or small children
s01ae0101
Use a child restraint system that is suitable
for this vehicle. Refer to “Child Restraint
Systems” �P72.
! Children
s01ae0102
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
s01ae0103
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
s01ae02
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
57
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(60,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR)
s01ae03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional locking mode,
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
“Installing Child Restraint Systems with
ALR/ELR Seatbelt” �P77.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt Warning Light
and Chime
s01ae04
Refer to “Seatbelt Warning Light and
Chime” �P167.
& Fastening the Seatbelt
s01ae06
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
Seatbelts
58
(61,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that has
been closed up in sunny weather;
they could burn an occupant. Do not
touch such hot parts until they cool.
! Front seatbelts
s01ae0601
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and
pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
59
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(62,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
s01ae060101
Adjust the shoulder belt anchor height to
the position best suited for the driver/front
passenger. Always adjust the anchor
height so that the shoulder belt passes
over the middle of the shoulder without
touching the neck.
To raise:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
s01ae060102
1 Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt)
s01ae0602
WARNING
Fastening your seatbelt with the
shoulder belt twisted can increase
the risk and severity of injuries in an
accident. When attaching the
shoulder belt to the belt guide, make
sure that the shoulder belt is not
twisted.
Window-side belt guide
1. To pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide, draw out the seatbelt, insert one
Seatbelts
60
(63,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
edge of the belt into the open gap in the
belt guide, and then slide the rest of the
belt in so that the entire belt fits inside
the belt guide.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and
pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
s01ae060201
1 Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
Window-side belt guide
2. To remove the seatbelt, insert one
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
61
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(64,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
edge of the belt into the open gap in the
belt guide, and then slide the rest of the
belt out.
3. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
CAUTION
When the seatbelt for the rear left
seat is not in use, remove the
seatbelt from the guide and retract
it fully to avoid blocking the high
voltage battery air intake. Other-
wise, the high voltage battery may
overheat and malfunction. For de-
tails, refer to “High Voltage Battery
and High Voltage Battery Air Intake”
�P39.
! Rear center seatbelt
s01ae0603
1 Center seatbelt tongue plate
2 Anchor tongue plate
3 Anchor buckle
4 Center seatbelt buckle
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the anchor
tongue plate into the mating buckle
(on right-hand side), always check
that the webbing is not twisted.
WARNING
. Be sure to fasten both tongue
plates to the respective buckles.
If the seatbelt is used only as a
shoulder belt (with the anchor
Seatbelts
62
(65,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
tongue plate not fastened to the
anchor buckle on the right-hand
side), it cannot properly restrain
the wearer in position in an
accident, possibly resulting in
serious injury or death.
. Before fastening the seatbelt,
confirm that the seatbelt is routed
through the center seat belt
guide. A seatbelt not routed
through the center seat belt guide
can cause neck injuries during
sudden braking or in a collision,
since it may slip up on the neck.
The rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
seatbelt holder on the right side of the
cargo area.
1. Raise the head restraint to the ex-
tended position. Do not remove the
head restraint.
2. Remove the center seatbelt tongue
plate, and then slide the webbing to
remove the seatbelt from the belt
holder and pull out the seatbelt slowly.
Center seat belt guide
3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it
through the center seat belt guide as
follows: First insert one edge of the belt
into the open gap in the belt guide; then
slide the rest of the belt in, so that the
whole belt fits inside.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
63
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(66,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
4. Make sure that the “ ” mark on the
anchor tongue plate and the “
” mark
on the anchor buckle face outwards.
5. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a
click is heard.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and
pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
6. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle until it
clicks.
7. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt. And place the lap
belt as low as possible on your hips,
not on your waist.
Seatbelts
64
(67,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Unfastening the seatbelt
s01ae060301
1 Button
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side)
to unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
2. Insert a center seatbelt tongue plate or
other hard pointed object into the slot in
the anchor buckle on the right-hand
side and push it in. The anchor tongue
plate will then disconnect from the
buckle.
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Then, pass the webbing
under the belt holder and insert the
anchor tongue plate into the holder.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
65
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(68,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit
against the trim, causing damage to
the trim.
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored.
& Seatbelt Maintenance
s01ae07
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and
lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the
belts because this could seriously affect
their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,
damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
place the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
1-5. Seatbelt Extender
s01ai
If the front seatbelts are not long enough to
permit the tongue plate to engage with the
seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt ex-
tender is available from your SUBARU
dealer. When ordering an extender, only
order one particularly designed for your
vehicle. See your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
The extender adds approximately 8 inches
(200 mm) of length and it can be used for
either the driver or front passenger seating
position.
For the safety of others, the extender
should be removed after each use, espe-
cially if the next person using the seatbelt
does not need one.
Seatbelt Extender
66
(69,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
Be sure to observe the following
when using the seatbelt extender.
Failure to follow these instructions
and warnings could reduce the ef-
fectiveness of the seatbelt and re-
sult in more serious injury or death
in the event of a collision.
. Never use the seatbelt extender
with a child restraint system, as it
may not securely hold the re-
straint system in place during an
accident, significantly increasing
the risk of death or serious injury.
. Never use the extender when the
belt itself is long enough to
permit it to be buckled properly.
If removal of heavy clothing is all
that is needed to permit the
seatbelt to be buckled properly,
remove the heavy clothing and
do not use the extender.
. Never leave the seatbelt exten-
der’s tongue plate engaged with
the seatbelt buckle when not in
use. Doing so may prevent the
airbag system from functioning
properly.
. Never connect the seatbelt exten-
der to the passenger seatbelt
buckle when the passenger seat
is empty; doing so may prevents
the airbag system from function-
ing properly.
. Do not use the extender if the
buckle of the extender rests over
the abdomen.
. Do not let someone else use the
extender. Use of an extender
when it is not needed could
reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and result in more ser-
ious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
. Use the extender only for the
front seatbelts and only for the
model for which it was originally
provided. Never use the extender
for the rear seatbelts or for a
different model.
. Before you fasten a seatbelt ex-
tender, make sure that the seat-
belt extender is not twisted. A
twisted seatbelt extender can
increase the risk of a severe
injury in an accident.
. Do not use more than one seat-
belt extender at a time. Doing so
could decrease the effectiveness
of the seatbelt and increase the
risk of injury or death in an
accident.
. Do not use a seatbelt extender
that has been used in an accident
or damaged.
WARNING
. Make sure that the front passen-
ger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
light is on when you use a
seatbelt extender in the front
passenger’s seat. The front pas-
senger’s frontal airbag OFF in-
dicator must also be off. If it is on,
the front passenger’s SRS airbag
will not deploy in a collision,
which could result in death or
serious injury. Refer to “Front
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelt Extender
67
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(70,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON
and OFF Indicator Lights”
�P170.
. The following conditions may
cause the SRS frontal airbag
system to detect that the driver
and front passenger are wearing
seatbelts, which prevents the
SRS frontal airbag system from
operating correctly.
– The tongue plates of the driver
and front passenger seatbelt
extenders are inserted into the
seatbelt buckles, but the re-
spective extenders and seat-
belts are not connected.
– Leaving the tongue plate of
the extender inserted into the
seatbelt buckle when not in
use.
These conditions may prevent
the seatbelt warning light and
warning alarm from operating
correctly. They may also prevent
the SRS frontal airbags from
operating correctly in a collision,
which can result in injury or
death. When you use a seatbelt
extender, always attach it to the
seatbelt buckle and seatbelt ton-
gue plate correctly.
To connect the extender to the seatbelt,
insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt
buckle so that the “PRESS” marks on the
buckle-release buttons of the extender
and the seatbelt are both facing the same
direction, as shown in the illustration. You
will hear a click when the tongue plate
locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seatbelt, press on the
buckle-release button on the extender, not
on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and exten-
der itself.
1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners
s01af
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt
pretensioner.
. Driver’s seatbelt
. Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Window-side rear passenger’s seat-
belts
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to be activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal and
side collision and rollover accident.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” �P56.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the seatbelt retractor assemblies
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners or surrounding area. This
could result in accidental activa-
tion of the seatbelt pretensioners
or could make the system inop-
erative, possibly resulting in ser-
ious injury. Seatbelt preten-
sioners have no user-serviceable
parts. For required servicing of
Seatbelt Pretensioners
68
(71,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
seatbelt retractors equipped with
seatbelt pretensioners, consult
your SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding seatbelt retrac-
tor assemblies equipped with
seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts
or in rear impacts. The pretensioner
can also be activated by the follow-
ing sensors.
– Front impact sensors
– Side impact sensors
– Rollover sensor
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is acti-
vated, the seatbelt retractor assem-
blies equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners should be replaced only by
an authorized SUBARU dealer.
When replacing seatbelt retractor
assemblies, use only genuine
SUBARU parts.
. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
pretensioner does not retract or
cannot be pulled out due to a mal-
function or activation of the preten-
sioner, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or
surrounding area has been da-
maged, contact your SUBARU deal-
er as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the
vehicle is equipped with seatbelt
pretensioners. Also, notify the buyer
of the contents in this section.
& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt
Pretensioner
s01af01
NOTE
This section is applicable to the follow-
ing components.
. Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-
side)
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, any
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-
sioner includes a tension reducing device
which limits the peak forces exerted by the
seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
collision.
The window-side rear passenger’s seat-
belt pretensioner includes a tension redu-
cing device that limits the peak forces
exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in
the event of a collision.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelt Pretensioners
69
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(72,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Adaptive force limiter
The front passenger’s side adaptive force
limiter will select a reducing load to the suit
body size of occupant as detected by the
occupant detection sensor.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt
and Lap Belt Pretensioners
s01af02
NOTE
This section is applicable to the driver’s
seatbelt.
1 Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner)
2 Lap belt pretensioner
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, any
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple-
mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
located at the base of the center pillar. The
lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls
in the belt to eliminate slack if a certain
level of frontal collision force is detected.
As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front
seat occupant more effectively.
The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes
a tension reducing device which limits the
peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the
occupant in the event of a collision.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
& System Monitors
s01af03
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
The seatbelt pretensioners share the
control module with the SRS airbag
system. Therefore, if any malfunction
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the
Seatbelt Pretensioners
70
(73,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
SRS airbag system warning light will
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS Airbag
System Monitors” �P120.
& System Servicing
s01af04
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of
the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
CAUTION
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Compo-
nents” �P99.
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt
retractors, have the work performed
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against Vehicle
Modification
s01af05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts to your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
Seatbelt Pretensioners
71
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(74,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1-7. Rear Seat Reminder
s01at
This function prompts the driver to confirm
the presence of passengers and cargo in
the rear.
This function will be activated when the
rear doors are opened and closed.
It alerts the driver by warning messages on
the combination meter display and beeps
when the ignition switch is turned from the
“ON” position to the “OFF” position.
NOTE
. This function does not directly de-
tect passengers and cargo in the
rear seat.
. This function detects the opening
and closing of the rear doors. In this
situation, there is the possibility that
the following phenomenon may oc-
cur.
– It may alert the driver even if there
are no passengers or cargo in the
rear seat.
– It may not alert the driver even if
there are passengers and cargo
in the rear seat.
. This function can be set to on or off
by the “Car settings”. For details,
refer to “Car settings” �P214.
. The ON/OFF setting will not be
changed even if the ignition switch
is turned to the “OFF” position.
. The ON/OFF setting will be returned
to the default setting if the 12 V
battery is removed.
1-8. Child Restraint Systems
s01ag
& Safety Precautions
s01ag19
Infants and children must be placed in an
infant or child restraint system on the rear
seat while riding in the vehicle.
You must use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower
and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)” �P85).
Rear Seat Reminder
72
(75,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing the child restraint system,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
. Do not leave children in the car
unattended. High interior tem-
peratures may cause heat stroke
and dehydration that result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on
their lap or in their arms while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child (or infant)
from injury in a collision, because
the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the
vehicle. Additionally, if a passenger
holds a child on their lap or in their
arms in the front seat, they expose
the child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times when in the
vehicle. Never allow a child to stand
or kneel on any seat. An unrest-
rained child will be thrown forward
during a sudden stop or in an
accident and can be injured ser-
iously. Additionally, a child who
stands or kneels on or in front of
the front seat is exposed to another
serious danger. Since the SRS air-
bag deploys with considerable
speed and force, the child could be
injured or even killed.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
73
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(76,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Safety Tips for Installing
Child Restraint Systems
s01ag16
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If
a seatbelt extender is used when
installing a child restraint sys-
tem, the seatbelt will not securely
hold the child restraint system.
Use of a seatbelt extender could
cause death or serious injury to
children or other passengers in
sudden braking, swerving, or
accidents.
. Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise, it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
. Several types of child restraint
systems may conceal the buckle
of the neighboring seat. If the
occupant of the neighboring seat
cannot correctly fasten the seat-
belt, that person must move to a
different seat. If the seatbelt can-
not be correctly fastened, there is
the risk of serious injury or death
in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
. If the child restraint system can-
not be correctly installed be-
cause it contacts the driver’s
seat, move the child restraint
system to a different seat. If it
cannot be installed in a different
seat (other than the driver’s seat),
adjust the front seat so that
contact does not occur.
. Even with advanced airbags, in-
fants and children can be ser-
iously injured by the airbag. Seat
children in the rear seat properly
restrained. The SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that
reason, be sure to secure ALL
types of child restraint systems
on the REAR seats. You should
choose a restraint system which
is appropriate for the child’s age,
height and weight. According to
accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in
the front seating positions.
. Do not use lower anchorages for
a seat in the center seating posi-
tion unless a child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer’s instructions
permit and specify using anchors
spaced as far apart as those in
this vehicle.
. Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
Child Restraint Systems
74
(77,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
(bar).
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Do not allow children to lean their
heads or any other parts of their
bodies against the door or the
area of the seat, front and rear
pillars or roof side rails. The SRS
front seat side airbags, SRS rear
seat side airbags and SRS curtain
airbags deploy even if children
are seated in the child restraint
system, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to
the child.
. To secure the child restraint sys-
tem, be sure to comply with all
installation instructions provided
by the child restraint system
manufacturer. Not doing so could
result in death or serious injury to
children in a sudden stop or
accident.
. When installing a child restraint
system (except when using
LATCH), always ensure the seat-
belt is threaded through the belt
guide to secure the child restraint
system.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
& Choosing a Child Restraint
System
s01ag02
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards for the United States or
of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system or
the manufacturer’s statement of compli-
ance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to make
sure that the child restraint system is
compatible with the vehicle in which it will
be used.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
75
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(78,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
Some sizes of child restraint systems
may not fit the vehicle seat. Before
purchasing a child restraint system,
check whether it fits on the vehicle seat.
& When Installing the Forward
Facing Child Restraint Sys-
tem on the Front Passenger’s
Seat
s01ag15
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. The front passenger’s seat is not
equipped with tether an-
chorages. Therefore, when in-
stalling a child restraint system
that uses tether straps, do not
install it on the front passenger’s
seat.
Only forward facing child restraint systems
(including booster seats) can be installed
on this seat and should only be installed
when it is unavoidable. When you install a
forward facing child restraint system to the
front passenger’s seat, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
A Seat position: Rearmost as possible
B Seatback: Upright
1. Adjust the front passenger’s seat as
illustrated.
2. Install the child restraint system to the
front passenger’s seat. Refer to “In-
stalling a forward facing child restraint
system” �P80.
3. Place and secure the child in the child
restraint system.
4. Check that the front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag ON/OFF indicator light status
meets the requirements of your child
restraint system.
Child Restraint Systems
76
(79,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
When front passenger’s frontal air-
bag OFF indicator light is illumi-
nated:
Only forward facing child restraint sys-
tems can be installed on the front
passenger’s seat.
When front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON indicator light is illuminated:
Child restraint systems cannot be in-
stalled on the front passenger’s seat.
Install the child restraint system on the
rear seats. For more details, refer to
“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag
System” �P101.
5. Check that the child restraint system
does not contact the head restraint. If
the child restraint system does make
contact with the head restraint, raise
the head restraint to the extended
position. If the child restraint system
still makes contact, remove the head
restraint. For details, refer to “Head
Restraint Adjustment” �P48.
& Installing Child Restraint
Systems with ALR/ELR Seat-
belt
s01ag04
CAUTION
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions supplied with
it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure
that it is held securely in position.
If it is not held tight and secure,
the danger of your child suffering
personal injury in the event of an
accident may be increased.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, set both seatbacks to
the original position. Otherwise,
the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained, which
may result in death or serious
injuries in the event of sudden
stop, sudden steering maneuver
or an accident.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint system
s01ag0401
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYS-
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
. When installing a child restraint
system on the rear seat, always
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
77
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(80,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
ensure the seatbelt is threaded
through the belt guide to secure
the child restraint system.
Window-side belt guide
1. To pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide, draw out the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in the
belt guide, and then slide the rest of the
belt in so that the entire belt fits inside
the belt guide.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system in the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system in the window-side seating
position to be safe.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is
recommended by the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with the child
restraint system, perform the following
procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor
over from the Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate
the retractor functions as ALR.
Child Restraint Systems
78
(81,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back
and forth and right and left to check if it
is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
restraint system can be more firmly
secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt. It should not be possible to
move the child restraint system more
than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction along
the seatbelt path.
8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder
portion of the belt to confirm that it
cannot be pulled out (ALR properly
functioning).
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seat-
belt buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
Window-side belt guide
10. To remove the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in
the belt guide, and then slide the rest of
the belt out.
CAUTION
When the seatbelt for the rear left
seat is not in use, remove the
seatbelt from the guide and retract
it fully to avoid blocking the high
voltage battery air intake. Other-
wise, the high voltage battery may
overheat and malfunction. For de-
tails, refer to “High Voltage Battery
and High Voltage Battery Air Intake”
�P39.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
79
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(82,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Installing a forward facing child
restraint system
s01ag0402
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM ON THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT IF
THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
FRONTAL AIRBAG ON INDICA-
TOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-
JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-
BAG.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
. When installing a child restraint
system on the rear seat, always
ensure the seatbelt is threaded
through the belt guide to secure
the child restraint system.
Window-side belt guide
1. To pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide, draw out the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in the
belt guide, and then slide the rest of the
belt in so that the entire belt fits inside
the belt guide.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
appropriate position.
3. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint, perform
the following procedure.
– Except rear center seat: Remove
the head restraint.
– Rear center seat: Raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If
the child restraint system still makes
contact, install the child restraint
system in a seating position other
than the rear center seat.
For details, refer to “Head Restraint
Adjustment” �P54.
CAUTION
Store the removed head restraint in
the cargo area. Do not place the
head restraint in the passenger
Child Restraint Systems
80
(83,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passen-
ger compartment in a sudden stop
or a sharp turn.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system in the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system in the window-side seating
position to be safe.
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
the child restraint system following the
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.
– When a child restraint system is
installed on the rear center seating
position, pass the rear center seat-
belt through the belt guide properly.
For details, refer to “Rear center
seatbelt” �P62.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over
from the Emergency Locking Retractor
(ELR) to the Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the
belt to rewind into the retractor. As the
belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard
which indicate the retractor functions
as ALR.
8. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back
and forth and right and left to check if it
is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
restraint system can be more firmly
secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt. It should not be possible to
move the child restraint system more
than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction along
the seatbelt path.
9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out
(ALR properly functioning).
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
81
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(84,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
10. Attach the tether strap onto the tether
anchorage and tighten the tether strap
firmly. For additional instructions, refer
to “Tether Anchorages” �P90.
11. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seat-
belt buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
Window-side belt guide
12. To remove the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in
the belt guide, and then slide the rest of
the belt out.
CAUTION
When the seatbelt for the rear left
seat is not in use, remove the
seatbelt from the guide and retract
it fully to avoid blocking the high
voltage battery air intake. Other-
wise, the high voltage battery may
overheat and malfunction. For de-
tails, refer to “High Voltage Battery
and High Voltage Battery Air Intake”
�P39.
If you have installed a child restraint
system for the rear center seating posi-
tion, when you remove the child restraint
system, the seatbelt may not be restored
to the ELR mode even if the seatbelt is
retracted. In this case, lower the head
restraint to the retracted position to allow
the seatbelt to retract moreover. The
seatbelt will return to the ELR mode.
Remember that the head restraint is not
intended to be used at the lowest position
(retracted position). Therefore, when the
rear center seat is occupied (including
when a child restraint system is installed)
next time, be sure to raise the head
restraint to the extended position.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
Child Restraint Systems
82
(85,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Installing a Booster Seat or
Booster Cushion
s01ag05
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A BOOSTER
SEAT/CUSHION ON THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S FRON-
TAL AIRBAG ON INDICATOR
LIGHT ILLUMINATES. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. When installing a booster seat/
cushion on the rear seat, always
ensure the seatbelt is threaded
through the belt guide to secure
the booster seat/cushion.
Booster seat
Booster cushion
Window-side belt guide
1. To pass the seatbelt through the belt
guide, draw out the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in the
belt guide, and then slide the rest of the
belt in so that the entire belt fits inside
the belt guide.
2. Adjust the head restraint as follows.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
83
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(86,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
For booster seat:
If the booster seat makes contact with the
head restraint, perform the following pro-
cedure.
– Except rear center seat: Remove
the head restraint.
– Rear center seat: Raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If
the booster seat still makes contact,
install the child restraint system in a
seating position other than the rear
center seat.
For details, refer to “Head Restraint
Adjustment” �P54.
CAUTION
Store the removed head restraint in
the cargo area. Do not place the
head restraint in the passenger
compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passen-
ger compartment in a sudden stop
or a sharp turn.
For booster cushion:
Raise the head restraint to the extended
position (center seat). Do not remove the
head restraint.
3. Place the booster seat/cushion and
then sit the child on it. The child should
sit well back on the booster seat/
cushion.
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt following
the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer. For booster seat/cushion with
a belt guide, use the seatbelt through
the belt guide.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is
positioned as low as possible on the
child’s hips.
6. To unfasten the seatbelt, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle
and allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
Child Restraint Systems
84
(87,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious injury
or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
Window-side belt guide
7. To remove the seatbelt, insert one
edge of the belt into the open gap in
the belt guide, and then slide the rest of
the belt out.
CAUTION
When the seatbelt for the rear left
seat is not in use, remove the
seatbelt from the guide and retract
it fully to avoid blocking the high
voltage battery air intake. Other-
wise, the high voltage battery may
overheat and malfunction. For de-
tails, refer to “High Voltage Battery
and High Voltage Battery Air Intake”
�P39.
& Installation of Child Restraint
Systems by Use of Lower and
Tether Anchorages (LATCH)
s01ag07
! Lower and tether anchorages
s01ag0701
WARNING
. Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
85
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(88,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When installing a child restraint
system using LATCH anchors
with the rear seatbelt fastened,
ensure that the rear seatbelt does
not become caught in the child
restraint system or the lower
LATCH anchorages.
NOTE
The seatbelt warning system of the rear
seats detects if any of the seats are
occupied by a passenger. Installing a
child restraint system in the rear seat-
ing area, using the LATCH anchors,
may result in the activation of the
passenger seatbelt warning light and
chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior
to installing the child restraint system
will avoid activating the passenger
seatbelt warning light and chime. For
details, refer to “Rear passenger’s
seats” �P169.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle
without use of the seatbelts. Such child
restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with 5 lower
anchorages (U.S.-spec. models), 4 lower
anchorages (other models) and 3 tether
anchorages for accommodating such child
restraint systems.
! Lower anchorages
s01ag070101
U.S.-spec. models
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at
the rear seat. The second lower ancho-
rage from the right side is used for both the
right seat and center seat. Each lower
anchorage is located where the seat
cushion meets the seatback.
Child Restraint Systems
86
(89,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Canada-spec. models
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
2 lower anchorages are provided for
installing a child restraint system in the
rear seat window-side seating positions.
Lower anchorages for window-side seat-
ing positions may be used for a seat in the
center seating position if a child restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions permit
and specify using anchors as far apart as
those in this vehicle. Each lower ancho-
rage is located where the seat cushion
meets the seatback.
! Tether anchorages
s01ag070102
1 For the left seat
2 For the center seat
3 For the right seat
The tether anchorages are provided at the
locations shown in the above illustration.
For details, refer to “Tether Anchorages”
�P90.
! To install a child restraint system
using lower and tether an-
chorages
s01ag070103
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into
place.
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob
is not visible. For details, refer to
“Folding Down the Rear Seatback”
�P51.
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
87
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(90,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
U.S.-spec. models
Canada-spec. models
2. You will find “ ” marks at the bottoms
of the rear seatback. These marks
indicate the positions of the lower
anchorages.
Each lower anchorage is located be-
hind the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Peel off the anchorage cover completely
from the selected side of the rear seatback
to expose the lower anchorages to be used
for installation of the child restraint system.
If it is hard to install the child restraint
system because the anchorage cover
returns to the original position, press the
anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it
is flat.
3. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the
rear seating position where the child
restraint system is to be installed,
perform the following procedure.
– Except rear center seat: Remove
the head restraint.
– Rear center seat: Raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If
the child restraint system still makes
contact, remove the head restraint.
For details, refer to “Head Restraint
Adjustment” �P54.
Child Restraint Systems
88
(91,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
CAUTION
Store the removed head restraint in
the cargo area. Do not place the
head restraint in the passenger
compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passen-
ger compartment in a sudden stop
or a sharp turn.
4. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system
manufacturer, connect the lower hooks
onto the lower anchorages located at
“
” marks on the bottom of the rear
seatback. When the hooks are con-
nected, make sure the adjacent seat-
belts are not caught.
5. If your child restraint system is a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts), push the child restraint
system into the seat cushion and pull
both left and right lower tether belts up
to secure the child restraint system by
taking up the slack in the belt.
6. Attach the tether strap onto the tether
anchorage and tighten the tether strap
firmly. For additional instructions, refer
to “Tether Anchorages” �P90.
7. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back
and forth and right and left to check if it
is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
restraint system can be more firmly
secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion. It should not be possible
to move the child restraint system
more than 1 in (2.5 cm).
8. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of in-
stallation.
SUBARU recommends that you check
with a certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to ensure the proper installa-
tion of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the closest
inspection location in the U.S., refer to the
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
– CONTINUED –
Child Restraint Systems
89
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(92,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada.
& Tether Anchorages
s01ag09
Your vehicle is equipped with 3 tether
anchorages so that a child restraint system
having a tether can be installed in the rear
seat. When installing a child restraint
system using tether, proceed as follows,
while observing the instructions by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
! Tether anchorage location
s01ag0901
1 For the left seat
2 For the center seat
3 For the right seat
Three tether anchorages are installed on
the back side of the rear seatback.
! To hook the tether
s01ag0902
CAUTION
. Except for the center seating
position, remove the head re-
straint when mounting a child
restraint system. Otherwise, it
might be possible that the tether
anchorage cannot be fastened
tightly.
. Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area.
Do not place the head restraint in
the passenger compartment to
prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger com-
partment in a sudden stop or a
sharp turn.
. For the center seating position,
raise the center head restraint to
the extended position when
mounting a child restraint sys-
tem. Otherwise, it will be impos-
sible to use the center seat belt
guide that is attached to the head
restraint correctly.
The center seat belt guide is
essential for routing the belt
webbing at the center seating
position. For information about
using the center seat belt guide,
Child Restraint Systems
90
(93,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
refer to “Rear center seatbelt”
�P62.
1. Attach the tether strap to the appro-
priate tether anchorage.
For the center seating position,
route the tether strap under the head
restraint as illustrated below.
1 Center seat belt guide
2 Seatbelt of the center seating position
3 Tether strap
2. Tighten the tether strap securely.
SUBARU recommends that you check
with a certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to ensure the proper installa-
tion of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the closest
inspection location in the U.S., refer to the
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada.
1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemen-
tal Restraint System Airbag)
s01ah
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
name is used because the airbag system
supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a lap/
shoulder belt at each front seating position
and each rear window-side seating posi-
tions.
The system also controls seatbelt preten-
sioners. For operation instructions and
precautions concerning the seatbelt pre-
tensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-
sioners” �P68.
& General Precautions Regard-
ing SRS Airbag System
s01ah10
WARNING
To obtain maximum protection in the
event of an accident, the driver and
all passengers must always wear
seatbelts when in the vehicle. The
SRS airbags are designed only to be
a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt. They
do not eliminate the need to fasten
seatbelts. Used in combination with
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
91
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(94,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
the seatbelts, the SRS airbag offers
vehicle occupants the best possible
protection in the event of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the
chance of severe injury or death in a
crash even when the vehicle has the
SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system, re-
fer to “Seatbelts” �P56.
WARNING
The SRS airbags deploy with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are not seated in the
proper upright position when the
SRS airbag deploys could suffer
very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for
deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering wheel
as practical while still maintaining
full vehicle control, and the front
passenger should move the seat as
far back as possible and sit upright
and well back in the seat.
WARNING
. If you notice any damage or
cracks where an SRS airbag is
stored, have it replaced by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not strike the area around SRS
airbag system component parts
or subject the area to impact.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
92
(95,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean close to the
front doors. The SRS front seat
side airbags are stored in the
front seat seatbacks next to the
front doors. They provide protec-
tion by deploying rapidly in the
event of a side impact or an offset
frontal collision. However, the
force of SRS front seat side air-
bag deployment can injure an
occupant if they are too close to
an SRS airbag.
. Do not sit or lean close to the rear
doors. The SRS rear seat side
airbags are stored in the rear
pillars next to the rear doors.
They provide protection by de-
ploying rapidly in the event of a
side impact collision. However,
the force of SRS rear seat side
airbag deployment can injure an
occupant if they are too close to
an SRS airbag.
. Since this vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean close to the front or
rear door on either side. Do not
put body parts out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
in the event of a side impact,
rollover or an offset frontal colli-
sion. However, the force of its
deployment can injure an occu-
pant if they are too close to an
SRS airbag.
. Do not sit or lean close to the SRS
airbag. Because the SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force to protect in high speed
collisions, the force of an airbag
can injure an occupant whose
body is too close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear a
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant
who is not seated in the proper
upright position.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injuries, such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms,
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
WARNING
. Keep arms away from either front
and rear door or its internal trim.
Keep arms and body away from
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
93
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(96,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
either rear pillar or its internal
trim. Vehicle occupants could be
injured in the event of SRS front
seat side airbag and SRS rear
seat side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breath-
ing trouble. If you or your pas-
sengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the
vehicle is equipped with SRS air-
bags. Also, notify the buyer of the
applicable section in this Owner’s
Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the
risk of fire caused by leaking fuel.
For details about restarting of the
hybrid system, refer to “If Your
Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident”
�P444.
& General Precautions Regard-
ing SRS Airbag System for
Accessories and Any Objects
s01ah13
WARNING
. Do not put any objects (including
straps or cords) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
94
(97,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
deploys, those objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to
heavy, sharp or hard acces-
sories, or another key. If the SRS
knee airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If
the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could become projectiles that
could seriously injure vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near the SRS front
seat side airbags and SRS rear
seat side airbags and do not
place objects near the SRS front
seat side airbags and SRS rear
seat side airbags. In the event of
SRS front seat side airbag and
SRS rear seat side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach labels or stickers to
the rear pillar or near the SRS rear
seat side airbag. They could pre-
vent proper deployment of the
SRS rear seat side airbag, redu-
cing protection available to the
occupant of the rear seat.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
hands-free microphone or other
accessory in such a location
could be propelled through the
cabin with great force by the
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
95
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(98,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
. Never hang or place coat hangers
or other hard or pointed objects
near the side windows. If such
items are present when the SRS
curtain airbags deploy, they
could be thrown through the
passenger compartment and
cause serious injuries. They
could also prevent proper opera-
tion of the SRS curtain airbags.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the cur-
tain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
WARNING
. Do not put any kind of clothes or
other objects over the driver’s
seat and front passenger’s seat-
back and do not attach labels or
stickers to the driver’s seat and
front passenger’s seat surface on
or near the SRS front seat side
airbag or the SRS seat cushion
airbag. They could prevent prop-
er deployment of the SRS front
seat side airbag or the SRS seat
cushion airbag, reducing protec-
tion available to the occupant of
the driver’s seat or the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not install a seat cover unless
it is a genuine SUBARU seat
cover exclusively designed for
use with the SRS airbag. Even
when using a genuine SUBARU
seat cover, the SRS front seat
side airbag or the SRS seat
cushion airbag may not function
normally if the seat cover is not
installed correctly.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
96
(99,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& General Precautions Regard-
ing SRS Airbag System and
Children
s01ah14
WARNING
SUBARU strongly recommends that
ALL infants and children (including
those in child restraint systems) sit
in the REAR seat properly restrained
in a child restraint system or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
for the child’s age, height and
weight. The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are not restrained
or improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater. Accord-
ing to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in
the front seating positions. For in-
structions and precautions concern-
ing child restraint systems, refer to
“Child Restraint Systems” �P72.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
SEAT, AND NEVER INSTALL A FOR-
WARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SEAT IF THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S FRONTAL AIRBAG ON
INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
97
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(100,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window.
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback.
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window.
In the event of an accident, the
deployment force of the SRS
front seat side airbag, SRS rear
seat side airbag and/or SRS cur-
tain airbag could injure the child
seriously because his/her head,
arms or other parts of the body
are too close to the SRS front
seat side airbag, SRS rear seat
side airbag and/or SRS curtain
airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
and infants should be placed on
the rear seat anyway and should
be properly restrained at all
times.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
98
(101,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Components
s01ah11
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
1 Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the
center portion of the steering wheel
2 Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard
3 SRS front seat side airbag: in the door
side of each front seat seatback
4 SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
5 SRS rear seat side airbag: in each rear
pillar
6 SRS seat cushion airbag: in the front
passenger’s seat cushion
7 SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
99
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(102,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Airbag control module (including impact
sensor and rollover sensor)
2 Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3 Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4 Front impact sensor (left-hand side)
5 Front impact sensor (right-hand side)
6 Front seat side airbag module (driver’s
side)
7 Front seat side airbag module (passen-
ger’s side)
8 Side impact sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)
9 Side impact sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10 Airbag wiring
11 Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12 Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (front passenger’s side)
13 Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14 Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15 Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16 Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17 Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18 Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19 Front passenger’s occupant detection
sensors
20 Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator light
21 SRS airbag system warning light
22 Side impact sensor (under the rear center
seat)
23 Side impact sensor (front door left-hand
side)
24 Side impact sensor (front door right-hand
side)
25 Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)
26 Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side)
27 Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
28 Seat cushion airbag module (front pas-
senger’s side)
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
100
(103,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
29 Rear seat side airbag module (right-hand
side)
30 Rear seat side airbag module (left-hand
side)
& SUBARU Advanced Frontal
Airbag System
s01ah02
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the SRS
frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
This vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-
tached to the glove box lid beginning with
the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” �P99.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS seat cushion airbag for front
passenger
. SRS curtain airbag*
1
. SRS front seat side airbag*
1
. SRS knee airbag for driver
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
NOTE
Only driver’s SRS frontal airbag and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
are controlled by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
s01ah0201
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
101
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(104,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
s01ah0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
1 Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection sensors are in-
stalled between the seat and seat rails,
and monitor the physique and posture of
the front passenger. Using this informa-
tion, the occupant detection system deter-
mines whether the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag should be deployed or not.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag does not operate, the front
passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-
sioners” �P68.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such
as by kicking.
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat-
back and seat cushion.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
sory under the front passenger’s
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not place any objects (books,
etc.) around the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual Seat” �P47.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
102
(105,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
SRS airbag system warning light
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light will illuminate. If the SRS airbag
system warning light illuminates, immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
consult a SUBARU dealer.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle
to your SUBARU dealer.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator lights
s01ah0203
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
Refer to “Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag
ON and OFF Indicator Lights” �P170.
! Occupant detection system
s01ah0209
1 Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection sensors are in-
stalled between the seat and seat rails,
and monitor the physique and posture of
the front passenger. Using this informa-
tion, the occupant detection system deter-
mines whether the following airbags
should be deployed or not.
. Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS seat cushion
airbag
WARNING
Do not kick the front passenger seat
or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light may illuminate to indicate a
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
103
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(106,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
malfunction of the front passenger
occupant detection system. In this
case, immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place, and consult a
SUBARU dealer.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator lights do not work
properly, do not allow anyone to sit on
the front passenger’s seat and have the
occupant detection system checked by
your SUBARU dealer.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
Also, if luggage is placed on the front
passenger’s seat, this may adversely
affect the ability of the system to determine
deployment. This may prevent the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicator lights from working properly.
Check that the indicator lights work prop-
erly.
When the OFF indicator light turns off and
the ON indicator light illuminates, the front
passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy
during a collision. Remove luggage from
the front passenger’s seat.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
s01ah0204
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding
the front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an
infant or a child is restrained in it. (See
WARNING that follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
ON THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS
DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it
correctly in the REAR seat. Also, it is
strongly recommended that any
child seat or booster seat be in-
stalled in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also seated
in the REAR seat. This is because
children sitting in the front passen-
ger’s seat may be killed or severely
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
104
(107,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
injured should the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR
seats are the safest place for chil-
dren.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an infant in an appro-
priate child restraint system, ob-
serve the following precautions.
Failure to do so may interfere with
the proper operation of the occupant
detection system, activating the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
even though that seat is occupied by
the infant in the child restraint
system.
. Do not place any article on the
seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one infant
in the child restraint system.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seat-
back.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
! If the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator light illumi-
nates and the OFF indicator light
turns off even when an infant or a
small child is in a child restraint
system (including booster seat)
s01ah020401
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from
the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as
well as the child restraint system
installation procedures in “Child Re-
straint Systems” �P72, correctly in-
stall the child restraint system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indica-
tor light turns off and the OFF indicator
light illuminates.
If still the ON indicator light remains
illuminated while the OFF indicator light
turns off, take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint
system and the child occupant.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passen-
ger’s seat are locked into place se-
curely by moving the seat back and
forth.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator light still remains
illuminated while the OFF indicator light
turns off after taking the relevant corrective
actions described above, relocate the child
restraint system to the rear seat and
immediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
105
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(108,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. Children should always wear a
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
spective of whether the airbag is deac-
tivated or activated. If the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
(the ON indicator light remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator light
turns off), take the following action.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator light still remains
illuminated while the OFF indicator
light turns off despite the fact that the
actions noted above have been taken,
seat the child in the rear seat and
immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection. Even if the
system has passed the dealer inspec-
tion, it is recommended that on subse-
quent trips the child always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
s01ah0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions are met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
are placed on the seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by an adult, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
is occupied by an adult. This may result in
personal injury.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the front
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any
article from behind and under the seat.
This may lift the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between the
front passenger’s seat and side trim/
pillar, door or center console box. This
may lift the seat cushion.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light illuminates
and the ON indicator light turns
off even when the front passen-
ger’s seat is occupied by an adult
s01ah020501
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
106
(109,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt,
position his/her legs out forward, and
adjust the seat to the rearmost posi-
tion.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator light remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator light remains
off, take the following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, extra seat
cushion, seat cover, seat heater or
massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in
a rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both
indicator lights turn off for 2 seconds.
Now, the ON indicator light should
illuminate while the OFF indicator light
remains off.
If the OFF indicator light still remains
illuminated while the ON indicator light
remains off, ask the occupant to move to
the rear seat and immediately contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
107
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(110,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Operation
s01ah0207
A Driver’s side
B Passenger’s side
1 SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a
collision occurs.
2 After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to
deflate immediately so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed.
*1: Knee airbag
*2: Seat cushion airbag
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the characteristic of item(s) or
person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection sensors. For this reason,
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag may
deploy in the event of a collision, but this
does not mean failure of the system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to
inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
. The front impact sensors
. The impact sensors in the airbag
control module
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
108
(111,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
! After deployment
s01ah0210
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
not impaired.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
! Example of the type of accident
s01ah0211
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed as follows.
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
designed as follows.
. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-
pacts*
1
. To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents*
2
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone.
*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not protect the occupant in those
situations.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
! Example of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
will most likely deploy
s01ah021101
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
109
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(112,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
s01ah021102
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags may be activated when the vehicle
sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
riage area from the road surface (such as
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
110
(113,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
S01AH021103
1 The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2 The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
3 The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4 The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5 The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
111
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(114,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) are not de-
signed to deploy in most cases
s01ah021104
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are not designed to deploy
in most of the following cases.
. If the vehicle is struck from the side or
from behind
. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed
frontal collision
1 First impact
2 Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will
not be activated on the second impact.
! SRS seat cushion airbag operation
s01ah0212
1 Passenger’s side
WARNING
The SRS seat cushion airbag is
designed not to deploy when the
seatbelt for the corresponding seat
is not worn. For safety reasons, all
persons in the vehicle should wear
their seatbelts.
The SRS seat cushion airbags are de-
signed to deploy simultaneously when the
SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details
about the operating conditions, refer to
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
112
(115,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag Sys-
tem” �P101.
The front passenger’s SRS seat cushion
airbag is designed not to deploy in either of
the following conditions.
. The front passenger’s seatbelt is not
fastened (even when the front passen-
ger’s frontal airbag ON indicator light
illuminates while the OFF indicator light
remains off).
. The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light is off while the OFF
indicator light illuminates.
NOTE
When the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag is deactivated by the occupant
detection system, the front passen-
ger’s SRS seat cushion airbag is also
deactivated.
& SRS Front Seat Side Airbag,
SRS Rear Seat Side Airbag
and SRS Curtain Airbag
s01ah03
! SRS front seat side airbag and SRS
rear seat side airbag
s01ah0302
The SRS front seat side airbag is stored in
the door side of each front seat seatback,
which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
The SRS rear seat side airbag is stored in
each rear pillar, which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS front seat side airbag
and SRS rear seat side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploy be-
tween the occupant and the door panel
and supplement the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS front seat side airbag and
SRS rear seat side airbag operate for front
and rear seat occupants.
In an offset frontal collision, SRS front seat
side airbags on both sides of the vehicle
deploy between the occupant and the door
panel and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
chest and waist.
! SRS curtain airbag
s01ah0303
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the
cabin is stored in the roof side (between
the front pillar and a point over the rear
seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located
at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and supple-
ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to
the occupant’s head.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
113
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(116,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplement the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head and chest.
! Operation
s01ah0301
The following SRS airbags is active only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. SRS front seat side airbag (driver’s
side)
. SRS front seat side airbag (passen-
ger’s side)
. SRS rear seat side airbag (right-hand
side)
. SRS rear seat side airbag (left-hand
side)
. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
When the following sensors detect a
certain amount of impact to the side of
the vehicle or detect that the vehicle is
leaning, airbag control units send signals
to the airbag control modules to deploy the
airbags.
. The side impact sensors
. The impact sensor in the airbag control
module
. The rollover sensor in the airbag control
module
Some of the airbags will deploy in a frontal
collision. For details, refer to “SUBARU
Advanced Frontal Airbag System” �P101.
SRS airbags are controlled by their airbag
control units and deploy as necessary to
effectively protect passengers depending
on the accident type. Therefore, these
airbags may deploy simultaneously.
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Components”
�P99.
! After deployment
s01ah0304
After the deployment, the SRS front seat
side airbag and SRS rear seat side airbag
immediately start to deflate.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS front seat side airbag, SRS rear
seat side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deploy even when no one occupies the
seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SRS front seat side airbag, SRS
rear seat side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud infla-
tion noise will be heard and some smoke
will be released. These occurrences are a
normal result of the deployment. This
smoke does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS front seat side
airbag system components around
the front seat seatback with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-
tem (from the front pillar to the part
of the roof side over the rear seat).
Doing so can cause burns because
the components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
! Example of the type of accident
s01ah0305
The SRS front seat side airbag, SRS rear
seat side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are designed as follows:
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side
impact collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The SRS front seat side airbag, SRS rear
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
114
(117,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
seat side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in the following
cases:
. In most lesser side impacts
. In most frontal or most rear impacts
(because the SRS front seat side
airbag, SRS rear seat side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag deployment would
not protect the occupant in those
situations)
The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
extremely inclined state such as during a
rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
most lesser inclined state.
The SRS front seat side airbag, SRS rear
seat side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS front seat side
airbag and SRS rear seat side
airbag will most likely deploy
s01ah030501
A severe side impact near the front seat.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS front seat side
airbag will most likely deploy
s01ah030512
An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
115
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(118,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy
S01AH030502
1 The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3 An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
116
(119,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS front seat side airbag, SRS rear seat side airbag and
the SRS curtain airbag will deploy
S01AH030503
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
4 The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone
laterally.
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
117
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(120,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS front seat side airbag and SRS rear seat side airbag are unlikely to
deploy
S01AH030504
1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS front
seat side airbag and SRS rear seat side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS front
seat side airbag and SRS rear seat side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
118
(121,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy
S01AH030505
1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
119
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(122,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS front seat
side airbag, SRS rear seat side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in
most cases
s01ah030506
1 The vehicle is struck from behind.
2 The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS front seat side airbag,
SRS rear seat side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in most
cases.
1 First impact
2 Second impact
A SRS curtain airbag
B SRS front seat side airbag
C SRS rear seat side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
front seat side airbag, SRS rear seat side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only
once.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS front seat
side airbag, SRS rear seat side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag are activated on the
first impact, they will not be activated on
the second.
& SRS Airbag System Monitors
s01ah04
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including seatbelt pretensioners) with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The diagnostic system monitors the com-
ponents to ensure normal operation. For
information on the components the system
monitors, refer to “Components” �P99.
Note that the diagnostic system does not
monitor the SRS airbag system warning
light itself.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
120
(123,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-
less a technician checks and repairs
the system as needed, the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag
will not operate properly in the event
of a collision, which may result in
injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& SRS Airbag System Servicing
s01ah05
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center of the instru-
ment panel
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Bottom of the steering column
and nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s
– CONTINUED –
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
121
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(124,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
SRS frontal airbag, or either roof
side (from the front pillar to a point
over the rear seat) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
pillar, rear wheel house or rear sub
frame, or an area near these parts,
was involved in an accident in which
the SRS front seat side airbag, SRS
rear seat side airbag and SRS cur-
tain airbag did not deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag was deployed.
& Precautions against Vehicle
Modification
s01ah06
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the sys-
tem inoperative, which may re-
sult in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifica-
tions.
– Installation of custom steering
wheels
– Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
– Installation of custom seats
– Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
– Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
– Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other ac-
cessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
deploying SRS curtain airbag.
– Installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS air-
bag system components and/
or wiring is not advisable. This
could interfere with proper
operation of the SRS airbag
system.
– Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the pur-
pose of a speaker replace-
ment or sound insulation
. The impact sensors, which detect
the pressure of an impact, are
located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the
doors or door trims, such as the
addition of door speakers for
example. Any modifications to
the doors will create a risk of the
airbag system becoming inop-
erative or unintended airbag de-
ployment.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
122
(125,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts on your
vehicle.
& How to Contact the Vehicle
Manufacturer concerning
Modifications for Persons
with Disabilities That May
Affect the Advanced Airbag
System
s01ah15
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
steering column, tire, suspension or floor
panel can affect the operation of the
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you
have any questions, you may contact the
following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Headquarters:
Customer Advocacy Department
One Subaru Drive
P.O. Box 9103
Camden, NJ 08101-9877
Texas office:
360 North Freeport Parkway,
Coppell TX 75019
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850-A Pukoloa St.,
Honolulu, HI 96819
877-215-0338
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
biles
491 East Marine Corps Drive,
Dededo, Guam 96929
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,
Puerto Rico
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Customer Care
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
123
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
(126,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(127,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s02
2-1. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System ........................................................... 126
Safety Precautions.............................................. 126
Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access”
Entry Function.................................................. 129
Unlock Using PIN Code Access ..........................132
Power Saving Function ....................................... 134
Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ......... 135
Disabling Keyless Access Function .................... 135
Selecting Audible Signal Operation ..................... 138
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation.......138
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator .............. 138
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly ........................................................... 138
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob ................. 138
Replacing Access Key Fob ................................. 138
Certification for Keyless Access with
Push-Button Start System................................. 138
2-2. Immobilizer...................................................... 140
Security Indicator Light.......................................140
Key Replacement................................................ 140
Certification for Immobilizer System.................... 140
2-3. Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 141
Locking the Doors .............................................. 141
Unlocking the Doors ...........................................142
Opening the Rear Gate ....................................... 142
Setting Audible Signal Operation ........................142
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ...... 142
Vehicle Finder Function...................................... 142
Sounding a Panic Alarm..................................... 142
Replacing the Battery ......................................... 142
Replacing Lost Transmitters............................... 143
2-4. Door Locks ......................................................143
Locking and Unlocking from the Outside............ 143
Locking and Unlocking from the Inside .............. 144
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking .................... 145
Key Lock-In Prevention Function........................ 146
Battery Drainage Reduction Function ................. 146
2-5. Alarm System ..................................................147
Alarm System Operation .................................... 147
Arming the System ............................................ 147
Disarming the System ........................................ 148
Alarm System Setting......................................... 149
If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm
System ............................................................ 149
2-6. Child Safety Locks ..........................................149
2-7. Windows...........................................................150
Power Window Operation ................................... 150
Initialization of Power Window (Windows with
One-Touch Auto Up and Down Function) .......... 152
2-8. Rear Gate .........................................................153
2-9. Moonroof (If Equipped)...................................154
Moonroof Switches ............................................ 155
Sunshade........................................................... 156
Keys and Doors
2
Keys and Doors
(128,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2-1. Keyless Access with
Push-Button Start System
s02ap
The following access key fobs are pro-
vided with the vehicle.
1 Access key fobs
2 Key number plate
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Locking and unlocking all the doors
(including the rear gate)
. Starting and stopping the hybrid sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Starting and Stopping Hybrid System”
�P304.
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm System” �P147.
NOTE
. Locking and unlocking by the re-
mote keyless entry system can also
be controlled with the buttons on the
access key fob. For detailed infor-
mation, refer to “Remote Keyless
Entry System” �P141.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key fob. It
is necessary for vehicle repair and
additional registration of access key
fobs. For details, refer to “Key
Replacement” �P140.
An emergency key is attached to each
access key fob.
1 Release button
2 Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
The emergency key is used for the follow-
ing operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
& Safety Precautions
s02ap11
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
126
(129,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and im-
planted defibrillators.
If you wear electronic medical equip-
ment other than an implanted pace-
maker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
with push-button start system, refer
to “Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button start
system” mentioned later, and con-
tact the electronic medical equip-
ment manufacturer for more infor-
mation. The radio waves from the
transmitting antennas on the vehicle
could adversely affect the operation
of the electronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem”
. The keyless access with push-
button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre-
quency* in addition to the radio
waves used for the remote key-
less entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output
from the antennas installed on
the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations.
*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz
1 Antennas
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key fob inside the vehicle or
within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
access key fob may be locked
inside the vehicle, or the battery
may discharge rapidly. Note that
the push-button ignition switch
may not turn on in some cases
depending on the location of the
access key fob.
. The access key fob contains
electronic components. Observe
the following precautions to pre-
vent malfunctions.
– It is recommended to have the
access key fob battery re-
placed at an authorized
SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage.
– Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately
and let it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts to
the access key fob.
– Never leave the access key
fob in direct sunlight or any-
where that may become hot,
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
127
2
Keys and Doors
(130,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
such as on the dashboard. It
may damage the battery or
cause circuit malfunctions.
– Do not wash the access key
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key
fob in humid or dusty loca-
tions. Doing so may cause
malfunctions.
– Keep the access key fob away
from magnetic sources.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a personal computer
or home electrical appliance.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a battery charger or
any electrical accessories.
– Do not apply metallic window
tint or attach metallic objects
to the windows.
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts.
. If the access key fob is dropped,
the integrated emergency key in-
side may become loose. Be care-
ful not to lose the emergency key.
. When traveling in an airplane, do
not press the button of the ac-
cess key fob. If any button of the
access key fob is pressed, radio
waves are emitted and may affect
the operation of the airplane. In a
bag, take measures to prevent
the buttons from being pressed
accidentally.
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access func-
tion can be changed. For the setting
procedure, refer to “Disabling Key-
less Access Function” �P135.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-but-
ton ignition switch while the keyless
access function is switched to the
non-operational mode, refer to “Ac-
cess Key Fob – If Access Key Fob
Does Not Operate Properly” �P440.
. The keyless access with push-but-
ton start system uses weak radio
waves. The status of the access key
fob and environmental conditions
may interfere with the communica-
tion between the access key fob and
the vehicle under the following con-
ditions, and it may not be possible to
lock or unlock the doors or start the
hybrid system.
– When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are
transmitted, such as a broadcast
station and power transmission
lines.
– When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as
an access key fob or a remote
transmitter key of another vehi-
cle.
– When carrying the access key fob
of your vehicle together with the
access key fob or the remote
transmitter of another vehicle.
– When the access key fob is
placed near wireless communi-
cation equipment such as a cell
phone.
– When the access key fob is
placed near a metallic object.
– When metallic accessories are
attached to the access key fob.
– When carrying the access key fob
with an electronic appliance such
as a laptop computer.
– When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged.
. The access key fob is always com-
municating with the vehicle and is
continuously using the battery.
Although the life of the battery varies
depending on the operating condi-
tions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years.
If the battery becomes fully dis-
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
128
(131,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
charged, replace it with a new one.
. If an access key fob is lost, it is
recommended that all of the remain-
ing access key fobs be reregistered.
For reregistration of an access key
fob, contact a SUBARU dealer.
. For a spare access key fob, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be
registered for one vehicle.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehi-
cle, such as the door pocket, dash-
board or inside the cargo area.
Vibrations may damage the key fob
or turn on the switch, possibly
resulting in a lockout.
. After the 12 V battery is discharged
or replaced, initialization of the
steering lock system may be re-
quired to start the hybrid system. In
this case, perform the following
procedure to initialize the steering
lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position.
For details, refer to “Switching
Power Status” �P160.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
When the steering is locked, the
initialization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
If you do, the following situations
may occur.
– The access key fob is mistakenly
locked inside the vehicle.
– A false warning issues although
no malfunction actually occurs.
– No warning issues even when a
malfunction occurs.
& Locking and Unlocking with
“Keyless Access” Entry
Function
s02ap01
When the access key fob is carried within
the operating range, all the doors (includ-
ing the rear gate) can be locked/unlocked
just by touching the door handle.
NOTE
The vehicle can also be locked/un-
locked with the remote keyless entry
system. For details, refer to “Remote
Keyless Entry System” �P141.
! Operating ranges
s02ap0101
1 Antennas
2 Operating range
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
129
2
Keys and Doors
(132,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 LED indicator
When the access key fob is near either of
the front doors, the LED indicator on the
access key fob flashes. When the keyless
access functions are disabled, the LED
indicator does not flash unless a button on
the access key fob is pressed.
NOTE
. If the access key fob is placed too
close to the vehicle body, the key-
less access functions may not oper-
ate properly. If it does not operate
properly, repeat the operation from
farther away.
. If the access key fob is placed near
the ground or in an elevated location
from the ground, even if it is in the
indicated operating range, the key-
less access function may not oper-
ate properly.
. When the access key fob is within
the operating range, it is possible for
anyone, even someone who is not
carrying the access key fob, to
operate the keyless access function.
Note that the keyless access func-
tion can be operated only by the
door handle, door lock sensor or
rear gate opener button in the oper-
ating range in which the access key
fob is detected.
. It is not possible to lock the doors
(including the rear gate) using the
keyless access function when the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
However, depending on the status of
the access key fob and the environ-
mental conditions, the access key
fob may be locked inside the vehicle.
Before locking the vehicle, make
sure that you have the access key
fob.
. When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged, or when operating
it in a location with strong radio
waves or noise (e.g., near a radio
tower, power plant, broadcast sta-
tion or an area where wireless equip-
ment is used), or while talking on a
cell phone, the operating ranges
may be reduced, or the keyless
access function may not operate.
In such a case, perform the proce-
dure described in “Locking and
Unlocking” �P440.
. The doors may lock or unlock when
the car is being washed or exposed
to a significant amount of water that
touches the door handle while the
key fob is still in the operating range.
! How to lock and unlock
s02ap0108
It is possible to perform the following
operations when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Lock and unlock the doors.
. Lock and unlock the rear gate.
NOTE
. It is not possible to lock the doors
(including the rear gate) using the
keyless access function when the
push-button ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to
“Switching Power Status” �P160.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not
be released.
. If the door lock sensor is touched
four times or more repeatedly, the
system will ignore the sensor opera-
tion.
. When performing the locking proce-
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
130
(133,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
dure too quickly, locking may not
complete. After performing the lock-
ing procedure, it is recommended to
pull the rear door handle to confirm
that the doors have been locked.
. If any of the doors (including the rear
gate) is not fully closed, the follow-
ing will occur to alert you.
– An electronic chirp sounds five
times.
– The hazard warning flashers
flash five times.
. If any of the doors or the rear gate is
open, none of the doors including
the rear gate can be locked.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate using the
keyless access function, it is not
possible to unlock the doors and/or
the rear gate using the keyless
access function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking
the access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation can be changed by
operating the center information dis-
play. For details, refer to “Car set-
tings” �P214. Also, the setting of
the hazard warning flasher opera-
tion can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
! Locking with the door lock sensor
s02ap010801
1 Door lock sensor
Carry the access key fob, close all the
doors (including the rear gate) and touch
the door lock sensor on the door handle.
All the doors (including the rear gate) will
be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors (including the rear
gate), if you touch the door lock sensor
once more to attempt the lock opera-
tion without first unlocking the doors,
nothing will happen, even if the door
lock sensor is touched. In this case,
perform the unlocking operation once
first. You can then touch the door lock
sensor to lock the doors.
! Locking with the rear lock button
s02ap010802
1 Rear lock button
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
including the rear gate and press the rear
lock button. The rear gate and all doors will
be locked. Also, the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
131
2
Keys and Doors
(134,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Unlocking
s02ap010804
Carry the access key fob, and touch the
sensor behind the door handle.
. When the driver’s door handle is
gripped, only the driver’s door will be
unlocked.
. When the front passenger’s door han-
dle is gripped, all the doors (including
the rear gate) will be unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
! Opening rear gate
s02ap010805
1 Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
rear gate opener button. Only the rear gate
will be unlocked and opened. Also, an
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
! Door unlock selection function
s02ap0105
When the door is unlocked using the
keyless access function, only the doors
that were set can be unlocked.
The settings can be changed with the
following methods.
. The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the center information display.
For details, refer to “Car settings”
�P214.
. The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
& Unlock Using PIN Code Ac-
cess
s02ap21
1 Rear lock button
While all the doors (including the rear gate)
are locked, you can unlock them without a
key by pressing the rear lock button.
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It
is recommended that a 5-digit security
code (PIN code) is registered.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
132
(135,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Registration for a PIN code
s02ap2102
Steps Operation Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the ignition switch. —
2 Close all the doors (including the rear gate). —
3
Press and hold the “
” button on the access key fob, then press and hold the
rear lock button until a chirp sounds intermittently.
—
4 Press the “
” button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds
Input the PIN code using the rear lock button within 30 seconds after the chirp
sound of step 4.
For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following
procedure.
Within 30 seconds
5
(1) Press the button three times.
(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
6
Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts
sounding intermittently.
—
7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.
—
NOTE
Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the
“
” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
133
2
Keys and Doors
(136,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. Press the rear lock button ten times
to enter “0”.
. Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to
another person, confirm that the
PIN code has not been changed or
deleted. If the PIN code has been
changed or deleted, reregister a new
PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the
“
” or “ ” button on the access
key fob. Then start over from step 1.
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register “00000” to
“99999” or “12345” as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers
such as “11122” or “12121” as a
PIN code. Doing so will increase the
risk of vehicle theft.
. When you try to register “22222”, the
registered PIN code will be deleted.
You cannot unlock the doors by PIN
Code Access until a new code is
registered.
. After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
. The PIN code cannot be deleted
while the keyless access function
is disabled by operating the access
key fob.
. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-
lowing case.
– When you forget the PIN code
– When you want to change the PIN
code
! Unlocking
s02ap2103
Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 described
in “Registration for a PIN code”.
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
– When the access key fob is within
the operating ranges
– When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position
. If you make an operation error dur-
ing the unlocking procedure, start
over with the unlocking procedure
after waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN
codes are entered five times con-
tinuously. If this occurs, you cannot
unlock the doors by PIN Code Ac-
cess for 5 minutes.
& Power Saving Function
s02ap23
To protect the access key fob battery and
the 12 V battery, the keyless access
function will be disabled as follows.
. When the keyless access function and
the remote keyless entry system have
not been used:
(1) 5 days after the push-button igni-
tion switch has been turned off,
communication between the an-
tennas and the access key fob will
be stopped.
(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors
(both lock sensor and unlock sen-
sor) on the front passenger’s door
will be disabled.
. When the access key fob has been left
in the operating range for 10 minutes or
longer while all doors are locked, the
keyless access function will be dis-
abled.
! Recovery from power saving mode
s02ap2301
When one of the following operations is
performed, the keyless access function
will be recovered.
. Unlock by gripping the door handle
(only when the sensors on the front
passenger’s door are not disabled) or
pressing rear gate opener button on the
rear gate.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
134
(137,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless
entry system.
. Open a door and then close it.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
& Power Saving Function of
Access Key Fob
s02ap26
This function stops the access key fob
from receiving signals and helps minimize
the battery consumption of the access key
fob.
1. Press the “
” button twice while hold-
ing the “
” button.
1 LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4
times to notify that the setting is
complete.
When the access key fob is in the power
save mode, the keyless access function
and push-button start system will not be
available. To cancel the power save mode,
press one of the buttons on the access key
fob.
& Disabling Keyless Access
Function
s02ap07
WARNING
If you have an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, per-
form the procedure “By operating
the driver’s door” �P137 to disable
the keyless access function. If you
perform the procedure “By operat-
ing the access key fob” �P135, the
operation of an implanted pace-
maker or implanted defibrillator
may be affected by the radio waves
from the transmitting antennas in-
stalled on the vehicle.
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the key-
less access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. If the access key is kept in or comes
near the vehicle, the system be-
comes active and both the vehicle
and access key batteries’ energy will
be consumed. If this occurs fre-
quently or continuously, both the
vehicle and access key batteries
can become fully drained.
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system
is not disabled.
. To start the hybrid system while the
functions are disabled, perform the
procedure described in “Starting
Hybrid System” �P441.
! Disabling functions
s02ap0701
! By operating the access key fob
s02ap070102
To disable the keyless access function by
operating the access key fob, register a
PIN code for PIN Code Access. For details
about registering a PIN code, refer to
“Unlock Using PIN Code Access” �P132.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
135
2
Keys and Doors
(138,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”
button on the access key fob simulta-
neously for more than 5 seconds.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
function will be disabled.
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
136
(139,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! By operating the driver’s door
s02ap070101
To disable the keyless access function by
operating the driver’s door, perform the
following procedures.
Steps Operation Time Status
1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. — Close
2 Push “
” on the power door locking switch. — Close
3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. Close?Open
4
Push “
” on the power door locking switch
twice.
Within 5 sec. Open
5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 sec.
Open?Close?
Open?Close?Open
6
Push “
” on the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
Within 10 sec. Open
7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. Open?Close?Open
8 Close the door. Within 5 sec.
Open?Close
A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not
pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
137
2
Keys and Doors
(140,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Enabling functions
s02ap0702
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, a chirp sound will
be heard, and the functions are enabled.
NOTE
. The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the
procedure in the same manner you
disabled the function (for example,
when disabling by operating the
driver’s door, the function will not
be enabled even if you operate the
access key fob).
. Press the push-button ignition
switch if you do not know the
procedure in which the keyless
access function was disabled.
– When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: A chirp will not be
heard.
– When disabling by operating the
access key fob: A chirp will be
heard.
& Selecting Audible Signal Op-
eration
s02ap12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can
turn the audible signal off by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” �P214.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Selecting Hazard Warning
Flasher Operation
s02ap18
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” �P214. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Warning Chimes and Warning
Indicator
s02ap06
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations and
help protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning Chimes and
Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System” �P180.
& When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
s02ap08
Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P440.
& Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob
s02ap09
Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access Key
Fob” �P501.
& Replacing Access Key Fob
s02ap13
Access key fobs can be replaced at
SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-
tact a SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for Keyless Ac-
cess with Push-Button Start
System
s02ap14
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AKB
FCC ID: Y8PSU19S-3
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
138
(141,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
. Canada-spec. models
– Type 1
– Type 2
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
139
2
Keys and Doors
(142,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2-2. Immobilizer
s02ab
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the hybrid system. Only keys
registered with your vehicle’s immobilizer
system can be used to operate your
vehicle. If hybrid system start is attempted
with an unregistered access key fob, the
hybrid system will not start. Even if the
hybrid system does start, it will stop after a
few seconds. This system, however, is not
a 100% anti-theft guarantee.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may be-
come hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. Do not modify or remove the
system. If modified or removed,
the proper operation of the sys-
tem cannot be guaranteed.
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the
following security precautions:
– Never leave your vehicle unat-
tended with its keys inside.
– Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and the moon-
roof, and lock all the doors (in-
cluding the rear gate).
– Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
& Security Indicator Light
s02ab02
Refer to “Security Indicator Light” �P185.
& Key Replacement
s02ab03
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is seven.
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code
still remains in the memory of the
vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-
curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code
should be erased from the memory. To
erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys
that will be used are required.
For details about new key registration
and erasing the lost key’s ID code,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for Immobilizer
System
s02ab05
Refer to “Certification for Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System” �P138.
Immobilizer
140
(143,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2-3. Remote Keyless Entry
System
s02ae
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
Access key fob
1 Lock/arm button
2 Unlock/disarm button
3 Rear gate unlock button
4 PANIC button
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking all the doors
(including the rear gate)
. Unlock the rear gate
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming. For details, refer
to “Alarm System” �P147.
The operable distance of the remote key-
less entry system is approximately 30 feet
(10 meters). However, this distance will
vary depending on environmental condi-
tions. The system’s operable distance will
be shorter in areas near a facility or
electronic equipment emitting strong radio
waves such as a power plant, broadcast
station, TV tower, or remote controller of
home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. The remote keyless entry system
will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in
any position other than the “OFF”
position.
. The hazard warning flashers will
flash once or twice when the access
key fob button is pressed in the
following cases.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When unlocking the rear gate
If desired, you can turn the hazard
warning flashers off by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” �P214. The
setting can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Locking the Doors
s02ae01
Press the “ ” button to lock all the doors
(including the rear gate). An electronic
chirp will sound once and the hazard
– CONTINUED –
Remote Keyless Entry System
141
2
Keys and Doors
(144,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
warning flashers will flash once.
If any of the doors is not fully closed, the
following will occur to alert you that the
doors are not properly closed.
. An electronic chirp sounds five times.
. The hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock and then the following will occur.
. An electronic chirp sounds once.
. The hazard warning flashers flash
once.
& Unlocking the Doors
s02ae02
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice. To unlock all the doors and the rear
gate, briefly press the “
” button again
within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “
” button for
unlocking all the doors is extremely
short, the system may not respond.
& Opening the Rear Gate
s02ae13
Press the “ ” button to unlock the rear
gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
This operation setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Setting Audible Signal Op-
eration
s02ae07
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock.
If desired, you can turn the audible signal
off by operating the center information
display. For details, refer to “Car settings”
�P214. Furthermore, the volume setting
of the audible signal can also be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Selecting Hazard Warning
Flasher Operation
s02ae26
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” �P214. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Vehicle Finder Function
s02ae05
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “
”
button three times in a 5-second period will
cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once
and its hazard warning flashers to flash
three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “
” button
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
& Sounding a Panic Alarm
s02ae06
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after
approximately 30 seconds.
& Replacing the Battery
s02ae08
Refer to “Replacing Battery” �P500.
Remote Keyless Entry System
142
(145,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Replacing Lost Transmitters
s02ae09
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
seven can be programmed), you should
re-program all your transmitters for secur-
ity reasons.
For details, contact your SUBARU dealer
and have the transmitters programmed
into the remote keyless entry system.
2-4. Door Locks
s02ac
& Locking and Unlocking from
the Outside
s02ac01
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including an emergency key) and
open the door while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
. Press any button on the access key
fob (except when the access key fob
battery is discharged).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “ACC” position.
. Carry the access key fob and per-
form either of the following proce-
dures.
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener but-
ton.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm System” �P147.
! How to lock and unlock the vehicle
using the key
s02ac0101
1 Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
2 Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
In this case, only the driver’s side door is
locked or unlocked.
NOTE
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
– CONTINUED –
Door Locks
143
2
Keys and Doors
(146,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! How to lock the vehicle without
using the key
s02ac0102
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
! Locking using lock lever
s02ac010201
1 Rotate the lock lever forward.
2 Close the door.
In this way, only the door that was operated
will be locked.
! Locking using power door lock-
ing switch
s02ac010202
1 Press the side of the power door
locking switch.*
2 Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking
switch, refer to “How to operate the power
door locking switches” �P145.
In this case, all the closed doors and the
rear gate are locked at the same time.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and Unlocking from
the Inside
s02ac02
! How to use the lock lever
s02ac0202
1 Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.
2 Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all the doors and
the rear gate are closed before starting to
drive.
Door Locks
144
(147,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
. Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of
seatbelts and child restraint sys-
tems, locking the doors reduces
the chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a
door from being accidentally
opened, and intruders from un-
expectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
. Do not pull the front door handle
from inside while driving. The
door could open even if it is
locked.
CAUTION
Do not pull the front inside door
handle while operating the door
lock. There is a risk that it will not
be possible to open or lock the front
doors.
! How to operate the power door
locking switches
s02ac0203
All the doors (including the rear gate) can
be locked and unlocked by pressing either
side of the power door locking switches
located on the driver’s side and the front
passenger’s side doors.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Automatic Door Locking/Un-
locking
s02ac08
All the doors are automatically locked or
unlocked under the following conditions.
. For automatic door locking
– When the vehicle speed reaches 12
mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory
default setting).
– When the select lever is shifted into
a position other than the “P” posi-
tion.
. For automatic door unlocking
– When the driver’s door is open
(factory default setting).
– When the ignition switch is turned to
OFF.
– When the select lever is shifted into
the “P” position.
NOTE
. The automatic door lock and unlock
setting can be changed with the
center information display. Refer to
“Car settings” �P214.
. When locking the door by the power
door locking switches, automatic
door locking will not operate.
. When unlocking the door by the
power door locking switches, auto-
matic door unlocking will not oper-
ate.
– CONTINUED –
Door Locks
145
2
Keys and Doors
(148,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. If the system detects a strong en-
ough impact to deploy the airbags,
all doors may be automatically un-
locked. For further details, refer to
“Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking
Operation When Involved in an Ac-
cident” �P445.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all
the doors by pushing the unlock
side of the power door locking
switch. If a rear door is unlocked
from the inside door lever then the
door is opened and closed, the Key
lock-in prevention function will be
triggered. All doors will be unlocked,
the Key lock-in prevention warning
indicator “
” will appear and the
warning chime will also sound.
& Key Lock-In Prevention
Function
s02ac06
All the doors will not lock when the power
door locking switch is pushed with the
driver’s door open while the ignition switch
is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTE
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before lock-
ing the doors.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all
the doors by pushing the unlock
side of the power door locking
switch.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all
the doors by pushing the unlock
side of the power door locking
switch. If a rear door is unlocked
from the inside door lever then the
door is opened and closed, the Key
lock-in prevention function will be
triggered. All doors will be unlocked,
the Key lock-in prevention warning
indicator “
” will appear and the
warning chime will also sound.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “opera-
tional”. This function’s operational/
non-operational setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for details.
! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-
vention function
s02ac0602
When the system is set so that it does not
operate, the doors are locked by the
following operation.
. If the lock lever is turned to the front
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then
closed with the lock lever in that
position, the driver’s door is locked.
. If the emergency key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
& Battery Drainage Reduction
Function
s02ac03
Under various conditions, lights inside the
vehicle will automatically turn off to reduce
the risk of discharging the battery.
! Battery drainage reduction function
for various conditions
s02ac0302
This function will enter standby mode
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
If the following actions are not performed
within 10 minutes, while the function is in
standby mode, any room lights that are on
will automatically turn off.
Turning
off lights
– Map light
– Dome light
– Cargo area light
– Vanity mirror light
Door Locks
146
(149,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Actions
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
– Open or close the doors, in-
cluding the rear gate.
– Push the unlock button on the
access key fob.
– Hold the front door handle and
unlock it while holding the ac-
cess key fob.
– Come close to the vehicle that
the front door was locked while
holding the access key fob (if
OFF delay timer setting for
period of time is not off).
– Push the panic button on the
access key fob.
Perform the action in the above table to
illuminate the lights again when the battery
drainage reduction function is active.
NOTE
. The battery drainage reduction func-
tion cannot be turned off.
. If the battery drainage reduction
function is in operation when a door
is open, the target room light will not
be illuminated.
. To protect the 12 V battery from
battery drainage, make sure that all
doors, including the rear gate, are
completely closed when leaving the
vehicle.
2-5. Alarm System
s02af
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key fob.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& Alarm System Operation
s02af01
When the alarm system is armed, it is
triggered by the opening any of the doors,
the rear gate or engine hood.
The alarm system will activate the follow-
ing alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors, the rear gate or engine
hood remains open after the 30-second
period, the horn will continue to sound for a
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear
gate or engine hood is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Map lights (illuminates only when
the door interlock switch is in the
“DOOR” position)
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the
“DOOR” position)
The notifications regarding the map
lights and dome light are deactivated
as the factory setting. A SUBARU deal-
er can activate the system. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Arming the System
s02af04
The alarm system becomes armed when
the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped) and turn the ignition switch
to the “OFF” position.
2. Carry the key and get out of the
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Alarm System
147
2
Keys and Doors
(150,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
4. Lock the doors using any of the
following methods.
. Locking using the remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry System”
�P141.
. Locking using the keyless access
function (if equipped). For details,
refer to “Locking with the door lock
sensor” �P131.
. Locking using the power door lock-
ing switch. For details, refer to
“Locking using power door locking
switch” �P144.
Security indicator light
NOTE
. All the doors and the rear gate will
lock, an electronic chirp will sound
once, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once, and the security
indicator light will start flashing
rapidly.
. If any of the doors or the rear gate is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp
sounds five times and the hazard
warning flashers flash five times to
alert you that the doors (or the rear
gate) are not properly closed. When
you close the door, doors will auto-
matically lock and the system will
automatically arm in 30 seconds.
5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the
system will enter surveillance state.
When the system is in surveillance state,
the security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
onds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
windows and/or moonroof are open.
Always make sure that they are fully
closed before arming the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it
performed by your SUBARU dealer.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
– Doors (including the rear gate)
are unlocked using the access
key fob.
– Doors (including the rear gate)
are unlocked using the keyless
access function.
– Any door (including the engine
hood) is opened.
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position.
& Disarming the System
s02af05
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press unlock/disarm button (for
less than 2 seconds) on the access key
fob.
. Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures.
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear lock button.
– Unlock using the PIN Code Access.
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approxi-
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
Alarm System
148
(151,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Emergency disarming
s02af0501
If you cannot disarm the system using the
access key fob (i.e., the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the access key fob.
The system can be disarmed if you turn the
ignition switch from the “OFF” position to
the “ON” position with a registered key/
access key fob.
NOTE
If the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Switching Power Status”
�P441. In such a case, replace the
battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-
cing Battery of Access Key Fob”
�P501.
& Alarm System Setting
s02af11
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the System” �P148.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors, the rear gate and engine hood.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down “
” of the driver’s power
door locking switch, open the driver’s
door within the following 1 second, and
wait 10 seconds without releasing the
switch. The setting will then be chan-
ged as follows.
Setting
status
Combination
meter display
Horn
Activate AL ON Once
Deactivate AL OFF
Twice
NOTE
You may have the above setting change
done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If You Have Accidentally
Triggered the Alarm System
s02af03
! To stop the alarm
s02af0301
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the access key fob.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” position.
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the immobilizer transponder
is not registered, the alarm will not
stop.
2-6. Child Safety Locks
s02ag
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be
opened from inside. The door can only
be opened from the outside.
Child Safety Locks
149
2
Keys and Doors
(152,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2-7. Windows
s02ah
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s body parts or
any other objects from being
caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
NOTE
. If the power window system detects
resistance, an impact or abnormal-
ity, the window operation may be
automatically stopped to prevent
further jamming, entrapment or mal-
function.
– The closing window slides down
slightly and stops.
– The opening window stops slid-
ing down.
. The power window system may
detect resistance, an impact or an
abnormality in the following cases.
– A substantial sized object is
caught between the window and
the window frame.
– A foreign object is caught be-
tween the window and the win-
dow frame.
– The vehicle drives over a deep
pothole.
. The window cannot be closed for a
few seconds after the window is
automatically stopped by the sys-
tem.
& Power Window Operation
s02ah07
! Power window switches
s02ah0701
. Driver’s side power window switches:
1 For front left window*
2 For front right window*
3 For rear left window
4 For rear right window
5 Lock switch
*: With one-touch auto up and down feature
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster on the driver
side door.
The power windows operate when the
power window switch illuminates or the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Windows
150
(153,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Passenger’s side power window
switches:
Each passenger’s window can be con-
trolled by the power window switch located
on the door.
The power window operates when the
power window switch illuminates or the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
! Operating the window
s02ah0702
With one-touch auto up and down feature
1 Automatically close*
2 Close
3 Open
4 Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to the opposite side.
Without one-touch auto up and down
feature
1 Close
2 Open
NOTE
Avoid the following.
. Continuously operating a switch in
the same direction after the window
is fully closed or fully opened.
. Continuously operating three or
more switches all at once in the
same direction after the windows
are fully closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described
above may cause the power window
breaker to operate making it impossible
to open or close the window. Be sure to
initialize the power windows. Refer to
– CONTINUED –
Windows
151
2
Keys and Doors
(154,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
“Initialization of Power Window (Win-
dows with One-Touch Auto Up and
Down Function)” �P152.
! Anti-entrapment function (windows
with one-touch auto up and down
function)
s02ah0703
While closing the window automatically, if
the window senses a substantial enough
object trapped between the window and
the window frame, it automatically moves
down slightly and stops.
If a foreign object is caught while window is
opening automatically, the window will
stop.
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test the power
window operation using body
parts.
. If an object is caught just before
the window fully closes, the sys-
tem may not operate properly.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar
to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle en-
counters a deep pothole), the anti-
entrapment function may operate.
. You cannot close the window for a
few seconds after the anti-entrap-
ment function operates.
! Off delay function (windows with
one-touch auto up and down func-
tion)
s02ah0705
The windows can be operated for approxi-
mately 40 seconds even after the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
position. If a front door is opened within 40
seconds, the off delay function is can-
celed.
! Locking the passengers’ windows
s02ah0704
1 Lock
2 Unlock
When the lock switch is in the lock position,
the rear passenger’s window switches on
the driver side door and the passengers’
window switches cannot be operated.
When the indicator on the window
switches does not illuminate, the window
switch cannot be operated.
& Initialization of Power Win-
dow (Windows with One-
Touch Auto Up and Down
Function)
s02ah06
If the one-touch auto up and down function
or off delay function does not operate
properly, operate each window according
to the following procedure in order to
initialize the power window system.
1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the window completely and then
press and hold down the power win-
dow switch for approximately 1 sec-
ond.
4. Close the window completely and then
pull and hold the power window switch
for approximately 1 second.
Windows
152
(155,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2-8. Rear Gate
s02aj
CAUTION
When loading and unloading cargo,
be careful not to come in contact
with the hot engine exhaust gas or
the exhaust pipe, because they
could burn you.
NOTE
Avoid keeping the rear gate open for
more than a few hours. Doing so may
drain the vehicle battery.
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Locking and Unlocking from the In-
side” �P144.
. Keyless access with the push-button
start system: Refer to “Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System”
�P126.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry System”
�P141.
Opening the rear gate:
Rear gate opener button
1. Open the rear gate using the appro-
priate method.
When the rear
gate is locked
Press and hold the rear
gate opener button while
carrying the access key.
When the rear
gate is unlocked
Press and hold the rear
gate opener button.
2. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be opened due to
a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-
function in the door locking/unlocking
system or other causes, you can unlock
it by manually operating the rear gate
lock release lever. For the procedure,
refer to “Rear Gate – If the Rear Gate
Cannot Be Opened” �P442.
Closing the rear gate:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull down on the inside handle as shown in
the illustration.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while the engine is running.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also do not close the rear
gate by pulling the grip from
– CONTINUED –
Rear Gate
153
2
Keys and Doors
(156,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
inside the cargo space. There is a
danger of your hand being
caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
. Never attempt to close the rear
gate by grabbing or pressing on
the outer metal surface or da-
mage may result.
. Always use the inside handle to
avoid damaging the exterior sur-
face of the gate.
2-9. Moonroof (If Equipped)
s02ak
WARNING
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly.
. The vehicle turns sharply.
. The vehicle is involved in an
accident.
. Body parts protruding from the
vehicle are struck by outside
objects.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the moon-
roof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to tilt the
moonroof down before doing so.
. If the moonroof does not close,
have the system checked by a
SUBARU dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Moonroof
154
(157,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Moonroof Switches
s02ak02
! Tilting moonroof
s02ak0201
1 Up
2 Down
To raise the moonroof, press and hold the
switch in the up side and release. To lower
the moonroof, press and hold the switch in
the down side.
NOTE
Release the switch after the moonroof
has been raised or has been lowered
completely. Pressing the switch con-
tinuously may cause damage to the
moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
s02ak0202
1 Open
2 Close
Opening the moonroof:
To open the moonroof using the automatic
function, press and hold the open side of
the switch and then release it.
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
way position while opening it, momentarily
press the open or close side of the switch.
The sunshade will also be opened to-
gether with the moonroof. The moonroof
will stop at a position approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) away from the fully opened
position.
Press the open side of the switch again to
open the moonroof completely.
Closing the moonroof:
To close the moonroof using the automatic
function, press and hold the close side of
the switch and then release it.
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
way position while closing it, momentarily
press the open or close side of the switch.
NOTE
. After washing the vehicle or after it
rains, wipe away water on the roof
prior to opening the moonroof to
prevent drops of water from falling
into the passenger compartment.
. Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this
occurs, use the moonroof at the
initial stop position of 0.6 in (1.5
cm) away from the fully opened
position.
. For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with
the moonroof fully opened.
– CONTINUED –
Moonroof
155
2
Keys and Doors
(158,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Anti-entrapment function
s02ak0203
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back slightly and
stops. The anti-entrapment function may
also be activated by a strong shock on the
moonroof even when there is nothing
trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
& Sunshade
s02ak05
The sunshade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade
also moves back.
Moonroof
156
(159,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s03
3-1. Push-Button Ignition Switch.......................... 160
Safety Precautions.............................................. 160
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 160
Switching Power Status ......................................160
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly ........................................................... 161
3-2. Hazard Warning Flasher................................. 162
3-3. Meters and Gauges ........................................ 162
Speedometer ...................................................... 162
Power Meter ....................................................... 162
Odometer ........................................................... 163
Double Trip Meter ............................................... 163
Fuel Gauge.........................................................164
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................... 164
Combination Meter Settings ................................ 165
3-4. Illumination Brightness Control .................... 165
Auto Dimmer Cancel Function ............................ 166
3-5. Warning and Indicator Lights ........................ 166
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ......................167
SRS Airbag System Warning Light ...................... 170
Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF
Indicator Lights ................................................170
CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction
Indicator Light .................................................. 171
Charge Warning Light .........................................172
Oil Pressure Warning Light .................................172
Engine Low Oil Level Warning Light ...................172
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 173
ABS Warning Light .............................................174
Brake System Warning Light............................... 175
Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light............. 176
Auto Vehicle Hold Indicator Light ....................... 177
Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................... 177
Door Open Indicator Light .................................. 178
Engine Hood Open Warning Light ...................... 178
Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light ............. 178
All-Wheel Drive Warning Light............................ 178
Power Steering Warning Light ............................ 178
Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator
Light ................................................................ 179
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light .... 180
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of
the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System ............................................................ 180
Security Indicator Light ...................................... 185
SI-DRIVE Indicator.............................................. 185
Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator................... 186
Turn Signal Indicator Lights ............................... 186
High Beam Indicator Light.................................. 186
High Beam Assist Indicator ................................ 186
Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning
Light ................................................................ 186
LED Headlight Warning Light ............................. 186
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator
Light ................................................................ 186
Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light .... 186
Headlight Indicator Light .................................... 186
Front Fog Light Indicator Light........................... 187
X-MODE Indicator............................................... 187
Hill Descent Control Indicator Light.................... 187
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator.............................. 187
Instruments and Controls
3
Instruments and Controls
(160,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator .................................... 187
Vehicle Detected in Adjacent Lane Indicator........187
Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator .................... 188
RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)...................188
RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) ......................... 188
Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator
(If Equipped)..................................................... 188
Driver Monitoring System Operation Indicator
Light (Green) (If Equipped)................................188
Driver Monitoring System Warning Light
(Yellow) (If Equipped)........................................188
Driver Monitoring System OFF Indicator Light
(If Equipped)..................................................... 188
Driver Monitoring System Temporary Stop
Indicator Light (If Equipped)..............................189
Hybrid Fail Lamp ................................................ 189
Hybrid System Overheat Warning Light............... 189
Pedestrian Alert System Warning Indicator
Light ................................................................189
Hybrid READY Indicator Light .............................189
EV (Electric Vehicle) Indicator .............................189
EV (Electric Vehicle) Drive Mode Indicator...........189
3-6. Combination Meter Display............................ 190
Combination Meter Display Features................... 191
Basic Operation.................................................. 193
Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and
Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen ............... 193
Warning Screen .................................................. 194
Meter Information Screen.................................... 194
Telltale Screen .................................................... 195
Basic Screens ....................................................197
Digital Speed Screen .......................................... 199
3-7. Center Information Display (CID) ...................199
Features ............................................................ 199
Welcome Screen ................................................ 200
Good-Bye Screen ............................................... 200
Interruption Screen ............................................ 200
Touch Screen Operations ................................... 200
Basic Screens.................................................... 201
3-8. Clock ................................................................225
Setting the Clock Manually ................................. 225
Setting the Clock Automatically.......................... 225
Time Zone.......................................................... 226
Daylight Saving Time ......................................... 226
3-9. Valet Mode .......................................................226
Activation of Valet Mode..................................... 226
Deactivation of Valet Mode ................................. 226
3-10. Light Control Switch .....................................227
Headlights ......................................................... 227
High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) ...................... 230
Headlight Flasher ............................................... 230
High Beam Assist Function ................................ 230
Daytime Running Light System .......................... 233
3-11. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) .........234
3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler................................235
3-13. Front Fog Light Switch .................................235
3-14. Turn Signal Lever ..........................................236
One-Touch Lane Changer................................... 236
3-15. Wiper and Washer .........................................237
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches ............. 238
Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch ............. 240
3-16. Defogger and Deicer .....................................241
Instruments and Controls
(161,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3-17. Mirrors ........................................................... 242
Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function)
(If Equipped)..................................................... 242
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass (If Equipped).......243
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink
®
(If Equipped)..................................................... 244
Outside Mirrors .................................................. 251
3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .....................252
Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped) ...... 253
3-19. Horn................................................................254
Instruments and Controls
3
Instruments and Controls
(162,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3-1. Push-Button Ignition
Switch
s03bg
& Safety Precautions
s03bg04
Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P126.
& Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System
s03bg01
1 Antennas
2 Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the
antennas inside the vehicle, the
push-button ignition switch and the
hybrid system start cannot be oper-
ated.
. Even when the access key fob is
outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
close to the glass, it may be possible
to switch the power or to start the
hybrid system.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places. It may become
impossible to operate the push-
button ignition switch and the hybrid
system start.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– At the corner of the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the hybrid
system, if the access key fob battery
is discharged, perform the proce-
dure described in “Access Key Fob –
If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly” �P440. In such a case,
replace the battery immediately. Re-
fer to “Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob” �P501.
& Switching Power Status
s03bg02
1 Operation indicator
2 Push-button ignition switch
The power status is switched every time
the push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal.
Every time the button is pressed, the
power is switched in the sequence of
“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When
the hybrid system is stopped and the
push-button ignition switch is in “ACC”
or “ON”, the operation indicator on the
push-button ignition switch illuminates
Push-Button Ignition Switch
160
(163,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
in orange.
Power
status
Indicator color Operation
OFF Turned off
Power is turned
off.
ACC Orange
The following
systems can be
used: audio and
accessory power
outlet.
ON
Orange
(while hybrid
system is
stopped)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
Turned off
(while hybrid
system is run-
ning)
CAUTION
. To prevent the 12 V battery from
discharging, do not leave the
push-button ignition switch in
the “ON” or “ACC” position for a
long time.
. To avoid a malfunction, observe
the following precautions.
– Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button
ignition switch.
– Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand
that is soiled with oil or other
contaminants.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If the operation indicator on the
push-button ignition switch does
not illuminate even when the
instrument panel illumination is
turned on, have the vehicle in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all
the way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in
green when the push-button ignition
switch is pressed, steering is
locked. When this occurs, press the
push-button ignition switch while
turning the steering wheel left and
right.
! Battery drainage reduction function
s03bg0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left
in the “ACC” position for approximately 20
minutes or the “ON” position (the hybrid
system is not running) for approximately
30 minutes, the push-button ignition switch
will be automatically switched to “OFF” to
reduce the possibility of the 12 V battery
going dead. (This function is activated
when the select lever is in the “P” position.)
& When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
s03bg03
Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P440.
Push-Button Ignition Switch
161
3
Instruments and Controls
(164,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3-2. Hazard Warning Flasher
s03ab
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn
other drivers when you have to park your
vehicle under emergency conditions. The
hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning flasher switch on
the instrument panel. All the turn signal
lights and the turn signal indicator lights
will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the
switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
3-3. Meters and Gauges
s03ad
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Speedometer
s03ad03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
NOTE
The initial movement of the meter
needles and gauge needles that occurs
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position can be activated or
deactivated.
For details, refer to “General settings”
�P210.
& Power Meter
s03ad17
The indication of the power meter will
change depending on the operation of the
accelerator pedal. It shows the energy
output conditions during driving and the
regeneration energy status.
A Normal mode
B EyeSight mode/Map mode
1 Charging area
2 Eco area
3 Power area
Hazard Warning Flasher
162
(165,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Charging area:
Displays the high voltage battery charging
status when operating the regenerative
braking system.
NOTE
When you are downshifting, your vehi-
cle will slow down, but this will not
necessarily increase the battery
charge.
Eco area:
Displays the eco driving status.
Power area:
Indicates a state that exceeds the range of
eco driving, such as when the vehicle is
carrying a heavy load or being driven at
high speed.
& Odometer
s03ad04
1 TRIP RESET switch
2 Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
NOTE
If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
or “ACC” position, the odometer/trip
meter will light up. The indicators will
turn off when the TRIP RESET switch is
not operated for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
& Double Trip Meter
s03ad05
1 TRIP RESET switch
2 Trip meter
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
TRIP RESET switch.
– CONTINUED –
Meters and Gauges
163
3
Instruments and Controls
(166,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
To reset the trip meter, select either the A
trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the
TRIP RESET switch.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
. If the connection between the com-
bination meter and 12 V battery is
broken for any reason such as
vehicle maintenance or fuse repla-
cement, the data recorded on the trip
meter will be lost.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the od-
ometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications
while the odometer/trip meter is lit
up.
In addition, it is possible to reset the
trip meter by pressing and holding
the TRIP RESET switch.
The indicators will turn off when the
TRIP RESET switch is not operated
for approximately 10 seconds.
& Fuel Gauge
s03ad07
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“ACC” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”
even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel
level movement in the tank (e.g., during
braking, turning or acceleration).
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel
filler door is located on the right side
of the vehicle.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
while the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel
gauge will light up and indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The gauge will turn off when the
TRIP RESET switch is not operated
for approximately 10 seconds.
& Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
s03ad08
1 Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
Meters and Gauges
164
(167,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine Overheating”
�P434.
& Combination Meter Settings
s03ad16
Meter settings can be set on the center
information display. For details, perform
the procedures described in “General
settings” �P210.
3-4. Illumination Brightness
Control
s03aj
The illumination brightness of the combi-
nation meter and center information dis-
play dims under the following conditions.
. The light switch is in the “
” or “ ”
position when the ambient light is dark.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the
automatic dimming function does
not work at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch
is turned to the “OFF” position.
. The operation method of illumina-
tion brightness will differ depending
whether or not “Brightness Dial” in
the center information display is on.
Refer to the operation method in-
dicated the following table.
“Brightness Dial” is on.
Operational
item
Combi-
nation
meter
Center
informa-
tion dis-
play
Control dial Available Available
“Brightness”*
1
on the center
information
display
Not avail-
able
Not avail-
able
– CONTINUED –
Illumination Brightness Control
165
3
Instruments and Controls
(168,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
“Brightness Dial” is off.
Operational
item
Combi-
nation
meter
Center
informa-
tion dis-
play
Control dial Available
Not avail-
able
“Brightness”
on the center
information
display
Not avail-
able
Available
*1: When “Brightness Dial” is on,
“Brightness” on the center infor-
mation display is not available.
For details about “Brightness Dial” on/
off settings, refer to “General settings”
�P210.
& Auto Dimmer Cancel Func-
tion
s03aj01
When the ambient light is bright, the
illumination brightness is set to the max-
imum regardless of the position of the
control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust
the illumination brightness by using the
control dial. When the ambient light is dark,
you can dim the illumination brightness as
described above.
The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
details.
3-5. Warning and Indicator
Lights
s03ae
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned to
the “ON” position. This permits checking
the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several sec-
onds or after the hybrid system has
started:
: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt
warning light turns off only when the
driver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front pas-
senger’s seatbelt warning light (The
seatbelt warning light turns off only
when the front seat passenger fastens
the seatbelt.)
: Rear seatbelt warning light
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
Warning and Indicator Lights
166
(169,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator light
: Charge warning light
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Electronic parking brake indicator
light
: Power steering warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-
spec. models)
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt Warning Light
and Chime
s03ae01
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and passen-
ger’s seat, as required by current safety
standards.
! Driver’s and front passenger’s seats
s03ae0114
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver and
front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by
illuminating the warning lights in the loca-
tions indicated in the following illustration
and sounding a chime.
Driver’s warning light
Front passenger’s warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front
passenger’s warning light will illuminate,
then it will blink for several seconds. If the
seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fastened,
the warning chime may make a beep
sound.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened
while driving, the seatbelt warning
system operates as follows accord-
ing to the vehicle speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when the vehicle speed is ap-
proximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or
less.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
167
3
Instruments and Controls
(170,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will make a
beep sound when the vehicle
speed is between approximately
4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph (20
km/h). The warning chime will
stop when the vehicle stops.
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound
loudly when 15 seconds have
elapsed when the vehicle speed
is between approximately 4 mph
(6 km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h).
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound
loudly when the vehicle speed is
approximately more than 13 mph
(20 km/h).
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
system for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
seatbelt warning system monitors whether
or not there is a passenger on the front
passenger’s seat.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
device from functioning correctly or
cause the device to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seat-
back.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Front Seats” �P44.
If the seatbelt warning system for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occupant, although we
strongly recommend that all children sit
in the rear seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passen-
ger’s seat are locked into place se-
curely by moving the seat back and
forth.
If still the seatbelt warning system for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
Warning and Indicator Lights
168
(171,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Rear passenger’s seats
s03ae0115
Rear seatbelt warning light
1 Rear left seat
2 Rear center seat
3 Rear right seat
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light and
chime reminds the rear passenger to
fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the
warning lights in the locations indicated in
the above illustration and sounding a
chime.
WARNING
. The driver must check that all the
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts properly since the seat-
belt warning system may not
detect passengers under the fol-
lowing circumstances.
– When cushions or child re-
straint systems, etc., are used.
– When a child or small adult is
sitting in the seat.
. Observe the following precau-
tions
– Do not apply any strong im-
pact to the rear seat.
– Do not fold the seatback for-
ward when objects are on the
seat.
– Do not spill liquid on the rear
seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately.
– Do not remove or disassemble
the rear seat.
NOTE
. The seatbelt warning system of the
rear seat detects if the seat is
occupied by a passenger. Heavy
cargo or large pets on the rear seat
may result in the activation of the
passenger seatbelt warning light
and chime. Fastening the rear seat-
belt prior to loading cargo or large
pets will avoid activating the pas-
senger seatbelt warning light and
chime.
. When folding the rear seat, ensure
that the seat is empty prior to fold-
ing. Items caught between the seat
bottom and seatback, when folded,
may damage the seat surface or
activate the passenger seatbelt
warning light and chime.
If passengers in the rear seats do not
fasten their seatbelts while the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or
blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not
fastened.
NOTE
. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)
are/is still not fastened while driving,
the seatbelt warning system oper-
ates as follows according to the
vehicle speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when the vehicle speed is ap-
proximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or
less.
– When the vehicle speed is ap-
proximately between 4 mph (6
km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h), the
seatbelt warning lights will blink
and a warning chime will sound.
The chime will make a beep
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
169
3
Instruments and Controls
(172,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
sound for 15 seconds, and it then
will become louder and continue
for 35 seconds. The warning light
will blink for 50 seconds, then it
will illuminate steadily and the
chime will stop.
– The warning light will blink, and
the beep will sound loudly for 35
seconds when the vehicle speed
is approximately more than 13
mph (20 km/h). After 35 seconds,
the blinking warning light will
illuminate steadily and the chime
will stop. The warning lights will
continue to illuminate until their
seatbelts are fastened.
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
& SRS Airbag System
Warning Light
s03ae02
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-
less a technician checks and repairs
the system as needed, the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag
will not operate properly in the event
of a collision, which may result in
injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
For details about the components mon-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS
Airbag System Monitors” �P120.
& Front Passenger’s Frontal
Airbag ON and OFF Indicator
Lights
s03ae03
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
For details about the operating conditions
of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer to
“SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag Sys-
tem” �P101.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator lights show you the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag.
The indicator lights are located as shown
in the illustration.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
Warning and Indicator Lights
170
(173,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicator lights illuminate for 6 seconds
during which time the system is checked.
Following the system check, both indicator
lights turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one
of the indicator lights illuminates depend-
ing on the status of the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag determined by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system
monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light will illuminate while the
OFF indicator light will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator light will remain off
while the OFF indicator light will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicator
lights remain illuminated or off simulta-
neously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection.
& CHECK ENGINE
Warning Light/Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light
s03ae04
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the hybrid system is running, it may
indicate that there is at least one problem
or potential problem somewhere in the
emission control system.
! If the light illuminates constantly
s03ae0401
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the hybrid
system starts, an emission control system
malfunction has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks,
or when the fuel filler door is open.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light could be illuminat-
ing because the fuel filler cap is loose or
missing, or because the fuel filler door is
open.
. Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening
the cap will not turn off the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
dicator light right away. This may
require several driving trips. If the light
does not turn off, take your vehicle to
your authorized SUBARU dealer im-
mediately.
. Close the fuel filler door. Make sure
nothing is interfering with the closing of
the fuel filler door. Closing the fuel filler
door will not turn off the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
dicator light right away. This may
require several driving trips. If the light
does not turn off, take your vehicle to
your authorized SUBARU dealer im-
mediately.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
171
3
Instruments and Controls
(174,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! If the light is blinking
s03ae0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should conform to
the following instructions.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light may stop blinking
and illuminate steadily after several driving
trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer
immediately.
& Charge Warning Light
s03ae05
If this light illuminates when the hybrid
system is running, it may indicate that the
charging system is not working properly.
If the charge warning light illuminates while
you are driving the vehicle or does not turn
off after the hybrid system starts, there
may be a malfunction in the charging
system. Stop the hybrid system at the first
safe opportunity and contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Oil Pressure Warning
Light
s03ae06
CAUTION
Do not operate the hybrid system
with the oil pressure warning light
on. This may cause serious engine
damage.
If this light illuminates when the hybrid
system is running, it may indicate that the
engine oil pressure is low and the lubricat-
ing system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving, stop
the hybrid system at the first safe oppor-
tunity and contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately.
& Engine Low Oil Level
Warning Light
s03ae58
This light appears when the engine oil level
decreases to the lower limit.
If the warning light appears, check the
engine oil level on a level surface. When
the engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to
“Engine Oil” �P465. If the warning light
does not turn off after refilling the engine
oil, or the light appears even though the
engine oil level is within the normal range,
have the vehicle checked by a SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE
. The oil level will be detected by the
system just after turning the ignition
switch to the “ON” position, and the
low oil level warning light will turn on
when the oil level is below the lower
limit. The warning light will turn off
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position.
. In the following cases, the low oil
level warning light may not illumi-
nate even if the oil level is below the
lower limit to avoid the erroneous
lighting.
– The car is parked on a steep
slope.
– Rapid acceleration, hard braking
or rapid steering occurred during
EV driving.
– The engine was restarted within a
few hours.
Warning and Indicator Lights
172
(175,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light (U.S.-
Spec. Models)
s03ae08
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Should the warning light illuminate steadily
after blinking for approximately one min-
ute, have the system inspected by your
nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned on or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Other-
wise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious perso-
nal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure to
the COLD tire pressure shown on
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
173
3
Instruments and Controls
(176,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
the tire inflation pressure label on
the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, refer to “Flat Tires” �P422.
When a replacement tire is mounted
or a wheel rim is replaced without
the original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the Low tire
pressure warning light will illumi-
nate steadily after blinking for ap-
proximately one minute. This indi-
cates the TPMS is unable to monitor
all four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 25 mph (40
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low pres-
sure threshold, the low tire pressure
warning light should turn off a few
minutes later. Therefore, be sure to
install the specified size for the front
and rear tires.
& ABS Warning Light
s03ae09
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportunity by your
SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
after starting the vehicle.
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down; however, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates together
with the brake system warning light if the
EBD system malfunctions. For further
details of the EBD system malfunction
warning, refer to “Brake System Warning
Light” �P175.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the hybrid system is started but
turns off immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the hybrid system has
been started, but it turns off while
Warning and Indicator Lights
174
(177,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
driving.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately
and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the hybrid system is
jump started, the ABS warning light may
illuminate. This is due to the low battery
voltage and does not indicate a malfunc-
tion. When the 12 V battery becomes fully
charged, the light will turn off.
& Brake System Warn-
ing Light
s03ae10
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the brake system warning light
illuminates, the electronic park-
ing brake system may be mal-
functioning. Immediately stop
your vehicle in a safe location,
use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU deal-
er. For details, refer to “Electro-
nic Parking Brake” �P336.
NOTE
. Even if the brake system warning
light illuminates, if the warning light
behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not mal-
functioning.
– The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is
applied or released.
– The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position again.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate immediately after the
hybrid system is started. However,
it is not malfunctioning if the warn-
ing light turns off after the electronic
parking brake is released.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate after the electronic park-
ing brake is frequently applied and
released. However, the electronic
parking brake system is not mal-
functioning if the light turns off after
a short period of time.
. When the hybrid system is started
while the electronic parking brake is
applied/released, the system may
judge an abnormal situation and
the warning light may illuminate. If
the warning light illuminates, turn
the ignition switch once to the “OFF”
position and then restart the hybrid
system. Then, apply/release the
electronic parking brake. If the warn-
ing light turns off, the system will be
restored.
This light has the following functions.
! Brake fluid level warning
s03ae1002
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of
the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
175
3
Instruments and Controls
(178,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
s03ae1003
If the warning light remains on even though
the parking brake is released, the brake
fluid level may be low or there could be a
problem with the EBD system. Park the
vehicle in a safe place immediately and
contact a SUBARU dealer.
! Electronic brake booster warning
s03ae1009
The brake system warning light illuminates
when the electronic brake booster is
malfunctioning. In addition, the warning
messages “Brake System” and “Check
Owner’s Manual” are displayed alternately
on the combination meter display. If the
warning light illuminates, promptly park in
a safe location as soon as possible and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
s03ae1004
The brake system warning light illuminates
when the electronic parking brake system
is malfunctioning. If the warning light
illuminates, promptly park in a safe loca-
tion as soon as possible and contact your
SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
be released even if the parking brake
switch is pushed. For details, refer to
“Electronic Parking Brake” �P336.
! Frequent operation warning
s03ae100403
The brake system warning light illuminates
and a chirp sound will be heard if the
parking brake switch is operated too
frequently. In this case, the operation of
the parking brake switch is restricted to
protect the electronic parking brake sys-
tem.
& Electronic Parking
Brake Indicator Light
s03ae85
! Parking brake indicator
s03ae8501
The light illuminates with the parking brake
applied while the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. It turns off when
the parking brake is fully released.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
s03ae8502
WARNING
. When you release the electronic
parking brake while the hybrid
system is running, the electronic
parking brake indicator light will
turn off. However, if the light still
illuminates, stop the vehicle in a
safe location immediately and
have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, the elec-
tronic parking brake system may
be malfunctioning. Immediately
stop your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion, use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing and contact your SUBARU
dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-
tronic Parking Brake” �P336.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position with the electro-
nic parking brake applied, the elec-
tronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and then turns
off.
Warning and Indicator Lights
176
(179,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pulled to apply the electro-
nic parking brake while the ignition
switch is in the “OFF” position, the
electronic parking brake indicator
light illuminates, remains illumi-
nated for approximately 30 seconds
and then turns off.
. Even if the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, if the warning
light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not mal-
functioning.
– The indicator light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is
released.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash immediately after
the hybrid system is started. How-
ever, it is not malfunctioning if the
indicator light turns off after the
electronic parking brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash after the electro-
nic parking brake is frequently ap-
plied and released. However, the
electronic parking brake system is
not malfunctioning if the light turns
off after a short period of time.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the indicator
light flashes, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated when the parking
brake cannot be released even if the
parking brake switch is pushed. For de-
tails, refer to “Electronic Parking Brake”
�P336.
! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-
ing
s03ae850201
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
s03ae850202
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
& Auto Vehicle Hold Indi-
cator Light
s03ae94
CAUTION
If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator
light does not illuminate even when
“Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” is
touched to activate the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing.
This indicator illuminates when the Auto
Vehicle Hold is activated. This indicator
blinks while the vehicle is stopped by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details,
refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold function”
�P338.
& Low Fuel Warning Light
s03ae11
The low fuel warning light illuminates when
the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.3
US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal). It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
177
3
Instruments and Controls
(180,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Door Open Indicator
Light
s03ae61
When any of the doors or the rear gate is
not fully closed, the door open indicator
light appears. This function is effective
even if the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“ACC” position.
The open door is indicated by the corre-
sponding part of the door open indicator
light.
Always make sure this indicator does not
appear before you start to drive.
& Engine Hood Open
Warning Light
s03ae98
The warning light illuminates if the engine
hood is not fully closed. This function is
effective even if the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” or “ACC” position.
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.
& Windshield Washer
Fluid Warning Light
s03ae42
This light appears when the fluid level in
the washer fluid tank decreases to the
lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt (0.6
liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).
& All-Wheel Drive Warn-
ing Light
s03ae13
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe location and then check
whether all four tires are the same
diameter and whether any of the
tires has a puncture or has lost air
pressure for some other reason.
The AWD warning light may flash in the
following driving situations.
. The vehicle with tires that are different
wheel diameters.
. The fuel tank is empty.
. The tire pressure is excessively low.
. The charge level of the high voltage
battery is low.
& Power Steering Warn-
ing Light
s03ae53
While the hybrid system is running, this
warning light illuminates when a malfunc-
tion has been detected in the electric
power steering system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely
low speeds, such as while frequently
turning the steering wheel during
parallel parking.
Warning and Indicator Lights
178
(181,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long
period of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However, this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
that may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol Warning Light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
Operation Indicator
Light
s03ae14
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
s03ae1401
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
becomes inoperative, causing the
warning light to illuminate. Although
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control
and ABS are inoperative in this case,
the ordinary functions of the brake
system are still available. You will be
safe while driving in this condition,
but drive carefully and have your
vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only
illuminates. At this time, the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) remains
fully operational.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem malfunctions.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light, ABS warning light, and
brake system warning light illumi-
nate simultaneously if the EBD sys-
tem malfunctions. For further details
of the EBD system malfunction
warning, refer to “Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD) system
warning” �P176.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the hybrid system is started but
turns off immediately and remains
off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the hybrid system has started and
turns off while the vehicle is subse-
quently being driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but turns off immediately
and remains off.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
179
3
Instruments and Controls
(182,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
s03ae1402
The indicator light flashes during activation
of the skid suppression function and during
activation of the traction control function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the
engine has been started, especially
in cold weather. This does not in-
dicate the existence of a problem.
The light should turn off as soon as
the engine has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light is
on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after the
lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF Indicator Light
s03ae15
The light illuminates when “Vehicle Dy-
namics Control” is selected to deactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate while the
system check.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to
the “ON” position.
& Warning Chimes and Warning
Indicator of the Keyless Ac-
cess with Push-Button Start
System
s03ae55
Access key warning indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations and
help protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator appears, take the
appropriate action.
You cannot turn the warning chimes off.
However, the volume setting of the outside
warning chime can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
Warning and Indicator Lights
180
(183,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
dealer for details.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indica-
tor on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the hybrid system. This
indicates the status that the steering
wheel is not released and could
result in an accident involving ser-
ious injury or death.
CAUTION
. When starting the hybrid system
again after the operation indica-
tor on the push-button ignition
switch flashes in green, if the
operation indicator is still flash-
ing in green, there could be a
steering lock malfunction. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
. Even when the access key fob is
within the operating ranges inside
the vehicle, the access key warning
for hybrid system start may be
provided depending on the status
of the access key fob and the
environmental conditions.
. When the access key fob is taken out
of the vehicle through an open
window, the access key takeout
warning or passenger access key
takeout warning will not be pro-
vided.
! List of warnings
s03ae5504
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
181
3
Instruments and Controls
(184,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding, ding ...
(intermittent)
— —
The driver’s door is opened while the push-
button ignition switch is “ACC” position and
the select lever is in the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch
the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch is switched
to “OFF” while the driver’s door is open.
Close the driver’s door.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep, beep,
beep (5 times)
—
Hybrid system operation warning:
The driver’s door is opened while the hybrid
system is operating and the select lever is in
the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, and then close the driver’s door.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch
the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Lockout warning:
The doors are locked by following methods
when an access key fob is left in the car.
. The door is closed when the lock lever of
the door is in the lock position.
. The door is closed when the power door
locking switch is in the lock position.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
The doors cannot be locked while the access
key fob is inside the vehicle.
A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will
be unlocked.
—
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the
push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the
doors cannot be locked.
—
Beep, beep,
beep, beep,
beep (5 times)
—
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and
one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.
If one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding
Long beep (60
seconds max.)
—
Power warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while you
are carrying the access key fob, the push-
button ignition switch is in a position other
than “OFF” and the select lever is in the “P”
position.
Return the access key fob inside the vehicle,
or switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
If the push-button ignition switch is not
switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
locked.
Warning and Indicator Lights
182
(185,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding, ding ...
(7 seconds)
— —
Access key warning:
The vehicle is driven while the access key fob
is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and drive the
vehicle.
Ding — —
Access key warning for hybrid system
start:
The push-button ignition switch is pressed
while the access key fob is not inside the
vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
—
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access
key fob and closes the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
—
Passenger access key takeout warning:
A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the
access key fob and closes a door other than
the driver’s door while the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than
“OFF”.
Return the access key fob to inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
—
Access key takeout without “P” position
warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access
key fob and closes the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
183
3
Instruments and Controls
(186,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Long beep
(continuous)
— —
Select lever position warning:
. Case 1: The hybrid system is turned off
by pressing the push-button ignition
switch while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
. Case 2: The driver’s door is opened
while the push-button ignition switch is in
a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
. Case 1: Start the hybrid system, shift the
select lever to the “P” position, switch the
push-button ignition switch to “OFF” and
exit the vehicle.
. Case 2: Shift the select lever to the “P”
position, switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low.
Replace the battery of the access key fob.
For details, refer to “
Replacing Battery”
�P500.
Ding —
Flashes in green
(15 seconds max)
Steering lock warning:
The hybrid system start procedure is per-
formed, but the steering is still locked.
While turning the steering wheel right and left
lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding — Flashes in orange
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction is detected in the power
system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and
have the vehicle inspected.
Warning and Indicator Lights
184
(187,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Security Indicator Light
s03ae16
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation of
the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
s03ae1601
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm System”
�P147.
! Immobilizer system
s03ae1602
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF”
position.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the
following conditions are met.
– The push-button ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
– The hybrid system is not running.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered
or the ID code does not match), the power
is not switched to “ON” and the security
indicator light continues blinking.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. It
means that the matching of the ID
code is completed and the immobi-
lizer system is deactivated, and it
does not indicate a malfunction.
– While the hybrid system is run-
ning
– The push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the driver’s
door has not been opened or
closed
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such
as the security indicator light
flashes irregularly, it will not affect
the functionality of the immobilizer
system.
& SI-DRIVE Indicator
s03ae52
SI-DRIVE indicator
1 Intelligent (I) mode
2 Sport (S) mode
This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE
mode.
For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to
“SI-DRIVE” �P323.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
185
3
Instruments and Controls
(188,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Select Lever/Gear Position
Indicator
s03ae43
1 Select lever/gear position indicator
The select lever position is displayed on
the indicator.
When the manual mode is selected, the
current gear position will appear on the
indicator. Refer to “Selection of Manual
Mode” �P321.
& Turn Signal Indicator
Lights
s03ae20
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing Bulbs” �P495.
& High Beam Indicator
Light
s03ae21
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
operating the headlight flasher.
& High Beam Assist Indi-
cator
s03ae83
This indicator appears when the high
beam assist function is activated. For
details about the high beam assist func-
tion, refer to “High Beam Assist Function”
�P230.
& Automatic Headlight
Beam Leveler Warning
Light
s03ae33
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving, have
your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU
dealer.
& LED Headlight Warning
Light
s03ae76
This light illuminates if the LED headlights
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF Indicator
Light
s03ae89
This light illuminates when the Steering
Responsive Headlight function is off. For
details about the on/off setting, refer to
“Car settings” �P214.
& Steering Responsive
Headlight Warning
Light
s03aeb2
The light illuminates when a malfunction
occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-
light. Refer to “Steering Responsive Head-
light (SRH)” �P234.
& Headlight Indicator
Light
s03ae24
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. The light switch is turned to the “
” or
“
” position.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
Warning and Indicator Lights
186
(189,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Front Fog Light Indica-
tor Light
s03ae25
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
& X-MODE Indicator
s03ae68
1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator
2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator
This indicator appears while X-MODE is
activated. It will disappear when X-MODE
is deactivated. Refer to “To Activate/
Deactivate X-MODE” �P332.
& Hill Descent Control
Indicator Light
s03ae69
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in standby. It will
flash while the hill descent control function
is operating. It will disappear when the hill
descent control function is not available.
& BSD/RCTA Warning In-
dicator
s03ae80
This warning indicator appears on the
combination meter display when BSD
(Blind Spot Detection) or RCTA (Rear
Cross Traffic Alert) is malfunctioning for
any reason. For further details, refer to
“BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator” �P363. If
this indicator remains displayed, have your
vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& BSD/RCTA OFF Indica-
tor
s03ae86
This indicator appears on the combination
meter display when “Rear Vehicle Detec-
tion (BSD/RCTA)” is touched to deactivate
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert), or when the
BSD/RCTA is suspended temporarily. For
details, refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF Indica-
tor” �P363.
& Vehicle Detected in Adjacent
Lane Indicator
s03aec2
1 When a vehicle is detected (white area
with yellow outline is indicated)
2 When the turn signal lever is being
operated while a vehicle is detected
(yellow area is indicated)
When BSD/RCTA detects a vehicle ap-
proaching from behind in the adjacent
lane, the system displays a vehicle de-
tected in adjacent lane indicator on the
screen. For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”
�P357.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and Indicator Lights
187
3
Instruments and Controls
(190,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Icy Road Surface
Warning Indicator
s03ae82
When the outside temperature is approxi-
mately 378F (38C) or less, the icy road
surface warning indicator will illuminate to
inform the driver that the road surface may
be frozen.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the
temperature may not be indicated
correctly or the update may be
delayed in the following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example:
when going in and out of an
underground parking area or
when passing through a tunnel)
– When starting the hybrid system
after being parked for a certain
period of time
. The icy road surface warning indi-
cator should be treated only as a
guide. Be sure to check the condi-
tion of the road surface before driv-
ing.
. Once the icy road surface warning
indicator appears, it will not disap-
pear unless the outside temperature
has increased to approximately 418F
(58C) or higher.
& RAB Warning Indi-
cator (If Equipped)
s03ae91
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc-
tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-
ing (RAB) System” �P366.
& RAB OFF Indicator (If
Equipped)
s03ae92
This indicator illuminates when the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is
turned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system is suspended
temporarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) System” �P366.
& Sonar Audible Alarm
OFF Indicator (If
Equipped)
s03ae93
This indicator illuminates when the Sonar
Audible Alarm is turned OFF. For the
setting procedure, refer to “Car settings”
�P214.
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem Operation Indicator
Light (Green) (If
Equipped)
s03aea4
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is activated. Refer to
“Driver Monitoring System operation in-
dicator light (green)” �P386.
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light (Yel-
low) (If Equipped)
s03aeb6
This warning light illuminates if the Driver
Monitoring System malfunctions. We re-
commend that you have your vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible. Refer to “Driver Monitoring
System warning light (yellow)” �P386.
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem OFF Indicator Light
(If Equipped)
s03aea5
This indicator illuminates when “Driver
Monitoring System” is touched to deacti-
vate the Driver Monitoring System. Refer
to “Driver Monitoring System OFF indica-
tor light” �P386.
Warning and Indicator Lights
188
(191,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem Temporary Stop In-
dicator Light (If
Equipped)
s03aea6
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.
Refer to “Driver Monitoring System tem-
porary stop indicator light” �P386.
NOTE
The Driver Monitoring System stops
temporarily in the following circum-
stance.
. The temperature of the Driver Mon-
itoring System unit is high.
& Hybrid Fail Lamp
s03ae71
The hybrid fail lamp illuminates when a
malfunction occurs in the hybrid system.
CAUTION
When the hybrid fail lamp is illumi-
nated, an telltale screen will be
displayed simultaneously on the
combination meter. Perform the pro-
cedure shown on the combination
meter, then have your vehicle in-
spected by a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
& Hybrid System Over-
heat Warning Light
s03aea2
This warning light illuminates when the
temperature of the electric motor or engine
is high. When this warning light illumi-
nates, the power output limits are activated
and it will only be possible to drive the
vehicle at only low speeds. If the hybrid
system overheat warning light does not
turn off, set the shift position to “P” and
stop the vehicle for about 5 minutes. When
the warning light turns off, normal driving
will again be possible. If the warning light
stays on even after stopping the vehicle for
more than 5 minutes, consult your
SUBARU dealer to have your vehicle
inspected.
& Pedestrian Alert Sys-
tem Warning Indicator
Light
s03aeb4
This light blinks when a malfunction occurs
in the pedestrian alert system.
& Hybrid READY Indi-
cator Light
s03ae73
This light illuminates when the hybrid
system has started. It turns off when the
hybrid system has been turned off.
This light flashes while the hybrid system is
preparing to start.
CAUTION
If the hybrid READY indicator light
does not illuminate when the hybrid
system has been started, have your
vehicle checked at a SUBARU deal-
er.
& EV (Electric Vehicle)
Indicator
s03ae99
This light illuminates in the following
cases.
. When driving only using the electric
motor power
. When the engine is automatically
stopped by the hybrid system
& EV (Electric Vehicle)
Drive Mode Indicator
s03aeb0
This indicator appears when the EV drive
mode is activated. For details, refer to “EV
(Electric Vehicle) Drive Mode” �P31.
Warning and Indicator Lights
189
3
Instruments and Controls
(192,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3-6. Combination Meter Dis-
play
s03bn
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
combination meter display while
the vehicle is in motion. When
operation of the combination meter
display interferes with your ability to
concentrate on driving, stop the
vehicle before performing opera-
tions on the screen. Also, do not
concentrate on the display while
driving. Doing so may cause you to
look away from the road and could
result in an accident.
Various information will be shown on the
combination meter display. Also, a warn-
ing message will appear on the display if a
malfunction is detected. In addition, sev-
eral settings for the displayed content can
be performed.
Combination Meter Display
190
(193,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Combination Meter Display Features
s03bn15
1 Meter information screen (Refer to “Me-
ter Information Screen” �P194.)
2 Warning indicator (Refer to “Warning and
Indicator Lights” �P166.)
3 Digital speed screen (Refer to “Digital
Speed Screen” �P199.)
Warning screen (Refer to “Warning
Screen” �P194.)
EyeSight screen*
4 Odometer (Refer to “Odometer” �P163.)
Double trip meter (Refer to “Double Trip
Meter” �P163.)
SI-DRIVE indicator (Refer to “SI-DRIVE
Indicator” �P185.)
X-MODE Indicator (Refer to “X-MODE
Indicator” �P187.)
Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-
fer to “Select Lever/Gear Position Indi-
cator” �P186.)
Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale Screen”
�P195.)
Warning indicator (Refer to “Warning and
Indicator Lights” �P166.)
5 Basic screen (Refer to “Basic Screens”
�P197.)
Warning screen (Refer to “Warning
Screen” �P194.)
*: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight
Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display
191
3
Instruments and Controls
(194,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Meter Display Mode
s03bn1503
1 Normal mode
In normal mode, the analogue power
meter and speedometer display respec-
tively.
2 Map mode*
1
In map mode, the power meter and
speedometer are displayed together
with the genuine SUBARU navigation
system.
3 EyeSight mode*
2
The EyeSight mode screen displays the
vehicle operating status and surround-
ings.
*1: For details about the audio and navigation
system, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the audio and navigation
system.
*2: For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
There are three different screen modes to
choose from. To change the screen mode,
press and hold the “
” switch or operate
the Center Information Display settings.
Refer to “Basic Operation” �P193 or
“General settings” �P210.
NOTE
. When a warning screen or a turn-by-
turn display is displayed, the screen
mode cannot be switched.
. Depending on the mode, the display
location of such things as the instru-
ments, basic screen, and EyeSight
screen will change.
Combination Meter Display
192
(195,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Basic Operation
s03bn01
Control switches
1
2
3
By operating or of the control
switches, the screens can be changed.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning informa-
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the
information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with
on the display,
press the
switch on the steering wheel.
NOTE
If the warning screen does not disap-
pear even after you follow the on-
screen instructions, contact your
SUBARU dealer to have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
& Welcome Screen (Opening
Animation) and Good-Bye
(Ending Animation) Screen
s03bn08
Welcome screen and good-bye screen are
motion graphic displayed on the combina-
tion meter display and center information
display upon entering and exiting the
vehicle.
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed after unlocking the door, the wel-
come screen (opening animation) will
appear on the combination meter display
for approximately 20 seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position, the combination meter
display gradually turns off by showing
good-bye screen (ending animation).
NOTE
. The welcome screen and the good-
bye screen may differ in the actual
words and appearance.
. The basic screen will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position while the wel-
come screen is displayed.
. Once the welcome screen appears, it
takes a certain period of time to
display it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
after unlocking the driver’s door,
the welcome screen will not appear
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display
193
3
Instruments and Controls
(196,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
even when the driver’s door is
opened and closed.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when you lock the driver’s door by
using the remote keyless entry sys-
tem (all models) or the keyless
access function (if equipped) while
the welcome screen is displayed.
. The welcome screen including the
audio/navigation unit can be set to
on or off.
. The welcome screen can be set to on
or off. For details, refer to “General
settings” �P210.
. The good-bye screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Gen-
eral settings” �P210.
& Warning Screen
s03bn05
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, it will appear on
combination meter display. Take the ap-
propriate actions based on the messages
indicated.
& Meter Information Screen
s03bn12
The meter information screen can be
changed. For details, refer to “General
settings” �P210.
! Clock and temperature
s03bn1202
This screen displays the clock and outside
temperature.
NOTE
. The clock can be displayed in either
12-hour display or 24-hour display.
For details, refer to “Clock” �P225.
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the
temperature may not be indicated
correctly or the update may be
delayed in the following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example:
when going in and out of an
Combination Meter Display
194
(197,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
underground parking area or
when passing through a tunnel)
– When starting the hybrid system
after being parked for a certain
period of time
. You can set the temperature units to
be displayed in Fahrenheit (8F) or
Celsius (8C). For details, refer to
“General settings” �P210.
! Compass (if equipped)
s03bn1203
The direction of the vehicle is displayed.
! Driving range on remaining fuel
s03bn1204
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
& Telltale Screen
s03bn09
1 Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs,
the following telltales will be displayed on
the telltale screen.
NOTE
. When there is warning information
to display, it will be displayed in five
warning indicators, starting on the
left in ascending order of severity.
. If there are 6 or more warning
messages to display, the indicators
will be displayed in sequential order.
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display
195
3
Instruments and Controls
(198,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Mark Name Page
Door open indicator
light
178
Engine hood open
warning light
178
LED headlight warning
light
186
High beam assist indi-
cator
186
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
186
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
186
Engine low oil level
warning light
172
All-Wheel Drive warning
light
178
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
188
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
188
Sonar Audible Alarm
OFF indicator (if
equipped)
188
Mark Name Page
BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator
187
BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor
187
Hill descent control in-
dicator light
187
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
186
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
178
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem operation indicator
light (green) (if
equipped)
188
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem warning light (yel-
low) (if equipped)
188
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem OFF indicator light
(if equipped)
188
Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop in-
dicator light (if
equipped)
189
Icy road surface warn-
ing light
188
Mark Name Page
Hybrid Fail Lamp 189
Hybrid system overheat
warning light
189
EV (Electric Vehicle)
drive mode indicator
189
Pedestrian alert system
warning indicator light
189
Combination Meter Display
196
(199,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Basic Screens
s03bn06
By operating the or switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the screen
that is always displayed.
Average fuel consumption screen:
AVG: Average fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Current fuel consumption screen:
: Current fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Driving information screen:
: Journey time
: Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition
switch was turned to the “ON” position)
and journey distance (the distance that
has been driven since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
– CONTINUED –
Combination Meter Display
197
3
Instruments and Controls
(200,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):
This screen displays each tire pressure.
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
and the tire pressure will be displayed on
the screen in yellow.
NOTE
. The tire pressure values are dis-
played several minutes after driving.
. You can set the tire pressure units.
For details about setting the units,
refer to “General settings” �P210.
. Once the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the low tire pressure,
the tire pressure values will display
in yellow until the system detects the
normal tire pressure.
. Immediately adjust the tire pressure
when the warning light illuminates.
When the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the adjusted tire
pressure, the warning light will turn
off and the tire pressure values will
turn to white.
. For information about the specified
value of the air pressure, refer to
“Tires” �P509.
Navigation screen:
When the route guidance is set in the
navigation system, this item shows the
navigation route information. For details
about the navigation system, refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-
ual.
Audio screen:
The audio screen shows the status of
audio information. For details about the
audio system, refer to the separate navi-
gation/audio Owner’s Manual.
Energy flow screen:
Combination Meter Display
198
(201,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The energy flow screen shows the amount
of energy remaining in the high voltage
battery as well as the energy flow dis-
tributed between the engine, high voltage
battery and tires. Power from the engine is
displayed in orange, and power from the
electric motor is displayed in green. The
charging energy flow from the engine and
wheels to the high voltage battery is
displayed in aqua blue.
& Digital Speed Screen
s03bn11
1 Speed limit indicator
2 Vehicle speed
This screen displays the current vehicle
speed.
3-7. Center Information Dis-
play (CID)
s03bs
WARNING
Always pay attention to safe driving
when operating the center informa-
tion display while the vehicle is in
motion. When operation of the cen-
ter information display is disturbing
your awareness and ability to con-
centrate on driving, stop the vehicle
in a safe place before performing
operations on the display. Also, do
not concentrate on the display while
driving. Doing so could result in an
accident.
& Features
s03bs01
All information is displayed on the center
information display, including vehicle set-
tings, vehicle status, navigation system (if
equipped) operation, audio operation, and
climate control operation.
Items Reference page
Interruption screen 200
Vehicle status and
maintenance infor-
mation
202
Vehicle settings 209
Climate control op-
erations
209
Surround View Moni-
tor (if equipped)/Rear
view camera
344/352
Navigation system
Refer to the naviga-
tion/audio Owner’s
Manual.
Audio/telephone
Refer to the naviga-
tion/audio Owner’s
Manual.
EyeSight
Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement
for the EyeSight sys-
tem.
The center information display can also be
used to set and initialize the center
information display itself.
NOTE
. When the vehicle is in motion,
certain functions and selections
may not be available.
. The language and units for both the
center information display and the
combination meter display can be
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
199
3
Instruments and Controls
(202,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
changed. For details, refer to “Gen-
eral settings” �P210.
For details about unit settings, refer
to “Car settings” �P214.
. The images displayed in this Own-
er’s Manual are sample images. The
actual image may vary depending on
the region and vehicle specifica-
tions.
& Welcome Screen
s03bs02
Welcome screen and good-bye screen are
motion graphic displayed on the combina-
tion meter display and center information
display upon entering and exiting the
vehicle.
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed, the welcome screen will appear for
a short time.
NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is shown.
. The welcome screen can be turned
on or off. For details, refer to “Gen-
eral settings” �P210.
. For a certain period of time after the
welcome screen has once appeared,
it may not appear again even when
the driver’s door is opened and
closed. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
& Good-Bye Screen
s03bs08
The good-bye screen will be displayed
under the following conditions.
. The driver’s door is opened after the
ignition switch is put in the “OFF”
position.
. 3 minutes have passed after the ignition
switch is put in the “OFF” position with
the driver’s door closed.
. 10 minutes have passed when the
hands-free phone is used after the
ignition switch is put in the “OFF”
position.
. The 12 V battery voltage is low when
the ignition switch is put in the “OFF”
position.
& Interruption Screen
s03bs03
Useful messages, such as reminders,
weather information (if equipped) and
traffic information (if equipped) may inter-
rupt the current screen and appear on the
display accompanied by a beep. Take the
proper action according to the message.
& Touch Screen Operations
s03bs04
The center information display has a touch
screen. Operations are performed by
touching the touch screen directly.
! Touch
s03bs0401
Quickly touch and release once.
Center Information Display (CID)
200
(203,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Drag
s03bs0402
Touch the screen and move the screen to
the desired position.
! Swipe
s03bs0403
Quickly move the screen by swiping with
your finger.
NOTE
Swipe operations may not be per-
formed smoothly in high altitudes.
& Basic Screens
s03bs05
! Touch screen
s03bs0501
1 HOME icon (Refer to “HOME icon”
�P209.)
2 Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” �P202.)
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
201
3
Instruments and Controls
(204,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3 Information bar (Refer to “Information
bar” �P202.)
4 Main screen (Refer to “Main screen”
�P209.)
5 Manage device icon (Refer to the sepa-
rate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual)
6 Driver profiles icon (Refer to “Driver
profiles icon” �P209.)
7 Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate
control screen” �P209.)
8 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) ON/OFF icon
(Refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) ON/
OFF icon” �P205.)
9 Car settings icon (Refer to “Car settings
icon” �P206.)
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.
! Status bar
s03bs050101
The outside temperature and clock are
displayed on the status bar.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the
temperature may not be indicated
correctly or the update may be
delayed in the following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example:
when going in and out of an
underground parking area or
when passing through a tunnel)
– When starting the hybrid system
after being parked for a certain
period of time
. You can set the temperature to be
displayed in Fahrenheit (8F) or Cel-
sius (8C). For details, refer to “Gen-
eral settings” �P210.
. The clock can be displayed in either
12-hour display or 24-hour display.
For details, refer to “General set-
tings” �P210.
. Touch the clock on the status bar to
display the clock setting screen.
Refer to “Clock” �P225.
. For details about Bluetooth device
information, refer to the navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual.
! Information bar
s03bs050102
Swipe the information bar or touch or
on the information bar to switch the item
displayed.
Audio screen:
The screen of the currently selected audio
source is displayed.
For details about how to use the audio set,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
Center Information Display (CID)
202
(205,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Navigation screen:
The directions to the destination are
displayed on the screen.
NOTE
When a destination is not set in the
navigation system, the compass orien-
tation, street name and speed limit
remain displayed on the screen.
Favorite screen:
Favorite screen
This screen displays up to three optional
pieces of information that can be selected
from the following items.
Item Details
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil temperature
Average vehicle speed
Accelerator opening ratio
Vehicle posture
Direction of the vehicle*
1
Weather information for the
next three hours*
2
Weather information for the
next six hours*
2
Posted speed limit of the
road you are currently driv-
ing on*
1
Calendar
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
203
3
Instruments and Controls
(206,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Item Details
Driver Monitoring System*
1
information and the average
fuel consumption of driver
Nothing is displayed.
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
NOTE
Some items may not be shown depend-
ing on the model and specifications.
The items shown on the favorite screen
can be changed. For details, refer to
“Favorite Widgets” �P219.
Weather information screen (if
equipped):
NOTE
. When all of the following conditions
are satisfied, weather information is
displayed.
– The vehicle is equipped with an
audio and navigation system for
SiriusXM satellite radio.
– The SiriusXM satellite radio sub-
scription is active.
. The weather forecast for the set
destination remains displayed until
a new destination is set or until the
destination is reached.
. Depending on the reception timing
of XM, the weather information may
be delayed.
X-MODE screen:
X-MODE information is displayed on the
screen.
Also, X-MODE can be switched to a
different mode on the screen.
! Main screen
s03bs050103
For details about the following menu, refer
to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
. Radio
. Media
. Phone
. Map
. Apps
. Add Shortcut
Center Information Display (CID)
204
(207,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
For details about the following menu, refer
to the Owner’s Manual supplement for
MySubaru Connected Services.
. MySubaru
! Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) ON/OFF
icon
s03bs050109
1 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) indicator (green)
Touching “ ” deactivates the Auto Vehi-
cle Hold (AVH) and turns off the Auto
Vehicle Hold (AVH) indicator (green) on
the screen. Touching “
” again activates
the Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) and turns on
the Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) indicator
(green). Refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold
function” �P338.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control icon
s03bs050110
To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on
and off, touch the “Vehicle Dynamics
Control” icon.
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem is turned off during engine operation,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light on the combination meter illumi-
nates.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will
be deactivated. When “Vehicle Dynamics
Control” icon has been touched again to
reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light turns off.
Refer to “To Turn On/Off the Vehicle
Dynamics Control System” �P330.
! Display Off
s03bs050112
Activation of the display off mode:
Touch “Display Off”.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
205
3
Instruments and Controls
(208,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Deactivation of the display off mode:
1 Volume knob
Press and hold the volume knob to turn the
screen back on.
! Car settings icon
s03bs050104
Touch to display the items that are
changeable while driving.
Center Information Display (CID)
206
(209,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting procedure
1st menu 2nd menu
Vehicle Control
Vehicle Dynamics
Control
ON/OFF 330 218
X-MODE Snow/Dirt, Normal, Deep Snow/Mud 332 218
Cruise Control Accel-
eration
Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic *
2
—
Auto Vehicle Hold
(AVH)
ON/OFF 338 218
Steering Responsive
Headlights (SRH)
ON/OFF 234 218
Driving Assistance
Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF
*
2
—
Forward Collision
Warning
Far/Normal/Near
Emergency Lane
Keeping Assist
ON/OFF
Lane Departure
All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function
Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
Rear Vehicle Detec-
tion (BSD/RCTA)
ON/OFF 363 218
Driver Monitoring
System*
1
ON/OFF 378 218
More Settings
Meter Display Mode Normal/Map/EyeSight 192 218
Meter Map View 3D/2D Heading UP/2D North UP *
3
218
Warning Volume Min/Mid/Max 362, 376 and *
2
—
Units
km, km/h, Liter/
Miles, MPH, Gallon
162 and 190
218
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
207
3
Instruments and Controls
(210,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
*3: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.
Center Information Display (CID)
208
(211,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Driver profiles icon
s03bs050105
Touch (driver profiles icon) to confirm
the driver’s information. For details, refer
to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
! Manage devices icon
s03bs050113
Touch the manage devices icon to pair
your vehicle’s system with a device that
uses Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, or a
similar application. For details, refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-
ual.
! HOME icon
s03bs050106
Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.
! Climate control screen
s03bs050107
The climate control status is shown on the
screen.
1 Climate control ON/OFF icon
2 Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)
3 SYNC mode indicator
4 Airflow mode
5 Climate control mode
6 Air inlet selection
7 Air conditioner ON indicator
8 Dynamic ventilation mode indicator
9 Set temperature indicator (passenger’s
side)
10 Dynamic ventilation ON/OFF icon
11 Customizable icon
12 Fan speed control
When operating the climate control sys-
tem, the main screen switches to the
climate control screen. For details, refer
to “Climate Control Panel” �P256.
! Main screen
s03bs0502
To display the main screen, touch
(HOME).
In this Owner’s Manual, the following
settings will be explained. For details
about other items, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
– “Settings” ? “General”
– “Settings” ? “Car”
– “Car Info”
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
209
3
Instruments and Controls
(212,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! General settings
s03bs050201
Set the time and display general items.
1. Touch (HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. Select the preferred menu.
Center Information Display (CID)
210
(213,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Clock
Time Setting AUTO/Manual
225 218
Time Zone
AUTO/Hawaii/Alaska/Pacific/
Mountain/Central/Eastern/Atlantic/
Newfoundland/Guam
Daylight Saving Time AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF
Clock Format 12H/24H
Display
Display Off Turn the screen off. — 218
Brightness Dial ON/OFF 165 218
Brightness/Contrast
Set and adjust the brightness and
contrast of the display.
218 218
Wi-Fi Settings
Wi-Fi ON/OFF
*
2
—
Connected to: Select the registered devise.
Available Wi-Fi Networks Add
Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN Setup/Push Button Setup
Registered Wi-Fi Networks —
Wi-Fi Security Infor-
mation
Wi-Fi Security Information (AP
mode)
—
Wi-Fi Hotspot
Wi-Fi Hotspot ON/OFF
*
3
—Wi-Fi name (SSID): —
Security Type: —
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
211
3
Instruments and Controls
(214,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Wi-Fi Hotspot
Password: —
*
3
—
Broadcast Frequency: —
SSID Broadcast ON/OFF
Connected Devices: —
Reminder Screen
Maintenance ON/OFF
200
218
Birthday ON/OFF 218
Anniversary ON/OFF 218
Valet Mode
Passcode Setting*
4
Keyboard: Enter New Passcode
226 218Activate Valet Mode Keyboard: Enter Your Passcode
Change Passcode Keyboard: Change Passcode
Meter Screen
Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 162 218
Meter Information Screen
OUT TEMP/Clock, Compass/Gas
Range, None
194 218
Turn by Turn Screen Interrup-
tion
ON/OFF *
2
218
Meter Display Mode Normal/Map/EyeSight 192 218
Meter Map View 3D/2D Heading Up/2D North Up *
2
218
Camera
Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 353 218
Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 355 218
Climate Control Customize Climate Button
A/C, MAX A/C, AUTO, Recircula-
tion, SYNC
260 218
Temperature Units 8F/8C — 202 218
Center Information Display (CID)
212
(215,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Language — English/Français/Español 190 and 199 218
Tire Pressure Units*
1
— kPa/PSi 197 218
Home Screen Short-
cuts
— ON/OFF *
2
218
Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 193 218
Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 193 218
Favorite Widgets — Set a favorite widget from the list. 202 219
Birthday List — Set a birthday. 200 219
Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 200 220
Periodic Rest Notifica-
tion
— ON/OFF
*
2
—
Software Update — —
Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel
System Information — —
Free/Open Source
Software Information
—
—
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.
*3: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for MySubaru Connected Services.
*4: Displayed until valet mode is set.
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
213
3
Instruments and Controls
(216,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Car settings
s03bs050209
Perform the EyeSight system setting and
vehicle setting.
1. Touch (HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. Select the preferred menu.
Center Information Display (CID)
214
(217,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
Automatic Vehicle Shut Down — ON/OFF 307 218
EyeSight
Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF
*
3
—
Forward Collision Warning Far/Normal/Near
Emergency Lane Keeping As-
sist
ON/OFF
Lane Departure
All Functions/Lane Departure
Prevention Function Only/
Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
Cruise Control Acceleration
Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dy-
namic
Lead Vehicle Acquisition
Sound
ON/OFF
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF
Select Drive on Left/Drive on
Right
Right Lane/Left Lane
EyeSight Assist Monitor*
1
Red Indicator ON/OFF
Yellow Indicator ON/OFF
Green Indicator ON/OFF
Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB)*
1
Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF 366 218
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
215
3
Instruments and Controls
(218,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
Driver Monitoring System*
1
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF
378
218
Repeat Facial Scan OK/Cancel 220
User Recognition ON/OFF 218
Register User Register the user. 220
Delete User Delete the registered user. 220
Delete All Users Delete all registered users. 220
Keyless Entry System
Audible Signal*
1
*
2
ON/OFF 138 and 142 218
Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 138 and 142 218
Driver Door Unlock*
1
Driver Door Only/All 132 218
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*
1
Rear Gate/Trunk Only, All 132 218
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 241 218
Interior Light —
10 seconds/20 seconds/30
seconds/OFF
275 218
Auto Light Sensor
Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 227 218
Wiper Link ON/OFF 228 218
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
228
218
Leaving Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
218
Center Information Display (CID)
216
(219,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 236 218
Auto Door Lock/Unlock
Auto Door Lock
Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out
of PARK/OFF
145
218
Auto Door Unlock
Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/
Shift into or out of PARK/OFF
218
Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 72 218
Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 330 218
Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 338 218
Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/
RCTA)
— ON/OFF 363 218
X-MODE —
Snow/Dirt, Normal, Deep
Snow/Mud
332 218
Steering Responsive Head-
lights (SRH)
— ON/OFF 234 218
Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max 362, 376 and *
3
218
Units —
km, km/h, Liter/
Miles, MPH, Gallon
162 and 190
218
*1: If equipped
*2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.
However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc.
*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
217
3
Instruments and Controls
(220,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! How to select items on the screen
s03bs0510
! ON/OFF setting
s03bs051001
Example
Touch the changing menu and select ON
or OFF .
! Selecting
s03bs051002
Example
Touch the preferred item.
! How to set items on the screen
s03bs0511
! Brightness/Contrast
s03bs051101
Set and adjust the brightness and contrast
of the center information display.
NOTE
“Brightness” can only be adjusted
when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to
“General settings” �P210.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Display”
5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”
6. Drag to adjust the brightness and
contrast.
Center Information Display (CID)
218
(221,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Touch “Default” to revert to the factory
setting.
! Favorite Widgets
s03bs051102
The menu on the favorite screen can be
customized.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Favorite Widgets”
5. Select the icon of the display position.
6. Select the display item.
! Birthday List
s03bs051103
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,
a message will be shown when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. This
function can be set to on or off by
“Reminder Screen”. For details, refer to
“General settings” �P210.
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “General”
4. ? “Birthday List”
5. ? “Add”
6. Enter the name.
7. ? “Next”
8. Enter the date.
9. ? “OK”
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
219
3
Instruments and Controls
(222,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
A maximum of 5 birthdays can be
stored.
! Anniversary List
s03bs051104
The procedure for setting an anniversary is
the same as “Birthday List” �P219, except
that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.
! Driver Monitoring System (if
equipped)
s03bs051105
The Driver Monitoring System settings can
be changed.
For setting method for the following menu
on the Driver Monitoring System, refer to
“ON/OFF setting” �P218.
. Driver Monitoring System
. User Recognition
Repeat Facial Scan:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Repeat Facial Scan”
6. ? “OK”
7. While seated in the driver’s seat, face
forward and wait for a few moments.
When the scan is completed, the
completion screen is displayed on the
Center Information Display.
Register User:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Register User”
6. Select the preferred user from the list.
Center Information Display (CID)
220
(223,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7. ? “Set”
8. While seated in the driver’s seat, face
forward and wait for a few moments.
When the screen changes, the registration
of the facial scan is completed.
A Forward direction
B Display direction
1 Face forward.
2 Do not lower your chin.
3 Face the display.
*: Display
NOTE
. If user registration cannot be per-
formed, turn your face forward as
shown in the illustration, then turn to
the display.
. There are some cases where user
registration cannot be registered
properly. In those cases, refer to
“Driver Monitoring System” �P378.
. If “Unable to register. Try again.”
appears, repeat the procedure be-
ginning from step 5.
9. Enter the name.
10. ? “Next”
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
221
3
Instruments and Controls
(224,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11. Select the preferred icon.
12. ? “Set”
NOTE
. An existing user can be overwritten
by selecting a registered number.
When a user is registered by over-
writing, the individual fuel economy
data is reset.
. When “User Recognition” is set to
OFF, user registration cannot be
selected.
Delete User:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Delete User”
6. Select the preferred user from the list.
7. ? “Yes”
Delete All Users:
1. Touch
(HOME).
2. ?
(Settings)
3. ? “Car”
4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”
5. ? “Delete All Users”
Center Information Display (CID)
222
(225,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
6. ? “Yes”
! Car information screen
s03bs0503
1. Touch (HOME) to display the top
menu.
2. ? (Car Info)
! Driving Statistics screen
s03bs050301
1 Driving Statistics
2 Steering angle
3 Running condition
4 Vehicle posture
5 Telltale screen
This screen displays the driving status of
the vehicle and the operation status func-
tions. For functions that are operating, the
indicator will illuminate or flash.
– CONTINUED –
Center Information Display (CID)
223
3
Instruments and Controls
(226,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. The vehicle posture indication may
differ from the actual vehicle pos-
ture.
. The vehicle posture angle varies not
only due to the angle of the road
surface, but also due to the vehicle
tilt caused by the occupants, cargo,
and acceleration or deceleration.
! Maintenance screen
s03bs050303
Maintenance reminders can be set.
Engine Oil change reminder:
1. Touch “Maintenance” from the 2nd
menu in the car info screen.
2. ?
(Engine Oil)
3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-
tion Distance” of the reminder.
4. ? “Set”
5. ?
Oil Filter change reminder:
The setting procedure is the same as the
“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Oil
Filter” item in step 2.
Tires rotation reminder:
The setting procedure is the same as the
“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Tires”
item in step 2.
Maintenance Schedule setting:
The setting procedure is the same as the
“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the
“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
NOTE
. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.
. Touch “Default” to revert to the
default value.
. For details about “Auto”, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for
MySubaru Connected Services.
Center Information Display (CID)
224
(227,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3-8. Clock
s03af
For models with a genuine SUBARU
navigation and/or audio system, the clock
can be adjusted using either auto mode or
manual mode.
& Setting the Clock Manually
s03af03
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Touch (HOME).
3. ?
(Settings)
4. ? “General”
5. ? “Clock”
6. ? “Time Setting”
7. ? “Manual”
8. ?
or
9. ? “OK”
NOTE
The clock setting screen can also be
displayed by touching the clock on the
status bar.
& Setting the Clock Automati-
cally
s03af02
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Touch (HOME).
3. ?
(Settings)
4. ? “General”
5. ? “Clock”
6. ? “Time Setting”
? “AUTO”
The clock will be set automatically where a
GPS signal is available.
NOTE
Depending on the model of smart-
phone, the settings of the connected
smartphone may need to be changed.
– CONTINUED –
Clock
225
3
Instruments and Controls
(228,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-
tion settings may need to be activated.)
For details, check the instructions on
connecting smartphones.
& Time Zone
s03af06
You can configure the “Time Zone” setting
on the clock setting screen.
If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”
is selected, “Time Zone” is set automati-
cally. Refer to “Main screen” �P209 for the
setting.
& Daylight Saving Time
s03af07
You can configure the “Daylight Saving
Time” setting on the clock setting screen.
If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”
is selected, “Daylight Saving Time” is set
automatically. Refer to “Main screen”
�P209 for the setting.
NOTE
. When “Time Setting” is set to
“AUTO”, you can change “Daylight
Saving Time” and “Time Zone” set-
tings.
. When “Daylight Saving Time” is set
to “AUTO”, the “Time Zone” setting
can only be set to “AUTO”.
3-9. Valet Mode
s03bt
When leaving your vehicle with a valet
service, such as at a hotel or restaurant,
you can set the valet mode, which disables
the navigation, audio, and vehicle setting
functions.
& Activation of Valet Mode
s03bt01
1. Touch “Valet Mode”.
2. Enter the passcode.
3. Touch “OK”.
& Deactivation of Valet Mode
s03bt02
1. Touch “Valet Mode” or select OFF .
Valet Mode
226
(229,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2. Enter the passcode.
3. Touch “OK”.
NOTE
If you enter the passcode incorrectly
three times in a row when setting or
canceling valet mode, a message
prompting you to contact a SUBARU
dealer will be displayed, but it is still
possible to enter the passcode even
after the fourth attempt.
If you have forgotten your passcode,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
3-10. Light Control Switch
s03ah
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the hybrid system is
not running can cause the 12 V
battery to discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the off position. If the
vehicle is left unattended for a
long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
than the off position, even though
the lights will turn off after 10
minutes, the 12 V battery may be
discharged.
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
NOTE
The light control switch can be oper-
ated (except auto on/off headlights)
even when the push-button ignition
switch is in the “OFF” position.
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illuminated.
& Headlights
s03ah01
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the light control switch.
“OFF” position (for U.S. models):
The headlights are all off.
Only when the following conditions are
fulfilled, instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
– CONTINUED –
Light Control Switch
227
3
Instruments and Controls
(230,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
ambient light.
. The hybrid system is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
“OFF” position (for Canada models):
The headlights are all off.*
1
*
2
*1: When the light switch is switched to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,
the lights turn off. Then the light switch will
automatically return to the “AUTO” position.
*2: The headlights will automatically change to
the AUTO mode when the following condi-
tions are met:
. The hybrid system is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
“AUTO” position: Auto on/off head-
lights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
NOTE
. If the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights
do not turn on when it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to the
“
” position. If this happens, have
your vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light sensitivity of the auto on/
off headlights can be changed by
operating the center information dis-
play. For details, refer to “Car set-
tings” �P214. Also, the setting can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
! Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
s03ah0106
While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
matically turn on when the windshield
wipers operate several times. The head-
lights will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 1 minute after the wiper stops.
The ON/OFF setting of this function can be
changed by operating the center informa-
tion display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” �P214. Also, the setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Welcome lighting function
s03ah0103
The welcome lighting function turns on the
low beam headlight for smooth approach-
ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position.
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights.
NOTE
If the hybrid system is turned off after
turning off the light switch, the wel-
come lighting function may not operate
(for Canada models).
! When approaching
s03ah010301
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
Light Control Switch
228
(231,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
automatically illuminate when unlocking
the doors by using the remote keyless
entry system.
The low beam headlights will remain
illuminated for 30 seconds*
1
and then turn
off. However, if any of the following
operations is done, the low beam head-
lights will turn off.
. The doors are locked.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
! When exiting
s03ah010302
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
remain illuminated even when the push-
button ignition switch is in the “OFF”
position.
The low beam headlights will turn off under
any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low
beam headlights were illuminated by
the welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the door
is opened and closed.*
1
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
procedure, perform the locking proce-
dure twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which the
low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can
change the setting by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to “Car
settings” �P214.
! Battery drainage reduction function
s03ah0107
When the headlights are illuminated and
the push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position, the battery drainage re-
duction function will be active.
When the battery drainage reduction
function is active, the following system
operations help reduce the risk of battery
discharge.
. The headlights turn off automatically
after 10 minutes.
. When you open or close the door or
operate the light control switch, the
headlights will turn off automatically 10
minutes later.
NOTE
. When you leave the vehicle, put the
light control switch in the “OFF”
position to prevent 12 V battery
discharge.
. When you open or close the door or
operate the light control switch after
the headlights turn off automatically,
the headlights will turn on again.
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights
s03ah0101
The sensor is on the dashboard as shown
in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
– CONTINUED –
Light Control Switch
229
3
Instruments and Controls
(232,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& High/Low Beam Change
(Dimmer)
s03ah02
While the light control switch is in the “ ”
or “AUTO” position in a dark place, the
headlights will turn on.
Pushing the lever forward and releasing it
will activate the high beam. Pulling the
lever rearward and releasing it will switch
the headlights to low beam.
When the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, pushing the lever for-
ward turns the High Beam Assist is on.
Refer to “High Beam Assist Function”
�P230.
When the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter is also on.
& Headlight Flasher
s03ah03
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works even
though the lighting switch is in the off
position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
& High Beam Assist Function
s03ah07
NOTE
. The high beam assist function uti-
lizes the stereo camera installed at
the position of the front map lights.
. For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
The high beam assist function automati-
cally changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa).
When all of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to high
beam.
. When the vehicle speed increases to or
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
. The road does not have a sharp curve.
When any of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to low beam.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
Light Control Switch
230
(233,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
tioning or is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
. Do not overestimate the capacity of
the high beam assist function. The
driver always has the responsibility
to understand the surrounding si-
tuation, to drive safely, and to
change the headlight mode manu-
ally if necessary.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “opera-
tional”. This setting can be changed
to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU
dealers. For more details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
! How to use the high beam assist
function
s03ah0701
The high beam assist function will be
activated when all the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights
are on automatically.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
High beam assist indicator
When the high beam assist function is
activated, the high beam assist indicator
on the combination meter will illuminate.
NOTE
If the high beam assist function is
malfunctioning or is temporarily
stopped, the headlight will be fixed at
low beam.
! How to temporarily lower the sensi-
tivity of the high beam assist func-
tion
s03ah0704
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by using the
following operations.
1. After turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, set the light control
switch to the “AUTO” position and push
the signal lever forward (high beam
position).
2. After the high beam assist indicator on
the combination meter will illuminate,
turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and within approximately 15
seconds, press the “
/ ” (following
distance setting) switch more than 10
times consecutively.
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam
assist indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter display will flash.
NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function cannot be lowered
in the following conditions.
– Cruise control indicator is illumi-
nated.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
(yellow) is illuminated.
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function returns to normal
level the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion and the hybrid system is re-
started.
– CONTINUED –
Light Control Switch
231
3
Instruments and Controls
(234,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! How to change the headlight mode
manually
s03ah0702
Change to the low beam:
. Set the light control switch to “
”.
. Pull the lever while the high beam is
turning on and release it.
Change to the high beam:
Push the lever forward and release it.
At this time, the high beam assist function
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator
light will turn on.
NOTE
. After manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you
turn on the high beam assist func-
tion, push the lever forward and
release it.
. When manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you
turn the light control switch to the
“
” position, the parking lights,
front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights will turn on.
! Tips for the high beam assist sys-
tem
s03ah0703
. The high beam assist function recog-
nizes the condition surrounding the
vehicle based on the brightness of
illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc.
Therefore, the headlight mode may
switch in some situations that do not
match to the driver’s sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
detected.
. Under the following situations, the
brightness of ambient illumination may
not be detected correctly and the high
beam assist function may not work
properly. As a result, the glare of the
high beam may disturb the oncoming
vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low
beam mode may continue although
there are no oncoming vehicles and
vehicles ahead. In the such cases,
change the headlight mode manually.
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
storm, heavy rain, etc.).
– When the windshield glass is dirty or
fogged.
– When the windshield is cracked or
damaged.
– If there are lights similar to the
headlights or the tail lights in the
surrounding area.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead is driven without its
headlights and tail lights on.
– If the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if
the light beams are not aimed
correctly.
– When a rapid change of brightness
continues while driving.
– When driving on a road with many
ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When there are some objects that
reflect light strongly, such as a road
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
– When the rear part of the vehicle
ahead, such as a container, reflects
light strongly.
– When the headlights of your vehicle
are damaged or dirty.
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
being towed.
– When the stereo camera is de-
formed or the stereo camera lenses
are dirty.
– Immediately after the hybrid system
has started.
Light Control Switch
232
(235,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. In the following conditions, the head-
light mode will not be automatically
changed from the high beam to the low
beam.
– When your vehicle passes an on-
coming vehicle suddenly in a blind
curve.
– When another vehicle passes in
front of your vehicle.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead comes in and out of
view because of continuous curves,
median strips, roadside trees, etc.
. If the stereo camera detects the light of
the front fog lights of an oncoming
vehicle, the headlight mode may
change from the high beam to the low
beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from
the high beam to the low beam, or the
low beam mode may continue, when
affected by a street light, traffic signal,
illumination of an advertisement board,
or a reflective object such as a road
sign and signboard.
. The timing of the change of headlight
mode may differ due to the following
factors.
– Color or brightness of the headlights
of an oncoming vehicle or the tail
lights of a vehicle ahead.
– The headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle
ahead are covered with mud, snow,
etc.
– Movement and direction of an on-
coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
– When the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle or the tail lights of a
vehicle ahead illuminate on only one
side.
– When the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
road surface, etc.).
– Number of passengers and weight
of loaded cargo.
– Limitation of the detection ability of
the stereo camera.
& Daytime Running Light Sys-
tem
s03ah04
WARNING
When the daytime running lights are
illuminated, the tail lights do not
illuminate. When it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to the
“
” position to illuminate the head-
lights and tail lights. This will im-
prove visibility and allow other dri-
vers to see your vehicle more easily.
The daytime running lights will automati-
cally illuminate when the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
. The hybrid system is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,
“
” or “OFF”.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
tion, parking lights, front side marker
lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are also illumi-
nated.
Light Control Switch
233
3
Instruments and Controls
(236,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3-11. Steering Responsive
Headlight (SRH)
s03bl
1 The target area of illumination when SRH
is activated
2 The target area of illumination when SRH
is not activated
SRH is a function that automatically moves
the headlight beam to the left or right in
accordance with the steering angle and
vehicle speed. This function helps to
improve the visibility at night by illuminat-
ing the road ahead at corners and inter-
sections.
You can turn the SRH function on or off.
The settings can be changed by using the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” �P214.
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indi-
cator light
The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF
indicator light on the combination meter
display turns off when SRH is turned on.
The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF
indicator light on the combination meter
display illuminates when SRH is turned off.
Steering Responsive Headlight warning
light
If SRH is malfunctioning, the Steering
Responsive Headlight warning light on
the combination meter display illuminates
and a message appears on the warning
screen when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. It indicates that SRH has
been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
. The SRH function operative/non-op-
erative status is kept when the
hybrid system is turned off, even if
the hybrid system is restarted.
. When you turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, the Steering Re-
sponsive Headlight OFF indicator
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
234
(237,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
light will illuminate and turn off after
several seconds.
. SRH only activates when the vehicle
is traveling forward at the speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more.
3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler
s03at
The LED headlights produce more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
and the headlight beams are angled
upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience glare.
To prevent this, the automatic headlight
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
optimum height automatically depending
on the load the vehicle is carrying.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the head-
lights may become misaligned, and
the headlight beam leveler will not
reset them to the proper angle. This
may occur after transporting your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the
vehicle is parked and restarted on
different angles. In such cases, have
the headlight alignment checked by
a SUBARU dealer.
3-13. Front Fog Light Switch
s03ba
1 Headlight switch
2 Fog light switch
To turn on the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch to the “
” position
while the headlights are in either of the
following conditions.
. The headlight switch is in the “
”
position with the low beam mode
selected.
. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights
turn on automatically.
– CONTINUED –
Headlight Beam Leveler
235
3
Instruments and Controls
(238,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
To turn off the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch back down to the
“OFF” position.
Front fog light indicator light
The indicator light located on the combina-
tion meter will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
3-14. Turn Signal Lever
s03ai
1 Right turn
2 Lane change right signal
3 Lane change left signal
4 Left turn
If the lever does not return after cornering,
return the lever to the neutral position by
hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
& One-Touch Lane Changer
s03ai01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and
immediately release it.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational
setting of the one-touch lane changer
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details. The setting can also be chan-
ged by operating the center information
display. For details, refer to “Car set-
tings” �P214.
Turn Signal Lever
236
(239,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3-15. Wiper and Washer
s03am
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield is dry. This may
scratch the glass, damage the
blade rubbers and might cause
the wiper motor to fail. Before
operating the wiper on a dry
windshield, always use the wind-
shield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the blade rubbers are not frozen
to the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blade rubbers frozen to
the window glass could cause
not only the blade rubbers to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
rubbers are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
cer or rear window defogger
before turning on the wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe location, turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position and
clean the window glass to allow
proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield Washer
Fluid” �P487.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is pro-
tected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates con-
tinuously under an unusually heavy
load, the circuit breaker may trip to
stop the motor temporarily. If this
happens, park your vehicle in a safe
location, turn off the wiper switch,
and wait for approximately 10 min-
utes. The circuit breaker will reset
itself, and the wipers will again
operate normally.
. Clean your blade rubbers and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt
or road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
– CONTINUED –
Wiper and Washer
237
3
Instruments and Controls
(240,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects, or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper opera-
tion and streaking on the glass. If
you cannot remove the streaks after
operating the windshield washer or
if the wiper operation is jerky, clean
the outer surface of the windshield
and rear window using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, how-
ever, use detergent to clean the
blade rubbers. Use only a sponge
or soft cloth (and no neutral deter-
gent or mild abrasive cleaner) when
you clean the blade rubbers. If you
wipe the rubber of the blade
strongly, the black coating compo-
nent will peel off, which will cause
the wiper to judder. Also, after wip-
ing it off, check that the rubber has
not come loose. After cleaning the
window glass and wiper blade rub-
bers, be sure to rinse them with
clean water. Rinse the window until
the water does not form beads on the
glass. This indicates that the glass is
clean.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades (or blade
rubbers) with new ones. For replace-
ment instructions, refer to “Replace-
ment of Wiper Blades” �P488.
& Windshield Wiper and
Washer Switches
s03am01
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
! Windshield wipers
s03am0101
Type-A
Type-B
: Mist (for a single wipe)
OFF/
: Off
: Intermittent
: Low speed
:
High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF”/“
” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
Wiper and Washer
238
(241,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Wiper intermittent time control
s03am0103
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
! Windshield washer
s03am0104
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light appears when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light appears,
refill the tank with fluid. For the tank
refilling method, refer to “Windshield
Washer Fluid” �P487.
– CONTINUED –
Wiper and Washer
239
3
Instruments and Controls
(242,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Rear Window Wiper and
Washer Switch
s03am02
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
1 Type-A
2 Type-B
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
: Continuous
: Intermittent
OFF/
: Off
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
! Rear wiper
s03am0201
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob switch
to the “OFF”/“
” position.
With the switch turned to the “
” position,
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at
intervals corresponding to the vehicle
speed. In this position, when you move
the select lever to the “R” position, the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the
“OFF”/“
” position, if the front windshield
wiper is operating continuously, the rear
wiper will operate intermittently when you
move the select lever to the “R” (reverse)
position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
follows.
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
. Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs
the rear wiper operation on the rear
gate. Doing so may damage the rear
wiper when it operates.
! Washer
s03am0202
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “
” position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
downward to the “
” position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
you release the knob.
Rear view camera washer:
The rear view camera washer also oper-
ates while the rear window washer is
operating.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
Wiper and Washer
240
(243,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light appears when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light appears,
refill the tank with fluid. For the tank
refilling method, refer to “Windshield
Washer Fluid” �P487.
3-16. Defogger and Deicer
s03bi
1 Rear window defogger
2 Outside mirror defogger
3 Windshield wiper deicer
The defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
Defogger button
To activate the defogger and deicer sys-
tem, press the defogger button. The rear
window defogger, outside mirror defogger
and windshield wiper deicer are activated
simultaneously. The indicator light on the
defogger button illuminates while the
defogger and deicer system is activated.
To turn them off, press the defogger button
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
– CONTINUED –
Defogger and Deicer
241
3
Instruments and Controls
(244,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
mirrors have been cleared and the wind-
shield wiper blade rubbers have been
deiced completely before that time, press
the defogger button to turn them off. If
defrosting, defogging or deicing is not
complete, you have to press the defogger
button to turn them on again.
It is possible to set the defogger and deicer
system for the continuous operation mode
by operating the center information dis-
play. For details, refer to “Car settings”
�P214.
CAUTION
. To prevent the 12 V battery from
being discharged, do not operate
the defogger and deicer system
continuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may da-
mage the conductors printed on
the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to
the windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode:
– If the vehicle speed remains at 9
mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper
deicer system automatically
stops operating. However, the
rear window defogger system
and outside mirror defogger sys-
tem maintain continuous opera-
tion in this condition.
– If the 12 V battery voltage drops
below the permissible level, con-
tinuous operation of the defogger
system and deicer system is
canceled and the system stops
operating.
3-17. Mirrors
s03ap
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside Mirror (without Auto-
Dimming Function) (If
Equipped)
s03ap08
1 Normal position
2 Anti-glare position
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-
glare position.
Mirrors
242
(245,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Com-
pass (If Equipped)
s03ap12
1 Compass
2 Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
preserve your vision.
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-
ture
s03ap1201
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming
feature will default to on with each ignition
cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature
s03ap1202
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “
” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display
turns on/off. The compass feature will
default to on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is
calibrated.
Compass calibration zones
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the “
” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a
zone number appears in the dis-
play.
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “
” switch
again until your current location
zone number appears. After you
stop pressing the switch, your new
zone number will be saved. Within
a few seconds, the display will
show a compass direction.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
ged or if the compass appears inaccu-
rate, recalibrate the compass. Press
and hold the “
” switch for more than
9 seconds or until a “C” appears in the
display. Once a “C” appears in the
display, slowly drive the vehicle in
circles until compass is calibrated.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
243
3
Instruments and Controls
(246,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(If
Equipped)
s03ap07
1 Compass
2 HomeLink
®
buttons
3 Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
help preserve your vision.
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-
ture
s03ap0705
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming
feature will default to on with each ignition
cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature
s03ap0706
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “
” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display
turns on/off. The compass feature will
default to on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is
calibrated.
Compass calibration zones (U.S.)
Compass calibration zones (South Amer-
ica)
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the “
” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a
zone number appears in the dis-
play.
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “
” switch
again until your current location
zone number appears. After you
stop pressing the switch, your new
zone number will be saved. Within
a few seconds, the display will
show a compass direction.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
ged or if the compass appears inaccu-
Mirrors
244
(247,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
rate, recalibrate the compass. Press
and hold the “
” switch for more than
9 seconds or until a “C” appears in the
display. Once a “C” appears in the
display, slowly drive the vehicle in
circles until compass is calibrated.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
s03ap0704
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
three hand-held radio frequency remotes
used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even home
lighting. The below steps are generic
programming instructions; for Genie and
Sommer garage door openers please go
directly to the HomeLink
®
website. Addi-
tional information and programming vi-
deos can be found at www.HomeLink.
com and www.youtube.com/HomeLink-
Gentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink
®
with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features
as required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any gar-
age door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect
an object signaling the door to
stop and reverse does not meet
current U.S. federal safety stan-
dards.
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-
held remote (garage door opener
remote) of the device for quicker
and more accurate training.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” or “ACC” position before
programming and/or operating
HomeLink
®
.
. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-
age door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as
for future HomeLink
®
program-
ming.
. For security reasons, when trans-
ferring ownership of your vehi-
cle, it is recommended to delete
the programmed HomeLink
®
but-
tons. Refer to “Erasing
HomeLink
®
buttons” �P248.
! Programming a New HomeLink
®
button
s03ap070409
1 Indicator Light
2 HomeLink
®
buttons
1. Press and release the HomeLink
®
button that you would like to program.
The HomeLink
®
indicator light will flash
orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing
HomeLink
®
buttons” �P248).
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
245
3
Instruments and Controls
(248,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage
door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink
®
button
that you would like to program.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train
better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches
(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you
have difficulty with the programming
process.
3. While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and hold the
hand-held remote button. Continue
pressing the hand-held remote button
until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from orange to green. You
may now release the hand-held remote
button.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to re-
place this “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 3 with proce-
dures noted in the “Gate Operator /
Canadian Programming” section. Refer
to “Gate Operator/Canadian Program-
ming” �P248.
1 Indicator Light
4. Press the HomeLink
®
button that you
would like to program and observe the
indicator light.
. If the indicator light remains constant
green, your device should operate
when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed. At this point, if your device
operates, programming is complete.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button up to three times to complete
the programming process. At this
point if your device operates, pro-
gramming is complete. If the device
does not operate, continue with the
next step of the programming in-
structions.
Mirrors
246
(249,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 “Learn” button
5. At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit (see the device’s
manual to identify this button). The
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete
step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the
HomeLink
®
button up to three times. At
this point programming is complete
and your device should operate when
the HomeLink
®
button is pressed and
released.
1 Status Indicators
8. If status indicator arrows appear next
to the indicator light, please refer to
“Garage Door Two-Way Communica-
tion” �P248.
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink
®
website.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
247
3
Instruments and Controls
(250,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming
s03ap070410
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink
®
to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are de-
signed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmit-
ting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the program-
ming procedures, replace “Programming a
New HomeLink
®
button” step 3 with the
following:
While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (“cy-
cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every
two seconds until the HomeLink
®
indicator
light changes from orange to green. You
may now release the hand-held remote
button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug
the device during the “cycling” process
to prevent possible overheating.
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 4 to complete.
! Using HomeLink
®
s03ap070411
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink
®
button. Activa-
tion will now occur for the trained device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held remote of the device may also
be used at any time.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
s03ap070412
To erase programming from the three
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
®
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
indicator will change from continuously lit
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
HomeLink
®
is now ready to be pro-
grammed at any time beginning with
“Programming a New HomeLink
®
button”
- step 1.
! Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink
®
button
s03ap070406
To program a previously trained button,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink
®
button can be released at
this point. Proceed with “Programming
a New HomeLink
®
button” - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the program-
ming of a new device to the button, it
will revert to the previously stored
programming.
! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
nication
s03ap070413
HomeLink
®
has the capability of commu-
nicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink
®
can receive and display “clos-
ing” or “opening” status messages from
compatible garage door opener systems.
At any time, HomeLink
®
can also recall and
display the last recorded status commu-
nicated by the garage door opener to
indicate your garage door being “closed”
or “opened”.
HomeLink
®
has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
Mirrors
248
(251,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Range may be reduced by obstacles such
as houses or trees. You may have to slow
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication.
! Programming Two-Way Commu-
nication
s03ap070414
1 Status Indicators
Within 5 seconds after programming a new
HomeLink
®
button, both of HomeLink’s
garage door status indicators will flash
rapidly green indicating that the garage
door two-way communication has been
enabled. If your garage door status in-
dicators flashed, two-way communication
programming is complete.
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink
®
information
and programming videos can be found
online at www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
! Using Two-Way Communication
s03ap070415
1 Status Indicator
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink
®
by simulta-
neously pressing HomeLink
®
buttons 1
and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink
®
will
display the last recorded status for 3
seconds.
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink
®
will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators (see below).
1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking
Orange)
2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
ing Orange)
4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
! Certification
s03ap070416
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline
at 1-800-355-3515.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
249
3
Instruments and Controls
(252,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
. Canada-spec. models
Mirrors
250
(253,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or da-
mage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
& Outside Mirrors
s03ap03
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
s03ap0301
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
convex mirror to judge the distance
of vehicles behind you when chan-
ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or
glance backwards) to determine the
actual size and distance of objects
that you view in convex mirror.
CAUTION
Make sure to adjust the mirrors
before driving.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
251
3
Instruments and Controls
(254,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Remote control mirror switch
s03ap0302
: Select side to adjust
: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left
mirror, “R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional op-
eration.
NOTE
The mirrors can also be adjusted
manually.
3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering
Wheel
s03bf
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to the
fixed position, adjust the steering
wheel again. It is dangerous to
drive without locking the steering
wheel. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel
252
(255,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Tilt adjustment
2 Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front
Seats” �P44.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and
down, and forward and backward.
& Heated Steering Wheel Sys-
tem (If Equipped)
s03bf01
The Heated Steering Wheel system
warms the steering wheel at a constant
temperature.
1 Heated Steering Wheel switch
2 Indicator light
3 Heated area
To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel
system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel
switch when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering
wheel will be warmed and the indicator
light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off
the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull
the switch again. Then the indicator light
will turn off.
CAUTION
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
system with the hybrid system
running. Otherwise, the 12 V
battery voltage may drop below
the permissible level and it may
not be possible to start the hybrid
system.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the Heated
Steering Wheel for a long period
of time. When using the Heated
Steering Wheel, always be sure to
warn the persons concerned.
. Do not cover the Heated Steering
Wheel with an object such as a
steering wheel cover. Doing so
may cause the Heated Steering
Wheel to overheat.
. Do not spill liquid on the steering
wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately and dry it before
using the Heated Steering Wheel
system.
– CONTINUED –
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel
253
3
Instruments and Controls
(256,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately
above 1048F (408C) when the switch
is turned on, the system will not heat
the steering wheel. Then, the indica-
tor light will continue to illuminate.
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
. The temperature of the Heated Steer-
ing Wheel system cannot be ad-
justed.
3-19. Horn
s03ar
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Horn
254
(257,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s04
4-1. Ventilator Control............................................ 256
Center Ventilators ............................................... 256
Side Ventilators ..................................................256
4-2. Climate Control Panel .................................... 256
Climate Control Screen ....................................... 258
4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation........... 259
Sensors.............................................................. 260
4-4. Manual Climate Control.................................. 260
Airflow Mode Selection ....................................... 260
Dynamic Ventilation ............................................ 261
Temperature Control ...........................................263
Fan Speed Control.............................................. 264
Air Conditioner Control....................................... 264
Air Inlet Selection ...............................................264
To Turn Off the Climate Control System .............. 265
4-5. Defrosting ........................................................265
4-6. Operating Tips for Heater and Air
Conditioner ....................................................266
Cleaning Ventilator Grille.................................... 266
Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct
Sunlight ........................................................... 266
Checking Air Conditioning System before
Summer Season............................................... 266
Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity
and Low Temperature Weather Condition ......... 266
Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When
Hybrid System Is Heavily Loaded ..................... 266
Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ...... 266
4-7. Air Filtration System .......................................267
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter............................. 267
Climate Control
4
Climate Control
(258,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
4-1. Ventilator Control
s04af
& Center Ventilators
s04af01
To adjust the airflow direction, move the
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all
the way down.
& Side Ventilators
s04af02
1 Open
2 Close
To adjust the airflow direction, move the
tab.
4-2. Climate Control Panel
s04ag
WARNING
. The cooling function operates
only when the hybrid system is
running.
. Do not leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. On hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or ani-
mals.
Ventilator Control
256
(259,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Climate control screen
2 Defogger button (Refer to “Defogger and
Deicer” �P241.)
3 Passenger’s side temperature control
button (Refer to “Temperature Control”
�P263.)
4 Driver’s side temperature control button
(Refer to “Temperature Control” �P263.)
5 Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
�P265.)
– CONTINUED –
Climate Control Panel
257
4
Climate Control
(260,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Climate Control Screen
s04ag13
Climate control screen
: Touch the climate control mode indicator
1 Climate control ON/OFF icon
2 SYNC mode indicator
3 Climate control mode indicator
4 Dynamic Ventilation mode indicator
5 Dynamic Ventilation ON/OFF icon
6 Customizable icon*
7 Fan speed control
8 Climate control mode select icon
9 Temperature control screen (passen-
ger’s side)
10 SYNC icon
11 Temperature control bar
12 Airflow mode selection screen
13 Temperature control screen (driver’s
side)
*: The customizable icon can be changed to
the favorite icon. Refer to “General settings”
�P210.
NOTE
The layout and the available functions
for operating the climate control screen
may vary depending on the number of
items shown on the center information
display.
Climate Control Panel
258
(261,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
4-3. Automatic Climate Con-
trol Operation
s04ai
Climate control screen
1 Air inlet selection
2 Air conditioner
3 Airflow mode
4 Fan speed
When the auto mode is selected, the
following functions are automatically con-
trolled.
. Airflow mode
. Air inlet selection
. Air conditioner operation
. Fan speed
To activate this mode, perform the follow-
ing.
“AUTO” is displayed on the customiz-
able icon:
1. Touch “AUTO”.
2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to
“Temperature Control” �P263.
“AUTO” is not displayed on the custo-
mizable icon:
1. Touch the climate control mode indi-
cator.
2. Touch “AUTO”.
3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to
“Temperature Control” �P263.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the hybrid system
is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner will automatically
turn on if the temperature is set
much lower than the current outlet
air temperature. Even in this case,
the “A/C” indicator light on the
climate control screen illuminates.
. The air conditioner may not operate
in the following cases:
– When the cabin temperature is
low
– When the ambient temperature
decreases close to 328F (08C)
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. When “AUTO” is displayed, if you
operate the fan speed control or the
airflow mode, press the defroster
button, or turn on MAX A/C mode,
the “AUTO” display will turn off. You
can then manually control the sys-
tem as desired using the climate
control screen. To change the sys-
tem back to auto mode, touch
“AUTO”.
To turn off the climate control system,
touch “ON/OFF”.
At this time, the air inlet selection mode will
differ depending on the auto mode and
manual mode.
. When the air inlet selection is set to
auto mode: Outside air circulation
. When the air inlet selection is set to
manual mode: No change
When the ignition switch is changed to the
“OFF” or “ACC” position from “ON”, the air
inlet mode will automatically change to the
outside air mode regardless of whether it is
the auto mode or manual mode.
– CONTINUED –
Automatic Climate Control Operation
259
4
Climate Control
(262,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Sensors
s04ai03
1 Solar sensor
2 Interior air temperature sensor and hu-
midity sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precau-
tions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
4-4. Manual Climate Control
s04aj
& Airflow Mode Selection
s04aj01
Select the preferred airflow mode by the
following operation.
1. Touch the climate control mode indi-
cator.
2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.
Airflow modes are as follows.
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
Manual Climate Control
260
(263,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the
foot outlets
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel
& Dynamic Ventilation
s04aj11
Dynamic Ventilation is a system that uses
sensors and other technology to judge that
someone is sitting in the front passenger
seat or rear seat and prioritizes the climate
control for these seats when they are
occupied.
When the push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, the climate
control system automatically selects the
Dynamic Ventilation mode according to
where the vehicle occupants are sitting.
– CONTINUED –
Manual Climate Control
261
4
Climate Control
(264,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
“DRIVER” mode (driver’s seat is only
occupied):
When the climate control system judges
that the driver is the only vehicle occupant,
“DRIVER” is displayed on the screen and
the system directs the airflow only to the
driver. To cancel the airflow “DRIVER”
mode, touch the “
” icon, and “ALL” will be
displayed instead of “DRIVER”, and air-
flow will be directed to all the seats.
“FRONT” mode (driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seat are occupied):
When the climate control system judges
that the driver’s and passenger’s seats are
occupied, “FRONT” is displayed on the
screen and the system directs the airflow
to the driver and front passenger. To
cancel the airflow “FRONT” mode, touch
the “
” icon, and “ALL” will be displayed
instead of “FRONT”, and airflow will be
directed to all the seats.
“ALL” mode (rear seats are occupied
by passengers):
When the climate control system judges
that there are passengers occupying the
rear seats, “ALL” is displayed on the
screen and the system directs the airflow
to all vehicle occupants. To cancel the
airflow “ALL” mode, touch the “
” icon and
“DRIVER” or “FRONT” will be displayed on
the screen depending on which passen-
ger’s seats are occupied and airflow will be
directed to the seats depending on the
airflow mode.
Manual Climate Control
262
(265,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. Depending on the settings of the
climate control system or other
factors affecting the temperature in-
side the vehicle, the operation of the
Dynamic Ventilation mode for occu-
pants may differ from the operation
displayed on the screen.
. The climate control system judges
that the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by detecting such things
as the fastening of the seatbelt,
opening or closing of the door, and
operation of the passenger’s side
temperature setting controls.
. If “FRONT” is displayed on the
screen when the front passenger’s
door is opened and then closed and
the climate control system subse-
quently judges that the front pas-
senger’s seat is not occupied, the
screen will display “DRIVER” when
the vehicle speed reaches approxi-
mately 13 mph (20 km/h).
. The climate control system judges
that there are passengers occupying
the rear seats according to the open-
ing and closing of the rear doors.
However, touching “
” icon will turn
off the function that judges whether
the rear doors are open or closed. To
turn the function on again, turn the
ignition switch to the “OFF” position
for approximately one hour.
. The system may not be able to judge
the presence of passengers accu-
rately, in which case this function
may not operate properly.
& Temperature Control
s04aj02
Perform the following operation to regulate
the temperature of airflow from the air
outlets.
Temperature control buttons:
Press the temperature control button to the
blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).
Temperature control screen:
1. Touch the climate control mode indi-
cator.
2. Select the preferred temperature by
the following operation.
. Touch and move the temperature
control bar.
. Touch the “
”/“ ”.
. Touch the preferred temperature in
the temperature control screen.
! MAX A/C mode
s04aj0208
For quicker cooling, touch “MAX A/C” on
the climate control mode select icon or
customizable icon.
When the MAX A/C mode is on, the
following settings will be changed auto-
matically.
. The air conditioner will turn on.
. The temperature will be set on the
lowest.
. The fan speed will be set on the
maximum speed.
. The air inlet will be set to the recircula-
tion mode.
. The airflow mode setting will be set to
the ventilation mode.
To turn off the MAX A/C mode and return to
the previous setting, touch “MAX A/C”
again.
NOTE
For models with the Driver Monitoring
System, MAX A/C mode will be can-
celed if the Driver Monitoring System
completes user recognition again while
MAX A/C mode is in use.
! SYNC mode
s04aj0207
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-
peratures are synchronized using the
driver’s side temperature control button
and temperature control screen.
. If “SYNC” is displayed on the customiz-
able icon, touch “SYNC” to turn the
SYNC mode on or off.
– CONTINUED –
Manual Climate Control
263
4
Climate Control
(266,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. If a customizable icon other than
“SYNC” is displayed, touch the climate
control mode indicator. Then touch
“SYNC” to turn the SYNC mode on or
off.
When the SYNC mode is on, the SYNC
mode indicator will be displayed. Touch
“SYNC” again, press the passenger’s side
temperature control button or operate the
passenger’s side temperature control bar
to cancel the SYNC mode. When the
SYNC mode is off, the SYNC mode
indicator will no longer be displayed. In
this case, temperature control on the
driver’s side and passenger’s side will be
separated. The temperature will be con-
trolled individually using the driver’s and
passenger’s temperature control button
and the driver’s and passenger’s tempera-
ture control bar.
& Fan Speed Control
s04aj03
Select the preferred fan speed by touching
or on the climate control screen.
& Air Conditioner Control
s04aj04
The air conditioner operates only when the
hybrid system is running.
Perform the following operation while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner.
. If “A/C” is displayed on the customiz-
able icon, touch “A/C”. When the air
conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator
illuminates. And A/C icon will be dis-
played on the climate control mode
indicator.
. If a customizable icon other than “A/C”
is displayed, touch the climate control
mode indicator. Then touch “A/C” on
the climate control mode select icon.
When the air conditioner is on, “A/C”
indicator illuminates. And A/C icon will
be displayed on the climate control
mode indicator.
To turn off the air conditioner, touch “A/C”
again. The indicator light will turn off or it
will be grayed out.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approxi-
mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner
and dehumidification system may not
work properly.
& Air Inlet Selection
s04aj05
Select the air inlet by touching the air inlet
selection icon.
Recirculation mode:
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehi-
cle. This mode is used for the following
cases.
. When driving on a dusty road
. When you want cooling performance to
increase (for example, in particularly
hot weather)
Perform the following operation to select
this mode.
.
is displayed on the customizable
icon:
(1) Touch
.
.
is not displayed on the customiz-
able icon:
(1) Touch the climate control mode
indicator.
(2) Touch
on the climate control
mode select icon.
will be displayed on the climate
control mode indicator.
Outside air circulation mode:
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment. This mode is used for the
following cases.
Manual Climate Control
264
(267,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When the road is no longer dusty
. When the interior has cooled to a
comfortable temperature
Perform the same operation as the recir-
culation mode to change the mode.
will be displayed on the climate control
mode indicator.
WARNING
Continued operation in the recircu-
lation mode may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the outside air
circulation mode as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
NOTE
When outside air circulation is se-
lected, the system may automatically
adjust the air inlet setting depending on
such factors as the temperature
setting, the temperature inside the
vehicle, or conditions outside the ve-
hicle.
& To Turn Off the Climate Con-
trol System
s04aj07
To turn off the climate control system,
touch the climate control ON/OFF icon.
4-5. Defrosting
s04ah
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows, perform the
following procedures.
. To select the “
” mode, press the
defroster button.
. To select the “
” mode, touch “ ” on
the airflow mode selection screen.
Defroster button
NOTE
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner oper-
ates automatically regardless of the
position of the air conditioner icon to
defrost the windshield more quickly.
However, the indicator on the air
conditioner icon may not illuminate.
At the same time, the air inlet selec-
tion is automatically set to the out-
side air circulation mode.
. After defrosting the windshield by
pressing the defroster button “
”,
pressing the button again returns
the system to the setting that had
been selected before the defroster
was activated.
Defrosting
265
4
Climate Control
(268,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
4-6. Operating Tips for Heater
and Air Conditioner
s04ad
& Cleaning Ventilator Grille
s04ad01
1 Front ventilator inlet grille
2 Condenser
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient Cooling after Park-
ing in Direct Sunlight
s04ad02
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of the
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-
ciency.
& Checking Air Conditioning
System before Summer Sea-
son
s04ad04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and Dehumidifying in
High Humidity and Low Tem-
perature Weather Condition
s04ad05
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air Conditioner Compressor
Shut-Off When Hybrid Sys-
tem Is Heavily Loaded
s04ad06
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for Your Climate
Control System
s04ad07
1 Air conditioner label
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).
Before adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant, check the air conditioner label
Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner
266
(269,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
in the location shown in the illustration to
confirm which type of refrigerant is used in
your vehicle.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.
Repairs needed as a result of using the
wrong refrigerant are not covered under
warranty.
4-7. Air Filtration System
s04ae
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the cabin air filter according to
the replacement schedule found in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This
schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Have
your filter checked or replaced by your
SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing the Cabin Air Filter
s04ae01
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
– CONTINUED –
Air Filtration System
267
4
Climate Control
(270,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Stoppers
(3) Push both sides of the glove box
inward to unlock the stoppers and
then pull down the glove box as far
as it will go.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally
and remove the hinge portion.
When doing this, be careful not to
damage the hinge.
2. Remove the cabin air filter according to
the following procedure in order to
prevent dust on the air cleaner from
falling to the inside of its housing.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the
filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter
and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.
Air Filtration System
268
(271,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new
one and then reinstall the cover.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
Air Filtration System
269
4
Climate Control
(272,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(274,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
5-1. Antenna
s05aa
& Roof Antenna
s05aa03
The satellite radio antenna and telematics
antenna (if equipped) are installed in the
center of the roof at the rear.
5-2. Audio Set
s05ac
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine
SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.
Antenna
272
(275,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s06
6-1. Interior Light ................................................... 274
Map Lights .........................................................274
Dome Light.........................................................274
Cargo Area Light ................................................ 275
OFF Delay Timer.................................................275
6-2. Sun Visors....................................................... 275
Sun Visor Extension Plate................................... 276
Vanity Mirror with Light.......................................276
6-3. Storage Compartment .................................... 277
Glove Box .......................................................... 277
Center Tray......................................................... 277
Center Console................................................... 278
Center Console Tray ...........................................278
6-4. Cup Holder ...................................................... 278
Front Passenger’s Cup Holder ............................ 278
Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder .............................279
6-5. Bottle Holders ................................................. 279
6-6. Accessory Power Outlets ...............................280
6-7. USB Power Supply ..........................................281
How to Use the USB Power Supply .................... 282
6-8. Wireless Charger.............................................282
How to Use the Wireless Charger ....................... 283
Certification for the Wireless Charger ................. 287
6-9. Ashtray (Dealer Option) ..................................288
6-10. Assist Grip .....................................................289
6-11. Coat Hook ......................................................290
6-12. Floor Mat ........................................................290
6-13. Shopping Bag Hook ......................................291
6-14. Cargo Area Cover..........................................292
Using the Cover ................................................. 292
To Remove the Cover Housing ........................... 292
Stowage of the Cargo Area Cover....................... 293
To Install the Cover Housing .............................. 294
6-15. Cargo Tie-Down Hooks .................................294
Interior Equipment
6
Interior Equipment
(276,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
6-1. Interior Light
s06aa
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the lights are turned off to
avoid 12 V battery discharge.
& Map Lights
s06aa06
! Map light switches
s06aa0606
To turn on the map light, press the lens.
To turn it off, press the lens again.
CAUTION
Do not keep watching the light
source because they use bulbs.
Doing so could damage your eyes.
! Door interlock switch
s06aa0602
1 Door interlock switch
The door interlock switch has the following
positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. However, the lights can be turned
on manually by pressing the map light
lens.
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-
matically when any of the doors (other than
the rear gate) is opened even while the
map light is off. Several seconds after all
the doors (other than the rear gate) are
closed, the map lights gradually turn off.
For details, refer to “OFF Delay Timer”
�P275.
& Dome Light
s06aa01
1 ON
2 DOOR
3 OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
opened.
. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked
using the keyless access function.
Refer to “Locking and Unlocking with
“Keyless Access” Entry Function”
Interior Light
274
(277,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
�P129.
. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked
using the remote keyless entry system.
Refer to “Remote Keyless Entry Sys-
tem” �P141.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “OFF” position.
& Cargo Area Light
s06aa02
1 DOOR
2 OFF
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
& OFF Delay Timer
s06aa07
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. Dome light
. Map lights
. Cargo area light
When the door interlock switch is set to the
“DOOR” position, the light will automati-
cally turn on and off depending on the
locking and unlocking of the doors, the
opening and closing of the doors, as well
as the position of the ignition switch.
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in
which the lights remain on (OFF delay
timer) can be changed by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to “Car settings” �P214. Also, the
setting of the lights remain on (OFF
delay timer) can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
6-2. Sun Visors
s06ac
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
– CONTINUED –
Sun Visors
275
6
Interior Equipment
(278,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Sun Visor Extension Plate
s06ac01
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you can use the sun visor exten-
sion plate to prevent glare through the gap
between the sun visor and center pillar. To
use the extension plate, pull it toward the
rear of the vehicle. When you have
finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not pull out the extension plate
with the sun visor positioned over
the windshield. The extension plate
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity Mirror with Light
s06ac02
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the hybrid system
is not running can cause 12 V battery
discharge.
Sun Visors
276
(279,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
6-3. Storage Compartment
s06ad
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store the following items
in the storage compartment.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire or
accident.
– Spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive li-
quids or any other dangerous
items.
– Plastic or other heat-vulner-
able or flammable articles
such as a lighter.
& Glove Box
s06ad01
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
NOTE
When the instrument panel illumination
is on, the light that illuminates the glove
box is on. Refer to “Headlights” �P227.
& Center Tray
s06ad13
The center tray is located below the center
of the instrument panel.
WARNING
When the wireless charger is turned
on, do not place coins, keys, clips, or
other metal objects on the center
tray. For details, refer to “Wireless
Charger” �P282.
CAUTION
Do not use the center tray to hold
objects that could roll out of the tray.
. You may get injured if objects are
thrown out of the tray while the
– CONTINUED –
Storage Compartment
277
6
Interior Equipment
(280,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
vehicle is in motion.
NOTE
When the instrument panel illumination
is on, the light that illuminates the
center tray is on. Refer to “Headlights”
�P227.
& Center Console
s06ad02
The center console box provides a storage
space.
To open the lid, pull up the lock release
lever.
& Center Console Tray
s06ad18
The center console tray is located on the
front side of the center console.
6-4. Cup Holder
s06ae
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front Passenger’s Cup
Holder
s06ae01
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an acci-
dent.
. Take care not to spill a beverage
on the select lever or any
switch(es) in the adjacent area. If
the beverage is spilled, it may
cause a malfunction of the select
lever and/or switch(es).
Cup Holder
278
(281,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Spacer
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
Place a spacer in it before putting in a
small cup or can.
& Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder
s06ae02
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage is
in the cup holder, do not fold down
or recline any seat. Otherwise, the
beverage could spill while driving
and, if the beverage is hot, it could
burn you and/or your passengers.
6-5. Bottle Holders
s06av
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door
– CONTINUED –
Bottle Holders
279
6
Interior Equipment
(282,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
6-6. Accessory Power Out-
lets
s06af
Power outlet
An accessory power outlet is provided in
the center console. Electrical power (12 V
DC) from the 12 V battery is available at
any of the outlets when the ignition switch
is in either the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
ance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120 W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not ex-
ceed 120 W.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12 V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120 W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120 W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
Accessory Power Outlets
280
(283,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the hybrid
system is not running can cause
12 V battery discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord on
your electrical appliance will not
interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator
and brake pedals. If they do, do
not use the electrical appliance
while driving.
6-7. USB Power Supply
s06ay
CAUTION
. The specification of a USB term-
inal that can be used is the Type-
A and Type-C. If a different spe-
cification of terminal is con-
nected, power supply or charging
may not be possible, or the
device may malfunction.
. There is a risk that a connected
device may malfunction or data
may be damaged. The connec-
tion of a device shall be per-
formed at your responsibility.
. To avoid an electric shock or a
malfunction, observe the follow-
ing precautions.
– Do not connect a USB hub.
– Do not insert any metal or
other foreign object into the
USB terminal.
– Do not spill water or other
liquid on the USB terminal.
. Be careful not to pull the con-
nected cable. Doing so could
break the USB terminal and the
connected device.
. If a device is connected for a long
time when the hybrid system is
not running, doing so may cause
the risk of a discharged 12 V
battery. Even when the hybrid
system is running, we recom-
mend that you do not connect a
device for an unnecessarily long
time.
. Do not connect a malfunctioning
device. Doing so may cause the
risk of smoke and fire.
NOTE
. The rated voltage of each USB
terminal is 5 V. For details about
the maximum rated power, refer to
“How to Use the USB Power Supply”
�P282. Before connecting a device,
be sure to read the instruction
manual of the device and check
whether or not this specification of
the output is supported by the
device. If a device that requires
power exceeding the maximum rat-
ing is connected, power supply or
charging may not be possible. Even
if charging could be completed, the
time required for charging may be
longer than when the genuine char-
ger for that device is used.
– CONTINUED –
USB Power Supply
281
6
Interior Equipment
(284,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Depending on the device, charging
may be possible only when a special
cable is used. In this case, be sure to
connect the device using the special
cable.
. When a device that communicates
with a PC is connected, power
supply or charging may not be
possible.
. When connect a device for charging,
disconnect the device promptly after
charging is completed.
& How to Use the USB Power
Supply
s06ay01
Type-A and Type-C
– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*
– USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*
*: The available electrical power of the two USB
terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.
Console USB power supply (charge only)
(if equipped)
– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*
– USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*
*: The available electrical power of the two USB
terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.
Use the USB terminal to use or charge an
electronic device.
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the power can be supplied
to the electronic device.
6-8. Wireless Charger
s06bh
Wireless charger
To charge a cell phone, smartphone or a
similar mobile device compatible with the
Qi wireless charging standard, place the
device in the charging area located below
the center information display.
The “Qi” logo is a trademark of the
Wireless Power Consortium.
Wireless Charger
282
(285,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Indicator light
2 Power switch
3 Charging area
NOTE
Mobile devices and wireless chargers
contain coils for charging. These coils
allow the wireless charging system to
charge a mobile device with a high level
of charging efficiency. When your de-
vice is in the charging area, the wireless
charger detects it and aligns an inte-
grated moving coil with the coil in your
device for charging. If vehicle vibration
causes the two coils to become mis-
aligned while the vehicle is in motion,
the moving coil of the wireless charger
automatically repositions itself and
resumes charging.
However, if the mobile device moves
out of the charging area, charging will
automatically stop.
& How to Use the Wireless
Charger
s06bh01
1. The wireless charger operate when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
2. Press the power switch once to turn on
the wireless charger. When the wire-
less charger is ON, the indicator light
illuminates in green.
3. Place the mobile device so that the
screen or keypad is facing up (the
charging surface is facing downward).
The center of the device must also be
aligned with the center of the charging
area. The indicator light illuminates in
orange during charging.
4. The indicator light illuminates in green
when charging is complete.
NOTE
. If the indicator light does not illumi-
nate in orange and device charging
does not occur, move the device to
the center of the charging area.
Depending on the mobile device,
the charging coil may not be in the
center of the device. In such cases,
place the mobile device so that its
– CONTINUED –
Wireless Charger
283
6
Interior Equipment
(286,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
charging coil is in the center of the
charging area.
. The power status of the wireless
charger is stored even when the
ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
! How to use the quick charge
s06bh0101
The following types of mobile devices
support quick charging as opposed to
normal charging (5 W).
. Mobile devices compliant with WPC*
Ver. 1.2.4 and compatible with fast
chargers can be charged up to 10 W.
. iPhone 8 (or later) with an iOS version
compliant with WPC* Ver. 1.2.4 and
compatible with 7.5 W charging.
* WPC: Wireless Power Consortium
1. Press the power switch three times to
change to the quick-charging mode
while your mobile device is charging in
normal mode. The indicator light will
change from orange to alternating
green and orange when the wireless
charger switches to the quick-charging
mode.
2. When charging is complete, the indi-
cator light will turn green, and the quick
charging mode will end. To restart
quick-charging, switch to the quick-
charging mode again.
! To turn off the wireless charger
s06bh0104
Press the power switch once. When the
wireless charger is OFF, the indicator light
turns off.
NOTE
When using the center tray as a storage
compartment, ensure that the indicator
light is off. Refer to “Center Tray”
�P277.
! Indicator light patterns
s06bh0102
Indicator light Interpretation
Off
The wireless charger is
turned off
Green (illumi-
nated)
Standby (ready for char-
ging)*
1
Charging is complete*
2
Orange (illumi-
nated)
A mobile device is in the
charging area (a mobile
device is being detected)
Charging
Green and or-
ange illuminate
alternately
Quick charging is in pro-
gress
*1: No power is output for charging when the
wireless charger is in standby mode. Even if
metal objects are placed on the charging tray
in this state, they will not overheat.
*2: For some mobile devices, the indicator light
remains orange even after charging is
complete.
Wireless Charger
284
(287,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! List of warnings
s06bh0103
Indicator light Possible causes Solution
Flashes orange
once per second
A communication error occurred be-
tween the wireless charger and the
access key fob.
If the hybrid system is running, stop
the hybrid system and restart it.
If the ignition switch is in “ACC”, start
the hybrid system once.
Repeatedly
flashes orange
three times
Metallic foreign object detected.
A foreign object is detected between
the mobile device and the charging
area.
Remove any foreign objects between
the mobile device and the charging
area.
The wireless charger detected insuffi-
cient charging performance because
the charging coils of the mobile device
and wireless charging coils are far
apart.
Remove the mobile device from the
charging area, check that the activa-
tion indicator light is illuminating in
green again, and place the device in
the center of the charging area. If there
is a case or cover on your mobile
device, be sure to remove it.
Repeatedly
flashes orange
four times
The temperature inside the wireless
charger has increased.
Remove the mobile device from the
charging area temporarily to stop
charging. When the temperature of the
mobile device cools down, start char-
ging the device again.
WARNING
. Do not apply hair spray or insec-
ticide to the wireless charger or
wipe it using flammable sub-
stances such as oils, alcohol,
benzine, or paint thinner. Doing
so may cause a vehicle fire.
. For safety reasons, drivers must
not operate a charging mobile
device while driving.
. Do not charge small devices such
as cordless headphones or light-
weight cell phones while driving.
Due to their light weight, these
devices may be thrown from the
charging tray resulting in an
accident.
. The wireless power receiver can
affect some implanted or other
electrical medical devices. If you
use a cardiac pacemaker, ventri-
cular pacing pulse generator,
cardioverter-defibrillator, or a si-
milar device, consult with your
physician before using the wire-
less charger.
– CONTINUED –
Wireless Charger
285
6
Interior Equipment
(288,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
CAUTION
. Before charging your device,
make sure that there is no metal
between the charging area and
the mobile device. Metal objects
may generate heat and cause
burns when placed in the char-
ging area.
. Do not apply strong force or
impact to the charging area.
. Do not affix aluminum stickers to
or place other metal objects in
the charging area. Also, do not
charge a mobile device that has
aluminum stickers or other metal
objects attached to it that may
come in contact with the char-
ging area. Metal objects may
generate heat and cause burns
when placed in the charging area.
. Do not disassemble, modify, or
remove the wireless charger.
. Do not place magnetized objects
in or near the charging area.
. During charging, do not cover
your device with a cloth, etc.
. Do not charge your device in
dusty conditions.
. Make sure that no foreign objects
or liquids are placed or spilled in
the wireless charger.
. Do not place the access key fob
near the wireless charger.
. When your device is charging,
keep any magnetic cards such as
credit cards and precision de-
vices such as watches away from
the charging area. They may be
damaged.
. Do not leave objects in the trays
unattended for a long period of
time. The paint on the trays may
deteriorate depending on the
type of device case or accessory.
. When the OS version of a mobile
device is updated, the charging
specifications may change sig-
nificantly. Also, if the OS versions
compatible with WPC change, the
quick charging function may be-
come unavailable. For details,
check the website of your mobile
device manufacturer.
. To prevent discharging the 12 V
battery, do not use the wireless
charger for long periods of time
when the hybrid system is
stopped.
NOTE
. This function is not available for
devices larger than the charger tray.
. The wireless charger and mobile
device will emit heat during char-
ging, but this is not a malfunction.
. When your mobile device emits heat
during charging, the mobile device’s
protective function may cancel char-
ging.
. The fan may activate when the
temperature rises, but this is not a
malfunction.
. Qi standard wireless charger can be
used on compatible devices.
However, not all Qi standard devices
and compatibility are guaranteed.
. If you hear noise on the AM radio
while your device is charging, you
may be able to reduce the noise by
changing the charging frequency. To
change the charging frequency,
press and hold the power switch to
turn on the system. After a certain
amount of time, the indicator light
will flash orange twice to indicate
when the frequency changes.
. If the access key fob cannot be
detected in the cabin, the battery
cannot be charged. In addition, char-
ging may be temporarily suspended
when the remote keyless entry sys-
Wireless Charger
286
(289,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
tem is in operation, such as when
opening and closing doors.
. In the following cases, the wireless
charger will not operate normally:
– You are in an area near a facility
where electronic equipment is
emitting strong radio waves,
such as a power plant, broadcast
station, or TV tower, or an elec-
tronic remote controller is being
used nearby.
– The ambient temperature around
the charging tray is high due to
hot weather.
. If charging stops after a certain
period of time, and the wireless
charger does not operate normally,
it may be due to any of the following
reasons:
– The mobile device is protruding
from the charging area.
– The mobile device is equipped
with a large protruding camera.
– A thick object such as a case,
cover, or accessory is between
the charging surface of the por-
table device and the charging
area.
– Two or more mobile devices are
placed on the charging tray at the
same time.
& Certification for the Wireless
Charger
s06bh02
. The U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries
FCC ID: ACJ932AF2201
CAUTION
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
wireless power charger, pursuant to
part 18 of the FCC Rules.
This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harm-
ful interference to radio communica-
tions, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
– Increase the separation between
the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is
connected.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth
for an uncontrolled environment
and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines. This
equipment should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at
least 20 cm or more away from
person’s body.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 and
part 18 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
– CONTINUED –
Wireless Charger
287
6
Interior Equipment
(290,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
undesired operation.
. Canada-spec. models
6-9. Ashtray (Dealer Option)
s06ag
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This could
cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
Ashtray (Dealer Option)
288
(291,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
Holder” �P278. For the locations of the
bottle holders, refer to “Bottle Holders”
�P279.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
6-10. Assist Grip
s06bd
1 Assist grip
The assist grip is to be held to support the
body of the passengers when they are in
the seat and the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
Do not hold the assist grip when
getting up from the seat. Holding
and pulling the assist grip in the
wrong way could break the grip and
possibly cause injury.
CAUTION
Do not attach heavy objects to the
assist grip. Doing so could break it
and damage the object.
Assist Grip
289
6
Interior Equipment
(292,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
6-11. Coat Hook
s06ah
WARNING
Obey the following instructions.
. Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on
the coat hooks. Hang clothing
directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
. Before hanging clothing on the
coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pock-
ets.
If these instructions are ignored, the
following may occur in sudden
stops or in a collision.
. Serious injuries by the items
thrown through the cabin.
. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-
ployment.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passenger’s assist grip.
6-12. Floor Mat
s06aj
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct loca-
tions.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
Coat Hook
290
(293,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
1. Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into
the floor mat eyelets.
A: Align the triangle marks ( ) when
installing the floor mats.
2. Turn the upper knob of each retaining
hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in
place.
6-13. Shopping Bag Hook
s06ai
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
Shopping Bag Hook
291
6
Interior Equipment
(294,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
6-14. Cargo Area Cover
s06ak
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the Cover
s06ak01
To extend the cover, pull the cargo area
cover using the center hole, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and re-
winding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause
leakage of gas from the stays, which
may result in their inability to hold
the rear gate open.
& To Remove the Cover Hous-
ing
s06ak02
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Push the cover housing to the right
side and shorten it.
3. Take it off the retainer.
Cargo Area Cover
292
(295,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Stowage of the Cargo Area
Cover
s06ak04
The cargo area cover can be stowed under
the cargo floor as follows.
1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo
floor board.
2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area end.
3. Put the cargo floor board back.
NOTE
The rear end of the cargo floor board
becomes tilted when storing the cargo
area cover. In that case, do not place
luggage or other items on the cargo
floor board, as it may damage the cargo
area cover or cause the objects to fall
over when the vehicle is driven.
– CONTINUED –
Cargo Area Cover
293
6
Interior Equipment
(296,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& To Install the Cover Housing
s06ak05
The right end of the cargo area cover is a
sliding structure.
1. Insert the right end of the cover into the
recessed portion with the arrow mark
facing upward.
2. Hold the cover housing securely and
insert the left end of the cover into the
recessed portion.
6-15. Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
s06am
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn
them down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that ex-
ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The
maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10
kg) per hook.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
294
(297,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s07
7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 297
Fuel Requirements.............................................. 297
Fuel Filler Door and Cap .....................................298
7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ............... 302
7-3. Preparing to Drive .......................................... 303
7-4. Starting and Stopping Hybrid System .......... 304
General Precautions When Starting/Stopping
Hybrid System..................................................304
Safety Precautions.............................................. 305
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 305
Starting Hybrid System ....................................... 305
Automatic Vehicle Shut Down Function............... 307
Stopping Hybrid System ..................................... 307
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly ........................................................... 308
Steering Lock .....................................................308
7-5. Remote Engine Start System
(Dealer Option) .............................................. 309
Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) ............ 309
Alternate Operation Method for Models with
“Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System” ........................................................... 313
Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via
Remote Start .................................................... 313
Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine
Start Shutdown................................................. 314
Heating or Cooling the Interior of the Vehicle ...... 314
Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine
Starter Transceiver) .......................................... 314
System Maintenance........................................... 314
Certification for Remote Engine Starter ...............316
7-6. Continuously Variable Transmission .............316
Continuously Variable Transmission Features..... 317
Select Lever....................................................... 317
Shift Lock Function............................................ 319
Selection of Manual Mode .................................. 321
Driving Tips ....................................................... 322
7-7. SI-DRIVE...........................................................323
Intelligent (I) Mode ............................................. 323
Sport (S) Mode ................................................... 323
SI-DRIVE Switch................................................. 323
7-8. Power Steering ................................................324
7-9. Braking .............................................................325
Braking Tips ...................................................... 325
Brake System..................................................... 325
Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators............ 326
7-10. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ....................327
ABS Self-Check.................................................. 327
ABS Warning Light............................................. 327
7-11. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
System ...........................................................328
EBD System Malfunctions .................................. 328
7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Control System...............329
Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor.......... 330
To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control
System ............................................................ 330
7-13. X-MODE ..........................................................331
To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE .......................... 332
Hill Descent Control Function............................. 333
7-14. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(U.S.-Spec. Models).......................................334
Starting and Operating
7
Starting and Operating
(298,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Certification for Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................335
TPMS Screen...................................................... 335
7-15. Parking Your Vehicle .................................... 336
Electronic Parking Brake .................................... 336
Parking Tips ....................................................... 341
7-16. Hill Start Assist System ............................... 342
7-17. Surround View Monitor (If Equipped) ......... 344
How to Change the Display of Surround View
Monitor.............................................................344
How to Cancel Surround View Monitor ................ 347
How to View the Camera Images .........................347
Range of Surround View Monitor ........................ 350
Using the Camera ............................................... 350
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)........................... 351
7-18. Rear View Camera (Models without
Surround View Monitor) ............................... 352
How to Use the Rear View Camera......................353
Viewing Range on the Screen ............................. 353
Help Lines ..........................................................355
7-19. BSD/RCTA ..................................................... 357
System Features................................................. 357
System Operation ............................................... 359
BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning
Buzzer.............................................................. 361
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator .................................... 363
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator.............................. 363
To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA ............................ 364
Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 364
Handling of Radar Sensors................................. 365
7-20. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
System (If Equipped) ....................................366
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
Overview.......................................................... 367
Operating Conditions ......................................... 369
Sonar Audible Alarm Function............................ 372
Automatic Braking Function Operation ............... 374
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Operation .................................. 376
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
ON/OFF Setting ................................................ 376
RAB Warning Indicator....................................... 377
Handling of the Sonar Sensors........................... 377
7-21. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped) ......378
User Recognition Function ................................. 382
Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning .................... 384
Driver Monitoring System Indicator/Warning ....... 385
Using the Driver Monitoring System ................... 386
Registering and Deleting a User ......................... 387
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF Settings ........ 388
How to Get the Source Code That Uses Open
Source Software............................................... 388
Starting and Operating
(299,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-1. Fuel
s07aa
CAUTION
. Use of a fuel which is low in
quality or use of an inappropriate
fuel additive may cause damage
to the engine and/or fuel system.
. Some gas stations, particularly
those in high altitude areas, offer
fuels posted as regular octane
gasoline with an octane rating
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of
those fuels are not recom-
mended.
& Fuel Requirements
s07aa01
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
s07aa0103
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating
can cause persistent and heavy knocking,
which can damage the engine. Do not be
concerned if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate. Contact your
SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the
specified octane rating and your vehicle
knocks heavily or persistently.
! RON
s07aa010301
This octane rating is the Research Octane
Number.
! AKI
s07aa010302
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane num-
bers and is commonly referred to as the
Anti Knock Index (AKI).
! Unleaded gasoline
s07aa0104
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Reformulated gasoline
s07aa0128
SUBARU supports the use of reformulated
gasoline when available. Reformulated
gasoline has been blended to burn more
cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.
! MMT
s07aa0106
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-
pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
s07aa0107
Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
ditives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
vehicle, but should contain no more than
15% ethanol for the proper operation of
your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 15% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are
only some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol).
– CONTINUED –
Fuel
297
7
Starting and Operating
(300,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op-
erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that speci-
fied in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gaso-
line. Methanol can be used in your
vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5%
of the fuel mixture AND if it is accom-
panied by sufficient quantities of the
proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-
tors required to prevent damage to the
fuel system. Do not use fuel containing
methanol EXCEPT under these condi-
tions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may
be fuel related, try a different brand of
gasoline before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
! TOP TIER
TM
fuel
s07aa0131
SUBARU recommends the use of TOP
TIER
TM
Approved Gasoline. For more
information on TOP TIER
TM
Approved
Gasoline and a list of marketers, see the
official website www.toptiergas.com.
& Fuel Filler Door and Cap
s07aa02
! Locations of the fuel filler door and
the door release switch
s07aa0202
Fuel filler door
Fuel door release switch
Fuel
298
(301,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Refueling
s07aa0201
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Before refueling, stop the vehicle, then
turn off the ignition switch to turn off all
the electrical components.
2. To open the fuel filler door, push the
fuel door release switch on the instru-
ment panel.
When the switch is pressed, a message is
displayed on the combination meter.
NOTE
. The fuel filler door opens several
seconds or up to approximately 10
seconds after the switch was
pressed.
. In the following circumstances, the
fuel filler door cannot be opened
even when the switch is pressed.
– While the vehicle is driving
– When the select lever is not in the
“P” position.
– When there is a malfunction in
the fuel system
. If there is a malfunction in the fuel
system or other systems, and the
fuel filler door cannot be opened,
refer to “If the fuel filler door cannot
be opened” �P301.
. If one of the following occurs when
the Hybrid READY indicator light
illuminates, “Unable to refuel” will
be shown on the combination meter
and refueling will not be possible.
– Vehicle speed is 1 mph (2 km/h)
or more.
– Select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
If the error message does not turn
off, consult a SUBARU dealer.
. Complete fueling within 30 minutes
after pressing the fuel door release
switch. When 30 minutes have
passed, the vehicle auto stop func-
tion activates and fuel cannot be
added to the tank. If this occurs,
press the fuel door release switch
again.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any sta-
tic electricity that may be present on
your body. If your body is carrying
an electrostatic charge, there is a
possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1 Open
2 Close
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position first and then
close all vehicle doors and win-
– CONTINUED –
Fuel
299
7
Starting and Operating
(302,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
dows. Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames or
electrical sparks in the adjacent
area. Only handle fuel outdoors.
Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the left.
Do not remove the cap quickly.
Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck,
especially in hot weather. If you
hear a hissing sound while you
are removing the cap, wait for the
sound to stop and then slowly
open the cap to prevent fuel from
spraying out and creating a fire
hazard.
4. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler door.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add
any more fuel.
6. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-
wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be
certain not to catch the tether under the
cap while tightening.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
7. Close the fuel filler door completely.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel
may damage the paint, be sure to
wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
is not covered under the SUBARU
Limited Warranty.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel
filler door is located on the right side
of the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to
“CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/
Malfunction Indicator Light” �P171.
Fuel
300
(303,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. If the fuel filler door is not securely
closed, a message is displayed on
the combination meter and the
CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light may illumi-
nate. Refer to “CHECK ENGINE
Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator
Light” �P171.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could oc-
cur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting and your fuel tank
and emission control system
may be damaged. It could also
lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine.
Continuing to operate your vehi-
cle at an extremely low fuel level
may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
! If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened
s07aa0203
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened due
to a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be
opened from the cargo area.
1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch. Remove the access cover at
the right-side of the cargo area trim
using a flat-head screwdriver.
– CONTINUED –
Fuel
301
7
Starting and Operating
(304,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Clip
2. Remove the clip from the trim.
3. Pull the clip to unlock the fuel filler door.
7-2. State Emission Testing
(U.S. Only)
s07ab
WARNING
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
when testing an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) model.
Testing of an AWD model must
NEVER be performed on a single
two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-
ing to do so will result in uncon-
trolled vehicle movement and may
cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspection
of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/
malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with
an electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)
302
(305,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
function indicator light is observed,
there are no stored diagnostic trouble
codes, and the OBDII readiness moni-
tors are all complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/
malfunction indicator light is not prop-
erly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to faulty LED (Light
Emitting Diode)) or there is one or more
diagnostic trouble codes stored in the
vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number
of OBDII system readiness monitors
“NOT READY” is greater than one. If
the vehicle’s battery has been recently
replaced or disconnected, the OBDII
system inspection may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for the emission
test. Under this condition, the vehicle
driver should be instructed to drive his/
her vehicle for a few days to reset the
readiness monitors and return for an
emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer
for service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected in
an attempt to bypass AWD for state
emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
be tested using an AWD dynamometer
with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
7-3. Preparing to Drive
s07ac
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood and rear gate are
fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and
outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seat-
belts.
9. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the hybrid
system.
– CONTINUED –
Preparing to Drive
303
7
Starting and Operating
(306,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cool-
ing fan and drive belt may result in a
malfunction. Check that no small
animal enters the engine compart-
ment and under the vehicle before
starting the hybrid system.
NOTE
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
fluid, washer fluid and other fluid
levels should be checked daily,
weekly or at fuel stops.
. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-
ler Hitch (Dealer Option)” �P406.
7-4. Starting and Stopping
Hybrid System
s07be
& General Precautions When
Starting/Stopping Hybrid
System
s07be08
WARNING
. When starting the hybrid system,
the driver must be in the driver’s
seat and must not depress the
accelerator pedal. Failure to fol-
low these instructions can result
in accidents, serious injury or
even death.
. Do not leave the hybrid system
running in locations with poor
ventilation, such as a garage and
indoors. The exhaust gas may
enter the vehicle or indoors, and
it may result in carbon monoxide
poisoning.
. Do not start the hybrid system
near dry foliage, paper, or other
flammable substances. The ex-
haust pipe and exhaust emis-
sions can create a fire hazard at
high temperatures.
CAUTION
If the hybrid system is stopped
during driving, the catalyst may
overheat and burn.
NOTE
. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration
immediately after the hybrid system
has started.
. After the engine starts, the engine
speed will be kept high.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel used and the driving condition
(repeated short trips when the en-
gine is not warmed up sufficiently).
In such a case, it is recommended to
switch to a different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knock-
ing may be heard from the engine
when the accelerator is operated
rapidly such as a rapid start-up and
a rapid acceleration. This is not a
malfunction.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
hybrid READY indicator light is
flashing.
. The hybrid system may not start
immediately after the terminal of
the 12 V battery has been recon-
Starting and Stopping Hybrid System
304
(307,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
nected when replacing the 12 V
battery, etc. Turn on the ignition
switch, wait at least 10 seconds,
and then start the hybrid system.
. The remaining power of the high
voltage battery may decrease when
the hybrid system has been stopped
for a long time in a state where it is
sufficiently charged. However, this
is a result of the high voltage battery
self-discharge and is not a malfunc-
tion.
& Safety Precautions
s07be06
Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P126.
& Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System
s07be01
Refer to “Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System” �P160.
& Starting Hybrid System
s07be03
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the hybrid
system. Carefully read the pre-
cautions described in “General
Precautions When Starting/Stop-
ping Hybrid System” �P304.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch flashes in
green after the hybrid system
has started, never drive the vehi-
cle. The steering is still locked,
and it may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be a
malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch is flashing in
green after the hybrid system has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. While moving the
steering wheel right and left,
depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pressing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
hybrid system does not start,
stop pressing the push-button
ignition switch. Instead, press
the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake
pedal to switch the power status
to “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and
then press the push-button igni-
tion switch to start the hybrid
system.
NOTE
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
the brake pedal, the hybrid system
can be started regardless of the
status of the push-button ignition
switch.
. If the security indicator light illumi-
nates when you attempt to start the
hybrid system but the hybrid system
does not start, press the push-
button ignition switch to switch the
power to “OFF” and then try to start
the hybrid system again.
. If the hybrid system does not start,
press the push-button ignition
switch without depressing the brake
pedal to switch the power to “OFF”.
Then, while depressing the brake
pedal more forcefully, press the
push-button ignition switch.
. The engine start procedures may not
function depending on the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and Stopping Hybrid System
305
7
Starting and Operating
(308,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
In such a case, refer to “Starting
Hybrid System” �P441.
. If the 12 V battery is discharged, the
steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the 12 V battery.
1 Operation indicator
2 Push-button ignition switch
The starting procedure for the hybrid
system is as follows.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”
position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
6. Depress and hold the brake pedal until
the hybrid system starts. The hybrid
READY indicator light flashes then
illuminates when the hybrid system
starts to activate.
NOTE
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton, the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch will not turn green
even when the select lever is in the
“P” position.
. In case the hybrid system does not
start by the normal hybrid system
start procedure, move the select
lever to the “P” position, and switch
the power to “ACC”. Depress the
brake pedal, and press the push-
button ignition switch for at least 15
seconds. The hybrid system may
start. Only use this hybrid system
start procedure in case of emer-
gency.
. When the hybrid system does not
start, the brake pedal may feel stiff.
In such a case, depress the brake
pedal more forcefully than usual.
Check that the operation indicator
on the push-button ignition switch
turns green, and press the push-
button ignition switch to start the
hybrid system.
. When starting the hybrid system, the
flashing time of the Hybrid READY
indicator light may be long. Leave
the vehicle as it is until the Hybrid
READY indicator light is steady on,
as steady means the vehicle is able
to move.
. In the event that the Hybrid READY
indicator light does not come on
even after performing the proper
procedures for starting the vehicle,
contact your SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
. When the high voltage battery is
extremely cold (below approxi-
mately −228F (−308C)) under the
influence of the outside tempera-
ture, it may not be possible to start
the hybrid system. At this time, when
you press the push-button ignition
switch, the Hybrid READY indicator
light will flash for about 10 seconds.
In this case, try to start the hybrid
system again after the temperature
of the high voltage battery increases
due to the outside temperature in-
crease etc.
Starting and Stopping Hybrid System
306
(309,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Automatic Vehicle Shut Down
Function
s07be10
WARNING
If the hybrid system stops automa-
tically while the Automatic Vehicle
Shut Down function is activated, the
ignition switch will turn to the “OFF”
position and the climate control
system will stop operating. There-
fore, do not leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
either. On hot, sunny days, tempera-
tures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal in-
juries to people or animals.
This vehicle has a function to automatically
stop the hybrid system if it is left in the
following state for about 30 minutes while
the hybrid system is running.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. The vehicle is stopped.
If the hybrid system stops automatically,
the ignition switch turns to the “OFF”
position.
! How to reset the timer of the Auto-
matic Vehicle Shut Down function
s07be1001
If you want to continue running the hybrid
system, you can reset the timer of the
Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function by
doing any of the following operations.
. Touch “OK” according to the message
displayed in the center information
display before the hybrid system is
automatically stopped.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Shift the select lever into a position
other than the “P” position.
If you reset the Automatic Vehicle Shut
Down function, it will reactivate after
approximately 30 minutes have passed.
! How to deactivate the Automatic
Vehicle Shut Down function
s07be1002
The Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function
can be temporarily disabled using the
center information display settings. For
details, refer to “Car settings” �P214.
If you disable the Automatic Vehicle Shut
Down function, it will not work and the
hybrid system will continue to run.
The Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function
will be enabled the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the “OFF” position and
restart the hybrid system.
& Stopping Hybrid System
s07be04
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The hybrid system will stop, and the
power will be switched off.
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the hybrid system will stop.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and Stopping Hybrid System
307
7
Starting and Operating
(310,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the hybrid system stops,
the brake booster will not func-
tion. A greater foot pressure will
be required on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater force
will be required to steer, and it
may result in an accident.
. If the hybrid system stops during
driving, do not operate the push-
button ignition switch or open
any of the doors until the vehicle
is stopped in a safe location. It is
dangerous because the steering
lock may be activated. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place, and con-
tact a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
CAUTION
. Do not stop the hybrid system
while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” posi-
tion.
. If the hybrid system is stopped
while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” posi-
tion, the power will be in “ACC”. If
the vehicle is left in this condi-
tion, the 12 V battery may be
discharged.
NOTE
. If you press the push-button ignition
switch while driving, the emergency
hybrid system stop interrupt screen
alerts the driver by messages on the
combination meter display and
beeps.
. Although you can stop the hybrid
system by operating the push-but-
ton ignition switch, do not stop the
hybrid system during driving except
in an emergency.
& When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
s07be05
Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P440.
& Steering Lock
s07be07
After stopping the hybrid system and any
door is opened, the steering wheel will be
locked due to the steering lock function.
When the hybrid system is restarted, the
steering lock will be automatically re-
leased.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
s07be0701
1 Operation indicator
2 Push-button ignition switch
Starting and Stopping Hybrid System
308
(311,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
When you cannot restart the hybrid system
due to the steering lock, check the status
of operation indicator and perform the
following steps.
! Operation indicator flashing in
green
s07be070101
1. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left
and right.
! Operation indicator flashing in
orange
s07be070102
There may be a malfunction in the steering
lock function. Immediately contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
7-5. Remote Engine Start
System (Dealer Option)
s07az
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the hybrid
system. Carefully read the pre-
cautions described in “General
Precautions When Starting/Stop-
ping Hybrid System” �P304.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an
enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of carbon monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
The remote engine start system allows you
to start the hybrid system from outside the
vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
start system can activate the heater or air
conditioner, providing you with a comfor-
table cabin upon entry. For more details,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the remote engine start system.
NOTE
. The length of time for which it is
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
laws and regulations. Check the
local rules when using the remote
engine start system.
. When taking your vehicle in for
service, it is recommended that you
inform the service personnel that
your vehicle is equipped with a
remote engine start system.
& Remote Engine Starter
Transceiver (Fob)
s07az21
1 Fob button
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
309
7
Starting and Operating
(312,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Starting the hybrid system
s07az2101
NOTE
All vehicle doors and the engine hood
must be closed prior to activating the
remote engine start system. Any open
entry point will prevent starting the
hybrid system.
The remote engine start system is acti-
vated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
operating range of the system and the start
request is received, the following will
occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
The system will check certain safety
preconditions before starting, and if all
conditions are met, the hybrid system will
start within 5 seconds. After the hybrid
system starts, the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
While the hybrid system is running via the
remote engine start system, the following
will occur.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the hybrid system turns over but does not
start (or starts and stalls) the remote
engine start system will power off and then
attempt to start the hybrid system 3
additional times. The system will not
attempt to restart the hybrid system if it
determines a vehicle malfunction is pre-
venting starting. If the hybrid system does
not start after 3 additional attempts, the
remote engine start request will be
aborted.
! Stopping the hybrid system
s07az2102
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the hybrid system. The fob
will flash and beep three times, indicating
the hybrid system has stopped. If the stop
request is not received (for example, if the
user is too far away from the vehicle), the
fob will continue to flash once every 3
seconds. The system will automatically
stop the hybrid system after 15 minutes.
! Remote start safety features
s07az2103
For safety and security reasons, the
remote engine start system will prevent
starting (or stop the hybrid system if
running) and sound the horn twice if any
of the following conditions is detected. In
addition, the fob will flash and beep 3
times.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in a
position other than “OFF”.
. The engine hood is open.
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
rpm.
. The security alarm is triggered.
. The select lever is not in the “P”
position.
If the system detects any door open prior
to activating the remote engine start
system, it will prevent starting the hybrid
system, and sound the horn and flash side
marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights
6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the hybrid
system determines there is a safety risk
due to a vehicle-related problem, the
vehicle will power down and the horn will
sound 3 times.
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
310
(313,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activa-
tion (the security indicator light on
the combination meter is flashing),
the alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run
cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter
activation (the security indicator
light on the combination meter is
not flashing), the alarm system will
remain disarmed throughout the
remote start run cycle.
! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
s07az2104
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate the status of the
system using the following the flash and
beep sequences, provided the fob is within
operational range of the system.
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
311
7
Starting and Operating
(314,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Precondition
Fob indication
Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed
Continuous while button is
held down
— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start hybrid system by pressing
fob button twice within 3 sec
1 flash 1 beep Hybrid system start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Hybrid system started successfully
1 flash every 3 sec — Hybrid system active
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but hybrid system not started
Hybrid system active by remote engine start
operation
1 flash every 3 sec — Hybrid system idling
3 flashes 3 beeps
Hybrid system stopped by system time-out or for
safety reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop hybrid system by pressing
and holding fob button for at least 2 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Hybrid system stopped by user request
1 flash every 3 sec —
Stop request not received. Hybrid system still
active.
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
312
(315,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Alternate Operation Method
for Models with “Keyless Ac-
cess with Push-Button Start
System”
s07az22
Access key fob
1 Lock button
An access key fob can be used as the
remote engine start transmitter. Operate
the lock button to start or stop the hybrid
system as follows.
! Before starting the hybrid system
s07az2201
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the hybrid system, confirm
the following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors are closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position.
! Starting the hybrid system
s07az2202
To start the hybrid system with remote
engine start system, briefly press the lock
button twice within 2 seconds, then press
and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash
once and the buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button
briefly again. The hazard warning
flashers then flash once again, and
the buzzer chirps once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard
warning flashers then flash three
times, and the horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The hybrid
system will then start successfully.
! Stopping the hybrid system
s07az2203
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
hybrid system with remote engine start
system.
! Remote start safety features
s07az2204
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
start safety features” �P310.
& Entering the Vehicle While It
Is Running via Remote Start
s07az24
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function and remote
keyless entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm
system is armed prior to activating the
remote engine start system) and the
hybrid system will turn off. Perform
either of the following procedures to
disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Alarm System” �P147.
– Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
– Press any button on the access
key fob.
2. Enter the vehicle. The hybrid system
will remain running provided the ac-
cess key fob is present and detected
by the vehicle.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
once while depressing the brake pedal
before driving your vehicle. The remote
engine starter transceiver (fob) will
flash and beep 3 times to indicate that
the remote start system has been shut
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
313
7
Starting and Operating
(316,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
down.
& Entering the Vehicle Follow-
ing Remote Engine Start
Shutdown
s07az10
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Heating or Cooling the Inter-
ior of the Vehicle
s07az04
After the system starts the hybrid system,
the heater or air conditioning will activate
and heat or cool the interior to a factory
default temperature setting, with auto-
matic selected for all other settings.
& Remote Transmitter Program
(Remote Engine Starter
Transceiver)
s07az13
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed accord-
ing to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain open throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“OFF”, back to “ON” then “OFF”, back
to “ON” then “OFF”, then back to “ON”
again and leave the ignition “ON”
throughout the programming process.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating
that the system has entered the trans-
mitter learn mode.
5. Press and release the “
” button on
the transmitter that you want to pro-
gram.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that
the system has learned the transmitter.
Upon successful programming, the
remote start confirmation transmitter
button will flash one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept
up to eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“OFF” position, the door is closed or
after 2 minutes.
& System Maintenance
s07az09
NOTE
For remote engine starter transceiver:
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to re-
synchronize.
! Changing the battery
s07az0901
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
314
(317,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Battery should not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
For key fob:
Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing Battery of Access Key Fob”
�P501.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)
supplied in your remote engine start
transmitter should last approximately one
year, depending on usage. When the
battery begins to weaken, you will notice
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
cated on the back side lower left corner
of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small
flat-head screwdriver.
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove
the battery and replace with new one.
Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the
old battery before removing it to ensure
that the new battery is inserted prop-
erly (battery “+” should be pointed
away from the transmitter circuit board
on battery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw
and test the remote engine start
system.
– CONTINUED –
Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
315
7
Starting and Operating
(318,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Certification for Remote En-
gine Starter
s07az23
! U.S.-spec. models
s07az2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
! Canada-spec. models
s07az2302
7-6. Continuously Variable
Transmission
s07bg
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to lurch forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to observe these
precautions could cause damage
to the transmission.
– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-
tion only after the vehicle has
completely stopped.
– Do not shift from the “D”
position into the “R” position
or vice versa until the vehicle
has completely stopped.
. Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set
in a forward driving position or
move the vehicle forward by
inertia with the select lever set
in the “R” position. Doing so may
Continuously Variable Transmission
316
(319,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
result in an unexpected accident
or malfunction.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
& Continuously Variable Trans-
mission Features
s07bg06
The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the transmission will
shift at higher engine speeds than
when the coolant temperature is
sufficiently high in order to shorten
the warm-up time and improve dri-
veability. The gearshift timing will
automatically shift to the normal
timing after the engine has warmed
up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalida-
tion of data which the on-board
computer has collected and stored
in memory to allow the transmission
to shift at the most appropriate times
for the current condition of your
vehicle. Optimized shifting will be
restored as the vehicle continues to
be driven for a while.
. When driving under continuous hea-
vy load conditions such as climbing
a long, steep hill, the engine speed,
vehicle speed and air conditioning
system cooling performance may
automatically be reduced. This is
not a malfunction. This phenomenon
results from the engine control func-
tion maintaining the cooling perfor-
mance of the vehicle. The engine
and vehicle speed will return to a
normal speed when the engine is
able to maintain the optimum cool-
ing performance after the heavy load
decreases. Driving under a heavy
load must be performed with ex-
treme care.
. Place the shift boot to the original
position after it is lifted. If the select
lever is operated with the shift boot
in the rolled up position, the shift
boot may have tension and it may
disturb the select lever operation.
& Select Lever
s07bg01
1 Select lever button
– CONTINUED –
Continuously Variable Transmission
317
7
Starting and Operating
(320,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the select lever button in
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has an “M” position
for using the manual mode.
NOTE
. To protect the engine while the
select lever is in the “P” or “N”
position, the engine is controlled
so that the engine speed may not
become too high even if the accel-
erator pedal is depressed hard.
. When you change the select lever
position, make sure to move the
select lever firmly to the selected
position.
! P (Park)
s07bg0101
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the hybrid system. In this position,
the transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
s07bg0102
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “ACC” position, the movement of the
select lever from the “N” to “R” position is
only possible by depressing the brake
pedal. For details, refer to “Shift Lock
Function” �P319.
! N (Neutral)
s07bg0103
In this position, the transmission is neutral,
meaning that the wheels and transmission
are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will
roll freely, even on the slightest incline
unless the parking brake or foot brake is
applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking and regenerative
braking have no effect in this condition.
CAUTION
. If the shift position is in “N”, the
high voltage battery will not be
charged. To prevent the battery
from discharging, avoid leaving
the “N” position selected for an
extended period of time.
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Otherwise, the regen-
erative braking system will not be
able to charge the high voltage
battery.
! D (Drive)
s07bg0104
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
Continuously Variable Transmission
318
(321,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
require. Also, while driving up and down a
hill, the transmission assists and controls
the driving performance and engine brak-
ing while corresponding to the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
heavily, the power of the high voltage
battery is added to that of the gasoline
engine via the electric motor (traction
motor).
Temporary manual shift mode:
If you operate one of the shift paddles
behind the steering wheel while driving in
the “D” position, you will be able to
temporarily shift to any gear position using
the shift paddles.
1 Gear position indicator
When the temporary manual shift mode is
selected, the gear position indicator on the
combination meter illuminates. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-6th gear range.
Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the
transmission will switch from the manual
mode back to the “D” position for normal
driving.
When you pull and hold the shift paddle “+”
for several seconds, temporary manual
shift mode will be canceled.
NOTE
. When you switch to temporary man-
ual shift mode, the first gear position
is “4”.
. In addition to pressing the brake
pedal when going downhill, it is
recommended to use engine braking
by downshifting.
. In the following situations, tempor-
ary manual shift is canceled.
– The vehicle is stopped.
– You press the accelerator pedal
for longer than several seconds
while traveling in a straight line or
on a gentle curve.
– You put the select lever in a
position other than “D”.
. The time required to release the
temporary manual shift mode varies
depending on the driving conditions
at the time of operation.
. In order to ensure safety and appro-
priate driving performance, down-
shifting operations are restricted. If
the paddle shift lever is operated at a
vehicle speed at which downshifting
is not possible, a beep will sound to
alert the driver that the downshift
cannot be made.
& Shift Lock Function
s07bg04
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to
– CONTINUED –
Continuously Variable Transmission
319
7
Starting and Operating
(322,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
the “ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position
before the brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the push-button ignition switch to the
“OFF” position.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” position while the select lever is
in the “N” position, the select lever may
not be moved to the “P” position without
depressing the brake pedal and press-
ing the select lever button.
! Shift lock release
s07bg0401
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position, then move the select lever to
the “P” position with the select lever button
pressed and the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, check
and confirm the following and release the
shift lock accordingly.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion” �P320.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:
Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the brake pedal de-
pressed.
If the select lever still does not move, refer
to “Shift lock release using the shift lock
release portion” �P320.
If the shift lock cannot be released without
using the shift lock release button in the
above cases, there may be a malfunction
in the shift lock system or the vehicle
control system.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion as soon as possible.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion
s07bg0402
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
hybrid system.
1 Slits
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver
into the two slits and then lift upward.
3. Remove the wireless charger.
Continuously Variable Transmission
320
(323,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
4. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the shift lock release portion,
and then move the select lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
soon as possible.
& Selection of Manual Mode
s07bg02
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
1 Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator on the combination
meter illuminate. The gear position indica-
tor shows the currently selected gear in the
1st-to-6th gear range.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
– CONTINUED –
Continuously Variable Transmission
321
7
Starting and Operating
(324,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “−”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position. While driving with the select lever
in the “D” position, if you change gears by
operating the shift paddle, the gear posi-
tion indicator illuminates and shows the
current gear condition.
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on the
shift paddles. Doing so may result in
accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
When you switch to manual mode, the
first gear position is “4”.
. In order to ensure safety and appro-
priate driving performance, down-
shifting operations are restricted. If
the paddle shift lever is operated at a
vehicle speed at which downshifting
is not possible, a beep will sound to
alert the driver that the downshift
cannot be made.
. When the gear position is “3” or less,
the gears will automatically upshift
depending on the engine speed.
. When the gear position is “4” or less
and you hold the shift paddle “+” for
a long time, the gears will upshift to
the gear position “6”.
. If the gear position indicator is not
displayed or “D” is displayed even
when the shift lever is set to the “M”
position, the transmission may be
malfunctioning. Consult your
SUBARU dealer to have your vehicle
inspected.
& Driving Tips
s07bg05
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Make sure to apply the parking brake
when parking your vehicle. Do not hold
the vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly accel-
erates or rapidly pulls away from a
standstill. This phenomenon does not
indicate a malfunction.
NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
Continuously Variable Transmission
322
(325,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-7. SI-DRIVE
s07bc
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)
works to maximize hybrid system perfor-
mance, control and efficiency.
This system consists of the following
modes:
. Intelligent (I) mode
. Sport (S) mode
Intelligent (I) mode is selected when the
push-button ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position. By adjusting the SI-DRIVE
switch, the character of the power unit
changes.
& Intelligent (I) Mode
s07bc02
! For smooth, efficient performance
driving
s07bc0201
The linear acceleration characteristic of
the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal
driving usage.
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
& Sport (S) Mode
s07bc03
! For all-around performance driving
s07bc0301
The Sport (S) mode provides the hybrid
system power desired by those who want
to make the driving experience their own
personal adventure.
& SI-DRIVE Switch
s07bc01
NOTE
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer.
. The default mode of the SI-DRIVE
system is the Intelligent (I) mode.
Once you turn off the hybrid system,
the previous setting mode is can-
celed and the SI-DRIVE system re-
– CONTINUED –
SI-DRIVE
323
7
Starting and Operating
(326,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
turns to the Intelligent (I) mode the
next time you turn on the hybrid
system.
. If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light or the
hybrid fail lamp illuminates, the
SI-DRIVE mode changes to the In-
telligent (I) mode. In this case, it is
not possible to change to another
mode.
. The SI-DRIVE mode will not be
affected even if the SI-DRIVE switch
is pressed while X-MODE is acti-
vated. At this time, the buzzer will
sound twice.
SI-DRIVE switch
To select the intelligent (I) mode, press the
“I” side of the switch. To select the Sport
(S) mode, press the “S” side of the switch.
7-8. Power Steering
s07aj
Power steering warning light
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
power steering warning light on the com-
bination meter illuminates to inform the
driver that the warning system is function-
ing properly. Then, if the hybrid system
started, the warning light turns off to inform
the driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely
low speeds, such as while frequently
turning the steering wheel during
parallel parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long
period of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However, this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
Power Steering
324
(327,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
this may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
7-9. Braking
s07ak
& Braking Tips
s07ak01
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads.
! When the brakes get wet
s07ak0101
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
s07ak0102
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To help
prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get
stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
s07ak0103
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake System
s07ak02
! Two separate circuits
s07ak0201
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Electronic brake booster
s07ak0207
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic
brake booster to provide additional braking
force. Do not turn off the ignition switch
while driving because that will turn off the
brake booster, resulting in poor braking
power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, you will have
to depress the pedal much harder than
during normal braking, and the braking
distance will increase.
– CONTINUED –
Braking
325
7
Starting and Operating
(328,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
When the following operations are
performed, an operating sound from
the electronic brake boost control
module may be heard. This is not a
malfunction.
. The brake pedal was operated.
. The driver’s door was opened.
. The EyeSight function was acti-
vated.
. Several minutes have passed after
the hybrid system stopped.
! Supplemental booster function
when pressure fails
s07ak020701
If there is a malfunction in the braking
system, the power for the braking will be
stored by controlling the hydraulic pres-
sure of the VDC system.
When the brake pedal is depressed while
the supplemental booster function is oper-
ating, an operation sound and brake pedal
vibration may be generated.
! Electronic brake booster warning
s07ak020702
The brake system warning light illuminates
when the electronic brake booster is
malfunctioning. In addition, the warning
messages “Brake System” and “Check
Owner’s Manual” are displayed alternately
on the combination meter display. If the
warning light illuminates, promptly park in
a safe location as soon as possible and we
recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “Electronic
brake booster warning” �P176.
! Brake assist system
s07ak0203
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal is
applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compart-
ment.
& Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning
Indicators
s07ak03
WARNING
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle
when the wear limits of the brake
pads and/or those of the brake discs
are exceeded. Doing so could result
in an accident.
Braking
326
(329,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise,
have the brake pads checked and re-
placed by your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Brake disc damage may result if
the pads are not replaced when needed.
7-10. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)
s07al
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving with an ABS equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over newly fallen snow, stopping
distances may be longer for a
vehicle with the ABS than one
without. When driving under
these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample
distance from other vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when the
ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
km/h).
& ABS Self-Check
s07al01
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating noise of the
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
being carried out and does not indicate any
abnormal condition.
& ABS Warning Light
s07al02
Refer to “ABS Warning Light” �P174.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
327
7
Starting and Operating
(330,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-11. Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) System
s07am
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
braking force. It functions by adjusting the
distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
function fails, the EBD system also stops
working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& EBD System Malfunctions
s07am01
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the following
warning lights illuminate simultaneously.
. Brake system warning light
. ABS warning light
. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
If all of the warning lights remain on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately and
contact a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System
328
(331,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol System
s07an
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics
Control system equipped vehicle
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
indication that the road being
traveled on has a slippery sur-
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, have
an inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly.
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
tire inflation pressure label
attached to the driver’s side
door pillar.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate cor-
rectly.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Dynamics Control System
329
7
Starting and Operating
(332,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating noise from the en-
gine compartment is heard
briefly when starting the hybrid
system and when driving off after
starting the hybrid system.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
hybrid system.
. In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it
feels to the driver. The Vehicle
Dynamics Control System may
therefore operate. Such operation
does not indicate a system malfunc-
tion.
– On gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– On unfinished roads
– When the vehicle is towing a
trailer
– When the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation
of the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for nor-
mal conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. Always turn off the hybrid system
before replacing a tire as failure to
do so may render the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system unable to
operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
System Monitor
s07an01
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control Warn-
ing Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Op-
eration Indicator Light” �P179 and “Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light”
�P180.
& To Turn On/Off the Vehicle
Dynamics Control System
s07an07
To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on
and off, operate the center information
display. Refer to “Car settings” �P214.
Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by
deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system temporarily may help to escape
from the following situations. Turn the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when
necessary.
. A standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. Extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system during hybrid system
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will be deactivated. When
“Vehicle Dynamics Control” has been
touched again to reactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns
off.
You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem helps prevent unstable vehicle
motion such as skidding using con-
trol of the brakes and engine power.
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system unless it is abso-
lutely necessary. If you must turn off
Vehicle Dynamics Control System
330
(333,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully based on
the road surface condition.
NOTE
. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”
has been touched to deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem automatically reactivates itself
the next time the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position and the
hybrid system is restarted.
. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”
has been touched to deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system,
the vehicle’s running performance is
comparable with that of a vehicle
that does not have a Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system. Do not de-
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system except when absolutely
necessary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, com-
ponents of the brake control system
may still activate. When the brake
control system is activated, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light flashes.
7-13. X-MODE
s07bi
WARNING
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with X-MODE could easily lead to
a serious accident.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with hill descent control function
could easily lead to a serious
accident. Be especially careful,
and depress the brake pedal if
necessary when driving on ex-
tremely steep downhill, frozen,
muddy or sandy roads. Failure
to control the vehicle’s speed
may cause a loss of control and
result in a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with X-MODE, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow-
covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having
X-MODE does not guarantee that
the vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activate X-MODE when you en-
counter a very slippery surface at
low speed. However, having
X-MODE is no guarantee that full
vehicle control will be maintained
at all times and under all condi-
tions. When activating X-MODE,
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have the system in-
spected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. Observe the following precau-
tions in order to ensure that
X-MODE is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s
door pillar.
– CONTINUED –
X-MODE
331
7
Starting and Operating
(334,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. If the hill descent control function
has operated continuously for a
long time, the temperature of the
brake disc may increase and the
hill descent control function may
be temporarily disabled. In this
case, the hill descent control
indicator light will disappear.
When the hill descent control
indicator light disappears, the hill
descent control function is dis-
abled.
X-MODE is the integrated control system
of the hybrid system, AWD and Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, etc. for driving
with bad road conditions. Using X-MODE,
you can drive more comfortably even in
slippery road conditions including uphill
and downhill.
X-MODE has the following functions.
. Hill descent control function:
Using the hill descent control function, you
can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
likely to increase, the brake control system
will be activated to adjust the vehicle
speed.
. Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing
ability and driving ability as well as
enabling smooth application of torque for
easier control of the steering wheel.
& To Activate/Deactivate
X-MODE
s07bi01
1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator
2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator
To activate or deactivate X-MODE, oper-
ate the center information display. Refer to
“Car settings” �P214.
NOTE
. Even if you try to activate X-MODE
when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20
km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be
activated. At this time, a buzzer will
sound twice.
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is
activated, a buzzer will sound once
and X-MODE will be deactivated.
X-MODE will automatically reacti-
vate when the vehicle speed drops
below 22 mph (35 km/h).
– When you use the cruise control
after X-MODE is automatically
deactivated, X-MODE will not be
automatically reactivated when
the vehicle speed drops below
22 mph (35 km/h).
. While the hybrid system is running,
if any of the following conditions is
met, X-MODE will be deactivated. In
this case, it is not possible to
activate X-MODE. Also, the SI-DRIVE
mode will change to the Intelligent (I)
mode and it will not be possible to
change to the other modes.
– The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator light
illuminates.
– The ABS warning light illumi-
nates.
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light illuminates.
. If there is a possibility that the
engine could overheat because of a
temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it is not possible to activate
X-MODE
332
(335,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
X-MODE. Even while X-MODE is
activated, X-MODE will be deacti-
vated when the engine coolant tem-
perature increases. In this case, the
SI-DRIVE mode will change to the
Intelligent (I) mode.
. The SI-DRIVE mode will not be
affected even if the SI-DRIVE switch
is pressed while X-MODE is acti-
vated. At this time, the buzzer will
sound twice.
. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving
on a snow-covered road where the
points of contact between the tires
and road surface are visible, or for
driving on an unpaved road.
. DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for
driving on a road covered with deep
snow where the points of contact
between the tires and road surface
are not visible, or for driving on a
muddy road.
& Hill Descent Control Function
s07bi03
The hill descent control function will be in
standby mode when X-MODE is activated
and the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h).
The function will operate when the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
than approximately 10%.
The function will turn off when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
CAUTION
The braking power of the hill des-
cent control function may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when towing
a trailer).
NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control
function is operating, you can vary
the vehicle speed using the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the stop lights will
illuminate.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient
of the road.
. The hill descent control function
may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
– An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compart-
ment while the hill descent con-
trol function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder
than usual etc.) when the brake
pedal is depressed during hill
descent control function opera-
tion.
! Hill descent control indicator light
s07bi0301
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in the standby
mode. It flashes while the function is
operating. It will disappear when the
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
to non-operational, it will disappear when
the vehicle speed reaches more than
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
X-MODE
333
7
Starting and Operating
(336,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-14. Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS) (U.S.-
Spec. Models)
s07ao
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by
sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also, this
system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a sharp
object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the tire inflation
pressure label on the door
pillar on the driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures in-
crease accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly be-
fore adjusting their pressures to
the standard values shown on the
tire inflation pressure label. Refer
to “Tires and Wheels” �P475.
The tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem does not function when the
vehicle is stationary. After adjust-
ing the tire pressures, increase
the vehicle speed to at least 25
mph (40 km/h) to start the TPMS
rechecking of the tire inflation
pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should
turn off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat
Tires” �P422.
. When a replacement tire is
mounted or a wheel rim is re-
placed without the original pres-
sure sensor/transmitter being
transferred, the low tire pressure
warning light will illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible for tire and sensor replace-
ment and/or system resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)
334
(337,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for ap-
proximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system in-
spected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
ing system will not function prop-
erly.
& Certification for Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
s07ao01
! U.S.-spec. models
s07ao0101
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
& TPMS Screen
s07ao05
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic Screens” �P197.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)
335
7
Starting and Operating
(338,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-15. Parking Your Vehicle
s07ap
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the hybrid system
if you take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
& Electronic Parking Brake
s07ap03
1 Electronic parking brake switch
2 Indicator light
3 Release the electronic parking brake
4 Apply the electronic parking brake
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the hybrid
system. Otherwise, the parking
brake may be released and an
accident may occur.
. If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use tire
stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
. If the electronic parking brake is
operated under the following
conditions, the electronic park-
ing brake indicator light may
flash.
– The brake is overheated.
– The vehicle is on a steep
slope.
In such cases, the vehicle may
start to move which may lead to
an accident. Always use the tire
stops.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake cannot be applied due to a
malfunction, contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection. If you have to park
your vehicle in such conditions,
perform the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position. When the select le-
ver cannot be shifted into the
“P” position, you must release
Parking Your Vehicle
336
(339,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
shift lock. Refer to “Shift Lock
Function” �P319.
– Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never drive with the parking
brake applied. Doing so will
cause unnecessary brake pad
wear. Before driving off, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been released and the brake
system warning light has turned
off.
. The braking power of the parking
brake may not be sufficient when
stronger braking power is
needed (e.g., when parking on a
steep slope while towing a trai-
ler).
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
pull up the parking brake switch.
To release: Press the parking brake
switch firmly while the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
Electronic parking brake indicator light
When the parking brake is applied while
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the following indicator lights illuminate.
. The indicator light on the parking brake
switch
. The electronic parking brake indicator
light on the combination meter (for
details, refer to “Electronic Parking
Brake Indicator Light” �P176.)
NOTE
. The parking brake will not be re-
leased under the following condi-
tions even if the parking brake
switch is pressed.
– The ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “OFF” position.
– The brake pedal is not depressed.
. The electronic parking brake system
uses motors to apply the parking
brake. Therefore, operating sounds
from the motors will be heard when
applying or releasing the parking
brake. Make sure that the motor
sounds are heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction or the
electronic parking brake operation
is prohibited temporarily, if the park-
ing brake switch is operated, a chirp
sound is heard and the electronic
parking brake indicator light flashes.
. When you cannot release the park-
ing brake due to, for example, a
system malfunction, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have your
SUBARU dealer release the parking
brake.
. If the operation of the electronic
parking brake switch is stopped
midway or performed extremely
slowly, the system may detect an
error and turn on the brake system
warning light. However, this does
not indicate a malfunction if the
warning light turns off after operat-
ing the switch.
– CONTINUED –
Parking Your Vehicle
337
7
Starting and Operating
(340,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When the electronic parking brake
has not been used for a long period
of time, the electronic parking brake
may operate automatically after the
ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position. This occurs due to
checking the proper operation of the
electronic parking brake and does
not indicate a malfunction.
. If the electronic parking brake
switch is malfunctioning and the
electronic parking brake cannot be
released, refer to the instructions
described in “Automatic release
function by accelerator pedal”
�P338.
. After activating the electronic park-
ing brake, you may hear a short
sound several minutes after the
electronic parking brake indicator
light and the indicator light on the
electronic parking brake switch illu-
minate as the system confirms prop-
er engagement. This sound is differ-
ent from the apply and release
sound.
This can occur:
– If the brakes are extremely hot.
– If the car is parked on a steep
incline.
– If the electronic parking brake is
applied after the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
This is a normal operating sound
under any of these conditions.
! Automatic release function by ac-
celerator pedal
s07ap0301
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The parking
brake will be automatically released by
depressing the accelerator pedal. How-
ever, the automatic release function does
not operate under the following conditions.
. Any door (other than the rear gate) is
open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the electronic parking brake
indicator light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake, the parking brake will be auto-
matically released when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
! Auto Vehicle Hold function
s07ap0305
The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-
matically keep the vehicle stopped even
after releasing the brake pedal when the
vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at
traffic signals.
WARNING
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function on a steep hill or slip-
pery road. The vehicle may move
even when using the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, causing serious
injury or accidents.
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function to park the vehicle. The
vehicle may move unexpectedly,
causing serious injury or acci-
dents. Make sure to shift the
select lever to the “P” position
and apply the electronic parking
brake in the following cases.
– When you are going to park
your vehicle.
– When passengers are getting
in or out of the vehicle.
– When you are loading or un-
loading.
. When using the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, do not release the
brake pedal before the Auto Ve-
hicle Hold indicator illuminates.
The vehicle may move unexpect-
edly, causing serious injury or
accidents.
. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold
function in the following cases.
Parking Your Vehicle
338
(341,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Otherwise, the vehicle may move
unexpectedly, causing serious
injury or accidents.
– When washing your vehicle in
an automatic car wash
– When being towed
CAUTION
. When stopping on a steep slope
with the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
tion turned on, the electronic
parking brake may be automati-
cally applied. Then the electronic
parking brake indicator light will
flash. In such a case, depress and
hold the brake pedal while stop-
ping. Otherwise, the vehicle may
move.
. When being towed, turn off the
Auto Vehicle Hold function.
NOTE
We recommend turning on the Auto
Vehicle Hold function when stopping
on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold
function is turned off, the vehicle may
roll backward when driving off.
! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle
Hold function
s07ap030501
Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on
and off, operate the center information
display. Refer to “Car settings” �P214.
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is
turned ON, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator
light will turn on.
NOTE
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the
Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned
on, a chirp will sound, the Auto
Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn
off and the brake system warning
light will turn on.
. Every time when starting the hybrid
system, the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
tion will be set to “OFF”.
! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold
function
s07ap030503
Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal when all of the following conditions
are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold
function will operate.
. Driver’s door is closed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
While the vehicle is kept stopped by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto
Vehicle Hold indicator light will flash.
– CONTINUED –
Parking Your Vehicle
339
7
Starting and Operating
(342,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold
function
s07ap030504
Perform any of the following operations to
release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.
. Depress the accelerator pedal.
. Depress the brake pedal again.
. Apply the electronic parking brake.
. Shift the select lever to the “P” position
with the brake pedal pressed.
. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
tion operating with the center informa-
tion display while depressing the brake
pedal.
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is
released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator
light will change from flashing to illumi-
nated.
Under any of the following conditions, the
Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-
matically released and the electronic
parking brake will be automatically ap-
plied.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has
been in operation for 10 minutes.
. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
. The vehicle is stopped on a steep
slope.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is
malfunctioning.
In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold
indicator light will turn off and the electronic
parking brake indicator light will illuminate.
! Tips
s07ap030505
. When the electronic parking brake is
automatically applied with the vehicle
kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, release the electronic parking
brake by either of the following opera-
tions before starting off. Then make
sure that the electronic parking brake
indicator light is off.
– Depress the accelerator pedal with
the driver’s seatbelt fastened and
with the doors closed.
– Press the electronic parking brake
switch with the brake pedal de-
pressed.
. Under certain conditions, including a
malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a
warning buzzer will sound and a warn-
ing message will appear on the combi-
nation meter display. All warning mes-
sages should be strictly observed.
. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be
kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold
function. In such a case, depress and
hold the brake pedal.
. When stopping on a steep slope with
the Auto Vehicle Hold function acti-
vated, the electronic parking brake may
be automatically applied after stopping,
then the electronic parking brake in-
dicator light may flash. In such a case,
depress and hold the brake pedal while
stopped. Otherwise, the vehicle may
move. When getting out of the vehicle,
stop the vehicle on a flat surface, then
apply the electronic parking brake.
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light
does not illuminates even after touch-
ing “Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” with the
operating conditions met, the function
may have a malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
. You may hear a sound while the Auto
Vehicle Hold function is keeping your
vehicle stopped. This is normal, and
does not represent a malfunction.
. When you depress the brake pedal to
release the Auto Vehicle Hold function,
an operation sound or vibration may be
generated, or the brake pedal may
return slowly. This is not a malfunction.
. While the vehicle is kept stopped by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake
pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not
a malfunction.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, depress the brake pedal
Parking Your Vehicle
340
(343,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold
may not operate.
! Emergency brake
s07ap0303
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emer-
gency brake is excessively used, the
brake parts will wear down faster or
the brake may not work sufficiently
due to brake overheating.
NOTE
. While using the emergency brake,
the electronic parking brake indica-
tor light and the indicator light on the
parking brake switch illuminate and
a chirp sounds.
. While using the emergency brake, a
sound may be heard from the engine
compartment. This is the operating
sound of the brake that is activated
by the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can
stop the vehicle by pulling the parking
brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light and
the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
s07ap0304
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in
the nearest safe location and con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic
parking brake system warning” �P176.
& Parking Tips
s07ap02
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake.
. Place the select lever in the “P” (Park)
position.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as described here. When
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
– CONTINUED –
Parking Your Vehicle
341
7
Starting and Operating
(344,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a bumper under
guard (optional), pay attention to
blocks and other obstructions on
the ground when parking. The un-
derspoiler could be damaged by
contact with them.
7-16. Hill Start Assist System
s07au
CAUTION
. The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents
when the vehicle is parked on a
slope, be sure to firmly set the
parking brake. When setting the
parking brake, make sure that the
vehicle remains stationary when
the brake pedal is released.
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position while the Hill
start assist system is operating.
The Hill start assist system will
deactivate, causing an accident.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the following vehicle operations
easier.
NOTE
. The Hill start assist system will
activate when the Auto Vehicle Hold
function is deactivated.
. The Hill start assist system will
deactivate when the Auto Vehicle
Hold function is activated.
1 Starting forward facing uphill
2 Starting backward facing downhill
A Brake pedal
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-
dition.
Hill Start Assist System
342
(345,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When the vehicle has stopped with the
brake pedal depressed.
Braking power is maintained temporarily
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
level grade, just using the accelerator
pedal.
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill start assist system may not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
. When starting backward facing uphill
. When starting forward facing downhill
. While the parking brake is applied
. While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “OFF” position
. While the Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light is illuminated. Refer to
“Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning
Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Opera-
tion Indicator Light” �P179.
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released.
CAUTION
The braking power of the Hill start
assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is
needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).
NOTE
A slight jolt may be felt when the
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
Hill Start Assist System
343
7
Starting and Operating
(346,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-17. Surround View Monitor
(If Equipped)
s07bu
Surround View Monitor is a feature that
displays camera images on the center
information display to allow the driver to
check the blind spots of the vehicle. You
can use it to check the area in the front of
the vehicle, when starting the vehicle or
while driving, and the area to the rear of the
vehicle, when backing up. You can also
use it to check your surroundings when
parking the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never rely on only the Surround
View Monitor when driving the
vehicle. The image on the moni-
tor screen may appear different
from the vehicle’s actual sur-
roundings. If you drive the vehi-
cle by viewing only the monitor
image, a collision or an accident
may occur. When driving the
vehicle, always remain alert and
the check the surrounding traffic
directly and by using the mirrors.
. Do not use the Surround View
Monitor in the following situa-
tions.
– You are driving on a dirt road
or a road covered in snow.
– The camera malfunctions (e.g.
the lens or bracket is broken).
– The outside mirrors are re-
tracted.
– The front door is not fully
closed.
. If the outside temperature is low,
the monitor screen may become
dark or the image may become
dim. In particular, the image of a
moving object may appear dis-
torted or disappear from the
screen. Always remain alert and
check the surrounding traffic di-
rectly when driving.
NOTE
. If there is a Surround View Monitor
system malfunction, an error mes-
sage “
”, “ ” or “ ” is displayed
on the center information display.
For details, refer to “Malfunctions of
the Center Information Display”
�P442.
. If any of the following malfunctions
occur in the rear view camera sys-
tem, refer to “Malfunctions of the
Center Information Display” �P442.
– The screen becomes blue or
black.
– The screen does not switch to the
image of the rear view camera.
– The camera status indicator is
not displayed on the screen.
& How to Change the Display of
Surround View Monitor
s07bu01
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, you can operate the select lever
and the view monitor switch to display the
image on the Surround View Monitor.
1 View monitor switch
Surround View Monitor
344
(347,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 View icon
! Checking your surroundings while
the vehicle is stopped
s07bu0101
To display a 3D view of the vehicle’s
surroundings, press the view monitor
switch when the select lever is in the “P”
position.
1 Vehicle icon
2 Vehicle angle icon
When the 3D view is displayed, the display
angle switches clockwise from the starting
position. When the view returns to the
starting position, the display angle stops
switching. You can also switch the display
angle by pressing the vehicle angle icon on
the screen.
NOTE
If you turn off the Surround View
Monitor or change the screen to oper-
ate other functions, the next time the
image is displayed, it will be displayed
at the previously displayed angle.
! Check rearward
s07bu0102
When the select lever is move to “R”, the
image in the rearward direction is dis-
played.
Pressing the view monitor switch or
touching the view icon while the image of
the rear camera is displayed will switch the
screen view.
– CONTINUED –
Surround View Monitor
345
7
Starting and Operating
(348,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Original screen
2 Rear view screen/Top view screen/Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) screen
3 Rear view screen/Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) screen
4 Top view screen
: Shift the select lever.
: Touch the view icon or press the view
monitor switch.
NOTE
. If you turn off the Surround View
Monitor or use it to operate another
function, the next time the image is
displayed, the previously displayed
screen will be shown. However, if the
top view screen is displayed at that
time, the next time the monitor
image is displayed, the rear view
screen/Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) screen will be shown.
. When “Rear Camera Delay Control”
is on, the rear-view image will be
displayed on the center information
display for a certain period of time
after the select lever is shifted from
the “R” position to another position
(other than the “P” position). To turn
the function on and off, refer to
“General settings” �P210.
! Checking the front
s07bu0103
When the view monitor switch is pressed
while the select lever is in the “N” or “D”
position, the front view is displayed.
1 Original screen
2 Top view screen
3 Left-side view screen/Right-side view
screen/Front-top view screen
4 Front view screen/Front-top view screen
: Press the view monitor switch.
: Touch the view icon.
Surround View Monitor
346
(349,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
If you turn off the Surround View
Monitor or use it to operate another
function, the next time the image is
displayed, the previously displayed
screen will be shown.
& How to Cancel Surround View
Monitor
s07bu02
There are several ways to cancel Sur-
round View Monitor.
! Manual cancellation
s07bu0201
The Surround View Monitor will be can-
celed by either of the following operations.
. Press the view monitor switch until the
original screen is displayed (when the
select lever is other than the “R”
position).
. Move the select lever to a position other
than the “R” position (when the select
lever is in the “R” position).
. Touch
(car settings icon).
. Touch
(HOME).
. Touch
(driver profiles icon).
! Automatic cancellation
s07bu0202
If any of the following conditions are met,
the Surround View Monitor is canceled
automatically.
. When the select lever is other than in
the “R” position
– About 3 minutes have elapsed since
you pressed the view monitor switch
to access the Surround View Moni-
tor.
. When the select lever is not in the “R” or
“P” position
– The vehicle accelerates to 13 mph
(20 km/h) or more.
– You depress the brake pedal and
pull up the parking brake switch to
apply the parking brake.
. When the selector lever is in the “D” or
“R” position
– The select lever is shifted to the “P”
position.
& How to View the Camera
Images
s07bu03
1 Cameras
The camera image displays guiding lines
that provide information on the distance
– CONTINUED –
Surround View Monitor
347
7
Starting and Operating
(350,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
and direction of travel of your vehicle, as
well as information on any vehicles you are
approaching.
CAUTION
. When you drive the vehicle, do
not rely only on the guiding lines.
Make sure that you check your
surroundings directly.
. The position and other informa-
tion provided by the guiding lines
may differ from the actual dis-
tance of objects from the vehicle
if it is tilting at an angle relative to
the road surface due to the num-
ber of passengers or the distribu-
tion of cargo on board the vehi-
cle.
NOTE
. Top view and rear view only: The
display of the predicted course line
linked to the steering angle can be
turned on/off by operating “Steering
Angle Lines” in the center informa-
tion display. To turn the function on
and off, refer to “General settings”
�P210.
. The camera image may be hard to
see in the following situations. This
is not a malfunction.
– Vehicle surroundings are dark
(such as at night).
– Ambient temperature outside the
vehicle is high or low.
– There is water or humidity on the
lens (such as in rainy weather).
– There is foreign material (such as
mud) on or near the camera.
– Sunlight or a headlight beam
shines directly shines toward
the camera lens.
. Under an artificial light such as a
fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor
lamp or mercury lamp, the lighted
portion may appear to flicker (flicker
phenomenon).
. When the display is cold, the image
may leave traces or become darker
than usual, causing a difficulty in
viewing the screen. When driving
your vehicle, make sure that you
check your surroundings directly for
traffic.
. The following conditions may affect
the appearance of the screen, but
any resulting image distortion on the
screen does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
– When humidity is high on a rainy
day, the camera lens becomes
foggy.
– When driving at night, the light
from a vehicle or building located
ahead shines in the direction of
the camera.
– When the vehicle is in a dark
place or when driving at night, the
camera image may be adjusted to
make image noise less visible.
Therefore, the image may look like a
monochromatic image or the image
colors may differ from the actual
colors. The image sharpness in the
center and in the four corners of the
screen may differ. This is not a
malfunction.
! 3D view
s07bu0301
1 Vehicle icon
2 Vehicle angle icon
Surround View Monitor
348
(351,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The 3D view displays the area around the
vehicle.
! Top view
s07bu0302
A When the select lever is in the “D” or “M”
position.
B When the select lever is in the “R”
position.
1 Vehicle icon
2 Predicted line
3 Approaching vehicle icon (Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA))
The top view displays an image of the
vehicle’s surroundings from above the
vehicle. This view is useful for checking
the vehicle’s surroundings when you are
driving.
! Front view
s07bu0303
1 Guiding lines
The guiding lines that indicate the width
and the front end of your vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
! Side view
s07bu0304
1 Front-of-vehicle guiding line
2 Side-of-vehicle guiding line
3 Center-of-front-tire guiding line
Guiding lines that indicate the width and
the front end of the vehicle are displayed
on the monitor.
– CONTINUED –
Surround View Monitor
349
7
Starting and Operating
(352,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Rear view
s07bu0305
1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2 Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper (green
horizontal line)
4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6 Vehicle centerline
7 Dynamic guidelines
8 Approaching vehicle icon (Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA))
The help lines are a guide to help you
judge distances based on the screen
image.
& Range of Surround View
Monitor
s07bu04
A Camera to be used
B Range of displayed image
1 Front camera
2 Side camera (right-hand side)
3 Rear camera
4 Side camera (left-hand side)
5 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the vehicle
6 Vehicle overall length
7 Approx. 8 ft (2.5 m) from the vehicle
8 Vehicle overall width
WARNING
The range that can be viewed with
the camera is limited. Always make
sure that you check your surround-
ings directly when the vehicle is in
motion and proceed slowly. If you do
not, it may cause an accident or
injury.
NOTE
. The range of the displayed image
may differ depending on the status
of your vehicle or of the road sur-
face.
. Because the Surround View Monitor
system uses a specially designed
lens, the sense of distance in the
displayed image is different from the
actual distance.
& Using the Camera
s07bu05
CAUTION
Obey the following instructions to
prevent a system malfunction.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the camera such as by hitting it
with an object. Striking the cam-
era can change the mounting
angle.
. The camera unit is a waterproof
structure. Do not attempt to re-
move, disassemble or modify the
unit.
Surround View Monitor
350
(353,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Do not vigorously rub the camera
lens or polish it using a hard
brush or abrasive compounds.
The lens may be scratched,
which can affect the camera im-
age.
. The camera lens is made of glass
or plastic. Do not allow any
organic solvent, body wax, oil
film remover or glass coating
agent to become attached on the
lens surface. If any becomes
attached, remove it immediately.
. Do not expose the camera lens to
any sudden temperature change
such as spraying hot water on it
in cold weather.
. Do not apply the water jet of a
high pressure washer to the cam-
era or the surrounding area when
cleaning the vehicle. The force of
the water pressure can dislodge
the camera. Also, water may
enter inside the camera and
cause a malfunction.
. If the camera is exposed to any
impact, it can lead to a malfunc-
tion. Have the camera inspected
by your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
. Do not use a steam cleaner under
any circumstances. Some types
of steam cleaners inject hot
steam.
. The camera surface may be da-
maged by a flying stone.
NOTE
If the camera lens is covered in dirt, the
system will not be able to produce a
sharp image. If there is foreign material
on the camera, such as water drops,
snow or mud, clean it with water and
wipe away any moisture with a soft
cloth. If the camera is heavily soiled,
wash it using a neutral detergent.
& Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)
s07bu07
When the rear view is displayed, the icon
flashes when the Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) detects a vehicle approaching on
the left or right from behind the vehicle. For
details about Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA), refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” �P358.
e.g., when the rear view screen is dis-
played
1 When there is a vehicle approaching from
the left
2 When there is a vehicle approaching from
the right
Surround View Monitor
351
7
Starting and Operating
(354,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-18. Rear View Camera
(Models without Surround
View Monitor)
s07br
A rear view camera is attached to the rear
gate. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position and the select lever is set to
“R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image behind the
vehicle on the center information display.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses a
wide-angle lens, the image on the
monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, always
check the rear view and the
surrounding area with your eyes
and mirrors, and move backward
at a slow speed. Moving back-
ward only by checking the rear
view image from the camera
could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell a
strange odor, stop using the rear
view camera immediately. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection. Continued use may
result in accident, fire or electric
shock.
CAUTION
. When washing your vehicle with
a high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to touch the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful when removing it.
Otherwise, damage to the camera
may cause a fire or electric
shock. Pour water or lukewarm
water over the camera to remove
mud and ice, and wipe it with a
soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
mage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If you use the rear view camera
for a long time while the hybrid
system is not operated, the bat-
tery may become completely dis-
charged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with
a cloth moistened with a diluted
neutral detergent. Then wipe it with
a soft, dry cloth.
Rear View Camera (Models without Surround View Monitor)
352
(355,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If
it comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has a hard coating
to help prevent scratches. However,
when washing the vehicle or clean-
ing the camera lens, be careful not to
scratch the camera lens. Do not use
a washing brush directly on the
camera lens. The image quality of
the rear view camera may deterio-
rate.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop vertical lines
around the light source. This is not
a malfunction.
. Under the fluorescent light, the dis-
play may flicker. However, this is not
a malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
. If there is a malfunction on the center
information display, refer to “Mal-
functions of the Center Information
Display” �P442.
& How to Use the Rear View
Camera
s07br01
When the select lever is set to “R”, the rear
view camera automatically displays the
rear view image from the vehicle. When
the lever is set to other positions, the
image before setting to “R” is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle inside mirror or the
outside mirror.
. When “Rear Camera Delay Control”
is on, the rear view image will be
displayed on the center information
display for a certain period of time
after the select lever is shifted to a
position other than the “P” position
from “R”. To turn the function on and
off, refer to “General settings”
�P210.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of
the camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera
sticks to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light is shining directly on
the camera lens (occasionally,
there are vertical lines on the
screen).
& Viewing Range on the Screen
s07br02
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may
cause an accident or injury.
– CONTINUED –
Rear View Camera (Models without Surround View Monitor)
353
7
Starting and Operating
(356,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Range of view
Range of view
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a wide
projection on its upper part such as a sign
pole behind the vehicle, the projection
Rear View Camera (Models without Surround View Monitor)
354
(357,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
cannot be seen on the screen.
& Help Lines
s07br03
The help lines are a guide to help you
realize the actual distance from the screen
image.
NOTE
If you shift to the “R” range within
several seconds after turning on the
ignition switch, the warning message
may not be displayed. Wait for several
seconds after turning on the ignition
switch before shifting to the “R” range.
Then, the warning message will be
displayed.
Help lines
1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2 Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6 Vehicle centerline
7 Dynamic guidelines
When the select lever is set to “R”, the
monitor screen displays the help lines
together with the rear view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
Otherwise, it may cause an acci-
dent or injury.
. The actual position may be differ-
ent from the indication of the help
lines.
. Differences may occur due to the
number of passengers or the
loaded cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
inclined against the road, the
indication is different from the
actual position.
NOTE
When “Steering Angle Lines” is off, the
dynamic guidelines will disappear on
the center information display. To turn
the dynamic guidelines on and off, refer
to “General settings” �P210.
! Difference between screen image
and actual road
s07br0301
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
– CONTINUED –
Rear View Camera (Models without Surround View Monitor)
355
7
Starting and Operating
(358,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! When there is an upward slope at
the back
s07br030101
1 3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope
at the back
s07br030102
1 3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
! Feature of distance marker
s07br0302
1 3 ft (1 m) line
2 10 ft (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or another
object close behind, distance cannot be
correctly displayed.
Rear View Camera (Models without Surround View Monitor)
356
(359,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
7-19. BSD/RCTA
s07bm
The BSD/RCTA consists of radar sensors
with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert.
These functions of BSD/RCTA are the
systems that detect objects and vehicles to
the rear and draw attention to the driver
when changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing lanes or reversing the
vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver in changing lanes or rever-
sing safely by monitoring the rear
and side areas of the vehicle. How-
ever, you cannot rely on this system
alone in assuring the safety during a
lane change or reversing. Overcon-
fidence in this system could result in
an accident and lead to serious
injury or death. Since the system
operation has various limitations,
the flashing or illumination of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may be delayed, or the warning
buzzer may be delayed or inopera-
tive, even if there is a vehicle travel-
ing in a neighboring lane or ap-
proaching your vehicle from either
side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
CAUTION
In the following cases, turn off the
BSD/RCTA system. The system may
not operate properly due to blocked
radar waves.
. When towing a load
. When a bicycle carrier or other
item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
. When using a chassis dynam-
ometer or free roller device, etc.
. When running the engine and
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
& System Features
s07bm01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching
at high speed while driving the vehicle
(Blind Spot Detection)
. To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the
vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The system uses radar sensors for the
following features.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor is ap-
proved under the radio wave related
laws of each country. For details, refer
to “Certification for the BSD/RCTA”
�P364.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
357
7
Starting and Operating
(360,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
s07bm0101
1 Operating range
The system notifies the driver of the
presence of vehicles in its blind spot.
. If the system detects a vehicle in its
blind spot, it warns the driver by
illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light(s) on the outside mirror
(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-
nating, the system warns the driver of
dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light on the outside
mirror(s).
! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
s07bm010101
1 Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
approaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes.
. If the system detects a vehicle ap-
proaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes, it warns the driver
of dangers by illuminating the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the
outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-
nating, the system warns the driver of
dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light on the outside
mirror(s).
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
s07bm0103
1 Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
ing from either side while moving back-
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the center informa-
tion display.
BSD/RCTA
358
(361,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Limitations of the detectability of
RCTA
s07bm010301
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
angled parking.
Example 1
1 The detection range of the radar sensors
2 Area out of detection range of the radar
sensors
A Vehicle that may not be detected
B Parked vehicle
WARNING
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
be detected because the detection
range is limited by the parked vehi-
cle (B). Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
reversing the vehicle.
Example 2
1 The detection range of the radar sensors
C Vehicle that may be detected
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle
(C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
Always be sure to check the surround-
ings with your eyes when reversing the
vehicle.
& System Operation
s07bm02
! Operating conditions
s07bm0201
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the
following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned
off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7
mph (12 km/h) (except when rever-
sing).
. The select lever is in the “R” position
(RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator does not appear (except when
reversing).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will stop operating and the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator will
appear.
– When a malfunction occurs in the
system, including the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light
. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator
appears, exercise proper caution.
For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA
Warning Indicator” �P363.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
359
7
Starting and Operating
(362,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operat-
ing (or may stop operating) and the
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will ap-
pear.
– When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the
orientation of the radar sensor is
shifted for any reason, readjust-
ment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
– When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper
surface around the radar sensors
– When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an en-
vironment in which there are no
objects around (such as in a
desert) for a prolonged period of
time
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors increases exces-
sively due to long driving on
uphill grades in the summer, etc.
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors becomes extre-
mely low
– When the 12 V battery voltage
lowers
– When the vehicle voltage ex-
ceeds the battery voltage rating
The BSD/RCTA will resume opera-
tion once these conditions are cor-
rected, and the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator will disappear. However,
if the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ap-
pears for a prolonged period of time,
have the system inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
. The detectability of the radar sen-
sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA
detection may be impaired and the
system may not operate properly
under the following conditions.
– When the rear bumper around the
radar sensors is distorted
– When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface
around the radar sensors
– When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on
the rear bumper
– During adverse weather condi-
tions such as rain, snow or fog
– When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads and
through puddles
. The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the
following vehicles and objects.
– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
destrians, stationary objects on
the road or road side, etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that
the radar may not reflect (vehi-
cles with lower body height such
as a trailer with no cargo and
sports cars)
– Vehicles that are not approaching
your vehicle even though they
are in the detection area (either
on a neighboring lane to the rear
or beside your vehicle when
reversing) (The system deter-
mines the presence of approach-
ing vehicles based on data de-
tected by the radar sensors.)
– Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-
most the same speed as your
vehicle for a prolonged time
– Oncoming vehicles
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
– Vehicles traveling at a signifi-
cantly lower speed that you are
trying to overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehi-
cles driving in a lane next to the
neighboring lane.
BSD/RCTA
360
(363,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& BSD/RCTA Approach Indica-
tor Light/Warning Buzzer
s07bm03
While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-
ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver:
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light (when there are vehicles in the
neighboring lanes).
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light and warning buzzer (when a
vehicle is approaching from the left or
right side while your vehicle is rever-
sing).
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
s07bm0301
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted on each side of the outside
mirrors.
The indicator light will illuminate when a
vehicle approaching from behind is de-
tected.
The indicator light will flash to warn the
driver of dangers under the following
conditions.
. While the indicator light is illuminating, if
the turn signal lever is operated toward
the side in which this light turned on
. When reversing the vehicle while the
system detects a vehicle approaching
from either side
Vehicle detected in adjacent lane indicator
1 When a vehicle is detected (white area
with yellow outline is indicated)
2 When the turn signal lever is being
operated while a vehicle is detected
(yellow area is indicated)
3 Your vehicle indicator*
1
When your vehicle indicator*
1
is displayed,
the combination meter also shows the
vehicle detection status of the adjacent
lane.
*1: For details regarding your vehicle indicator,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for
the EyeSight system.
NOTE
. When your vehicle indicator is
turned off or your vehicle is rever-
sing, the meter display will not dis-
play the vehicle detected in adjacent
lane indicator.
. When the EyeSight system is mal-
functioning or is not functioning
temporarily, the vehicle detected in
adjacent lane indicator is displayed
even if your vehicle indicator is not
shown.
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
s07bm030101
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. You may have difficulty seeing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
under the following conditions.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
361
7
Starting and Operating
(364,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
– When sunlight shines directly on
it
– When the headlight beams from a
vehicle traveling behind shines
directly on it
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in the fully upward
position, even if the headlights are
turned on, the brightness of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
will not be reduced. For details about
the illumination brightness control
dial, refer to “Illumination Bright-
ness Control” �P165.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
zer (only when reversing)
s07bm0302
A warning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
“Car settings” �P214.
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light/warning
buzzer
s07bm0303
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
and the warning buzzer may be de-
layed or the system may fail to issue
these warnings.
– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
boring lane from a lane next to the
neighboring lane
– When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and down-
hill grades
– When going beyond a pass
– When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring
lane are driving on the far side of
each lane.
– When several narrowly-spaced ve-
hicles are approaching in a row
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersec-
tion)
– When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neigh-
boring lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by touching “Rear Vehicle
Detection (BSD/RCTA)”
– Immediately after the select lever is
shifted to the “R” position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
under the following conditions.
– When backing out of an angled
parking space
– When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
– When reversing on sloped roads
– When reversing at a high speed
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close
to solid objects on the road or road side
(such as guardrails, tunnels and side-
walls).
. When turning at an intersection in
urban areas, or a multilane intersection,
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may flash.
. If a building or a wall exists in the
reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA
BSD/RCTA
362
(365,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
approach indicator light may flash and
the warning buzzer may sound.
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
– When your vehicle drives on the
near side of its lane from the
corresponding vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
away drives on the near side of its
lane from your vehicle
& BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator
s07bm08
! System temporary stops
s07bm0801
1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the system is
used at extremely high or low tempera-
tures or when abnormal voltage exists.
Once these conditions are corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will dis-
appear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
! System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
s07bm0802
1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due
to reduced radar sensitivity
2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the detectabil-
ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once
the condition is corrected, the system will
recover from the temporary stop condition
and the indicator will disappear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
& BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator
s07bm04
! System malfunction
s07bm0403
1 BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2 At first, this message will appear
3 Then this message will appear
4 BSD/RCTA warning indicator
This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
363
7
Starting and Operating
(366,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA
s07bm09
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off,
operate the center information display.
Refer to “Car settings” �P214.
When the BSD/RCTA system is turned
OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the
combination meter display will illuminate.
NOTE
. If you turn off the BSD/RCTA, some
EyeSight functions will also be de-
activated. For details, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the
EyeSight system.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position, the last known sta-
tus of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position with
the BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/
RCTA remains deactivated the next
time the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
& Certification for the BSD/
RCTA
s07bm06
. The U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
. Canada-spec. models
BSD/RCTA
364
(367,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Handling of Radar Sensors
s07bm07
Radar sensors
The radar sensors, one on each side of the
vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
CAUTION
To ensure correct operation of the
BSD/RCTA, observe the following
precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near
the radar sensors. For details,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Do not modify the bumper near
the radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near
the radar sensors to strong im-
pacts. If a sensor becomes mis-
aligned, a system malfunction
may occur, including the inability
to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong
shock is applied to the bumper,
be sure to contact your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar
sensors.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
365
7
Starting and Operating
(368,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.
7-20. Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) System (If
Equipped)
s07bn
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a
system designed to help avoid collisions or
reduce collision damage when reversing
the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is
detected in the reversing direction, the
system will notify the driver with a warning
sound and may activate the vehicle’s
brakes automatically.
WARNING
. Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) is not a system intended
to replace the driver’s responsi-
bility to check their surroundings
for vehicles or obstacles to avoid
a collision.
. The driver is responsible for driv-
ing safely. Before reversing, be
sure to first depress the brake
pedal and visually check the
surroundings.
. There are some cases in which
the vehicle cannot avoid colli-
sion, because the system opera-
tion has limitations. The warning
sound or automatic braking may
be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is
present.
. Make sure to set the Automatic
Braking function to OFF when the
vehicle is on the free roller or on
the chassis dynamometer. Other-
wise, the vehicle may move and it
may cause an accident.
. Make sure to set the Automatic
Braking function to OFF when
towing a trailer. Otherwise, the
vehicle may move and it may
cause an accident.
. The system is not designed to
detect people (including chil-
dren), animals or other moving
objects.
. Depending on the vehicle condi-
tion or the surrounding environ-
ment, the sonar sensor’s ability
to detect objects may become
unstable.
. When an attachment part (trailer
hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper
guard) is installed on the rear of
the vehicle, turn off the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB). If this
function is on when an attach-
ment or a similar part is installed,
it may result in a system malfunc-
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
366
(369,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
tion that causes an accident
resulting in serious damage, in-
jury or death.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system records and stores the follow-
ing data when automatic braking oper-
ates. It does not record conversations,
personal information or other audio
data.
. Distance from the object
. Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status
. Brake pedal operation status
. Select lever position
. Outside temperature
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
cle research and development.
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU will not disclose or provide
the acquired data to any other third
party except under the following con-
ditions.
. The vehicle owner has given his/her
consent.
. The disclosure/provision is based
on a court order or other legally
enforceable request.
. Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be
identified is provided to a research
institution for statistical processing
or similar purposes.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Overview
s07bn01
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate the following 2 func-
tions using 4 sonar sensors.
. Sonar Audible Alarm function
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system detects objects rearward and
warns the driver by warning message on
the center information display and warning
beeps.
. Automatic Braking function
The Automatic Braking function detects
objects rearward and if there is a high risk
of a collision, the system decelerates the
vehicle and controls the braking to reduce
damage.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
367
7
Starting and Operating
(370,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 When reversing
2 When either strong automatic braking or
torque control is applied to prevent
collision (in this case, short warning
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound)
3 When the vehicle is stopped by the
system (in this case, the continuous
beep will remain sounding)
4 Object (e.g., a wall)
! Detecting range
s07bn0101
1 Detecting range (width): Approximately 6
in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
2 Range that the system cannot detect:
Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle
3 Detecting range (length): Approximately
5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-
road crossing and you are trying to
escape by reversing through the
crossing gate, the system may re-
cognize the crossing gate as an
obstacle and brake may activate. In
this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system. To
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
368
(371,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Operation” �P376.
& Operating Conditions
s07bn02
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate when all of the follow-
ing conditions are met.
1 EyeSight warning indicator
2 RAB warning indicator
3 RAB OFF indicator
4 Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
. The RAB warning indicator is off.
. The RAB OFF indicator is off.
. The select lever is in the “R” position.
. Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator is
off.
Sonar Audible Alarm function
. Sonar Audible Alarm is set to “ON”.
. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0
to 15 km/h).
Automatic Braking function
. Automatic Braking is set to “ON”.
. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph
(1.5 to 15 km/h).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system
will not operate. Promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
is illuminated.
– The RAB warning indicator is
illuminated.
. In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system
cannot be operated.
– The
(EyeSight Temporary Stop
indicator: White) is illuminated,
and the messages correspond-
ing to the EyeSight temporary
stop are displayed on the combi-
nation meter display. For details,
refer to the Owner’s Manual sup-
plement for the EyeSight system.
– The RAB OFF indicator is illumi-
nated.
. In the following cases, the functions
may not be able to properly work.
Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
applied to the sonar sensors or
the rear bumper.
– The rear bumper is modified.
– The rear bumper has been re-
moved and attached.
– The ground clearance is changed
due to the vehicle’s loading con-
dition or modification.
– There is damage to the sonar
sensors or the rear bumper.
– The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear bumper
is deformed.
. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-
matic braking ability will be reduced.
. The system is designed to avoid
collisions by automatic hard braking
when the vehicle’s reversing speed
is less than approximately 3 mph (5
km/h). However, the system does not
guarantee that the vehicle will be
able to avoid collisions in any situa-
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
369
7
Starting and Operating
(372,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
tion.
. If the vehicle is reversed at an
extremely slow speed, the driver’s
operation may be prioritized. In this
case, automatic braking will not
operate.
. In the following situations, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect an
object correctly:
– When the vehicle is approaching
diagonally to an object
– When the steering wheel is
turned greatly
. The system may not be able to detect
and apply the brake with the follow-
ing objects.
– Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which
may not reflect the sound wave
emitted from the sonar sensor.
– Objects that are too close to the
rear bumper when the select
lever is set to the “R” position.
– Objects with a surface which may
not reflect the sound wave
emitted from the sonar sensor
such as a chain link fence or
bicycle.
. Objects the system is not designed
to detect and apply brake.
– Pedestrians.
– Moving objects including moving
vehicles.
– Objects which absorbs sound
waves such as cloth or snow.
– Objects whose surface has a
diagonal angle.
– Objects that are low to the ground
such as parking blocks.
– Objects that are high above the
ground such as objects hanging
from above.
– Objects that are out of range of
the center of the vehicle in the
horizontal direction.
– Objects that are not perpendicu-
lar to the ground.
– The surface of the object is
uneven or wavy.
. When reversing the vehicle, the
functions may not be able to work
properly or may cause a system
malfunction if the following condi-
tions exist.
High frequency sound from other
sources are nearby:
– Horn sound from another vehicle.
– Engine sound from other vehi-
cles.
– Sound of an air brake.
– Vehicle detection equipment or a
sonar from another vehicle.
– A sound wave with a frequency
similar to the vehicle’s system is
transmitted near by.
– A vehicle equipped with the same
system is reversing toward your
reversing direction.
Weather conditions:
– Extremely high or extremely low
temperatures in which the area
near the sonar sensor becomes
too hot or too cold to operate.
– The sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors
are exposed to heavy rain or a
significant amount of water.
– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
– Air is moving rapidly such as
when a strong wind is blowing.
Parts attached to the rear bumper
near the sonar sensor:
– Commercial electronic parts (fog
light, fender pole, radio antenna)
are attached.
– Parts that emit high frequency
sound, such as a horn or speaker,
are attached.
Vehicle conditions:
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensor.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
370
(373,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
– The vehicle is significantly in-
clined.
– The ground clearance is signifi-
cantly reduced due to the vehi-
cle’s loading condition, etc.
– When the sonar sensor is mis-
aligned due to a collision or an
accident.
Surrounding environment:
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing bars
are present in the reversing di-
rection.
– When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area.
– When reversing in an area where
objects or walls are adjacent to
the vehicle such as narrow tun-
nels, narrow bridges, narrow
roads or narrow garages.
– Wheel track or hole is present in
the ground of the reversing direc-
tion.
– When reversing over a drainage
cover (grating cover).
– The path of the reversing direc-
tion is inclined such as on a steep
uphill.
– When reversing downhill.
– A curb or step is present in the
reversing direction.
– Reversing in a garage with a low
ceiling or a tunnel.
– There is a patch of snow rear-
ward.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
371
7
Starting and Operating
(374,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
– There is a puddle of water.
– There is an obstacle that is next
to an object.
– Going back along a wall.
– The area where the road starts
touching dirt and snow
– When reversing on an uneven
road.
. In circumstances such as the follow-
ing, it may not be possible to avoid a
collision even when the system
operates normally.
– Roads are slippery.
– The tire air pressure is not cor-
rect.
– The tires have become worn.
– Tire chains are installed.
– Tires which are not the desig-
nated size are installed.
– Emergency repairs were per-
formed using a puncture repair
kit.
– The suspension was modified.
– Vehicle driving is unstable due to
accident or malfunction.
– The brake warning light is illumi-
nated.
& Sonar Audible Alarm Func-
tion
s07bn03
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system is in operation, audible
warning beeps will sound to warn the
driver of a potential collision in 3 levels:
medium proximity, short proximity, closest
proximity.
NOTE
It may take time to display the wall and
sound warning beeps after the object
was recognized by the Sonar Audible
Alarm function.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
372
(375,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Guideline of detecting range
Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity alert
(object detected)
43 to 59 in (110 to 150 cm) Green No warning sound
Medium proximity
alert (approaching the
object)
28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm) Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert
(approaching closer
to the object)
20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity
alert (too close to the
object)
20 in (50 cm) or less Red
Continuous beep
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
! Obstacle detected and alert level
s07bn0301
When an object is detected in the rever-
sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the center information
display and combination meter display.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
Combination meter display
1 Long proximity alert (green)
2 Medium proximity alert (yellow)
3 Short proximity alert (orange)
4 Closest proximity alert (red)
The alert levels are indicated on the center
information display as shown in the follow-
ing.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
373
7
Starting and Operating
(376,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Long proximity alert (object detected)
1 Green: 43 to 59 in (110 to 150 cm)
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
1 Yellow: 28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm)
Short proximity alert (approaching the
object closer)
1 Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)
Closest proximity alert (too close to the
object)
1 Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less
& Automatic Braking Function
Operation
s07bn08
! Object close behind warning
s07bn0801
Automatic braking warning
1 Warning message
If the system determine the risk of collision
with the object. Short warning beeps or
continuous warning beeps will sound and
either strong automatic braking or torque
control will be applied to prevent collision.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
374
(377,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Depress brake pedal warning
1 Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is
depressed, a message will be displayed
on the center information display and the
continuous beep will remain sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play.
NOTE
The Sonar Audible Alarm function and
Automatic Braking function are differ-
ent in operation conditions. Therefore,
there are cases in which only one of
these functions will activate.
WARNING
Depress the brake pedal immedi-
ately after the system stops the
vehicle by automatic braking. De-
pending on the conditions of the
road surface and tires, the vehicle
may not remain stopped, possibly
leading to an accident.
! After the vehicle is stopped by the
system
s07bn0802
After the brake pedal is depressed, the
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the
system will temporarily stop operating.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
the select lever is shifted to a position other
than the “R” position.
The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position.
NOTE
. In the following cases, after the
vehicle has been stopped by the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system, brake control is released
and the electronic parking brake
operates. For details about releasing
the parking brake, refer to “Electro-
nic Parking Brake” �P336.
– When 2 minutes pass after the
vehicle is stopped
– When any door is opened
. The Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system may stop operating
temporarily in the following cases
and the RAB OFF indicator will
illuminate.
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensor.
– Objects are too close to the rear
bumper when the select lever is
set to the “R” position.
– The system detects sounds of a
similar frequency to the RAB
sonar.
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF mode is selected.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
375
7
Starting and Operating
(378,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Canceling the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) System
Operation
s07bn04
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system can be temporarily canceled by
any of the following operations.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the
brake pedal is depressed.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
. The accelerator pedal is depressed
continuously (In this case, limited ac-
celeration will be canceled and the
vehicle will continue reversing.)
. The select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the
object is no longer detected.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System ON/OFF
Setting
s07bn05
While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
can be set by operating the center in-
formation display.
1 ON setting key of Automatic Braking
function
2 OFF setting key of Automatic Braking
function
3 ON setting key of the Sonar Audible
Alarm function
4 OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible
Alarm function
When the ON setting key is shown, the
corresponding setting is ON.
Touch the ON setting key to turn the setting
OFF.
When the OFF setting is shown, the
corresponding setting is OFF.
Touch the OFF setting key to turn the
setting ON.
When the Automatic Braking function or
the Sonar Audible Alarm function is turned
OFF, the following indicator(s) will illumi-
nate.
1 Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator
2 RAB OFF indicator
The RAB OFF indicator or the Sonar
Audible Alarm OFF indicator will turn off
when the corresponding function is turned
ON.
NOTE
. When the settings cannot be chan-
ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be
grayed out.
. The ON/OFF setting key may be
grayed out if the Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system malfunctions,
etc. In this case, turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position and
then turn it to the “ON” position
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
376
(379,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
again. If the setting cannot be chan-
ged even after turning the ignition
switch to the “ON” position again,
we recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
. As soon as you turn off the ignition
switch, the Reverse Automatic Brak-
ing (RAB) ON/OFF setting is stored
in the system. Therefore, when you
turn the ignition switch from the
“OFF” state to the “ON” position,
the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) setting will revert to the state
that was set before the ignition
switch was turned off.
. When you turn the ignition switch
off, the Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF
settings will always reset, and the
system will not store the settings of
the function. Therefore, every time
you turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, the Sonar Audible
Alarm will turn on automatically.
Also, the following settings can be chan-
ged by operating the center information
display.
. Warning volume
. Sonar Audible Alarm
For details, refer to “Car settings” �P214.
& RAB Warning Indicator
s07bn07
1 RAB malfunction message
2 RAB warning indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system malfunctions, the above indicator
illuminates on the combination meter.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
& Handling of the Sonar Sen-
sors
s07bn06
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of
the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system, observe the following precau-
tions.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the rear bumper
surface.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface clean.
. Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Do not paint the rear bumper.
. Do not apply high pressure water to the
sonar sensors with a high pressure car-
washing machine.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper. If a sensor becomes misa-
ligned, a system malfunction may oc-
cur, including inability to detect objects
in the reversing direction. If any strong
impact is applied to the rear bumper,
contact a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
377
7
Starting and Operating
(380,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors re-
quires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
7-21. Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem (If Equipped)
s07bp
Driver Monitoring System is introduced as
DriverFocus in some countries.
The Driver Monitoring System monitors
possible cases when the driver is not
paying attention to the forward direction,
and also recognizes individual users.
This system warns the driver of inattentive/
drowsy driving, and can support safe and
comfortable driving by automatically re-
trieving the following settings.
– Climate control setting
– Meter setting
– Center information display setting
When a user is registered, various settings
are automatically retrieved when the user
enters the vehicle.
1 Camera
CAUTION
. Always use the utmost care in
driving
– Overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the
Driver Monitoring System
could easily lead to a serious
accident.
. This system cannot detect if the
driver is feeling drowsy or is
concentrating on safe driving.
. It cannot judge if the driver is
awake or asleep, if their driving
abilities have diminished, or if
they are concentrating on safe
Driver Monitoring System
378
(381,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
driving.
. In some circumstances, the sys-
tem may not be able to correctly
detect the driver state.
NOTE
. The user recognition camera does
not save images, audio, or video.
. The Driver Monitoring System may
not operate correctly when sunlight
is shining into the vehicle in the
following ways.
– Sunlight is shining directly (or
through glass) onto the user
recognition camera.
– There are shadows on the dri-
ver’s face caused by sunlight (or
any light with a strong infrared
component).
– There are large momentary fluc-
tuations in the strength of the
sunlight (or any light with a
strong infrared component) shin-
ing on the face.
. Correct detection may not be possi-
ble when a device that includes an
infrared light source (such as a
commercially available Driver Mon-
itoring System) is installed in the
vehicle interior.
. The Driver Monitoring System may
not operate correctly at the following
times when the driver is wearing
glasses or sunglasses.
– The sunglasses do not allow the
easy passage of infrared light.
– The surrounding scenery is re-
flected strongly in the lenses of
the glasses or sunglasses.
– The eyes are hidden by the frame
of the glasses and the user
recognition camera cannot de-
tect the eyes.
– The light from an infrared light
source (LED) is reflected in the
lenses of the glasses or sun-
glasses.
– The driver is wearing an eye-
patch.
– The driver is wearing a hat set
deeply over the eyes.
. Depending on the type of mask,
correct detection of inattentive/
drowsy driving may not be possible.
. Correct user recognition is not pos-
sible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is
covered with a mask, muffler, sun-
glasses, or other item.
. The Driver Monitoring System may
not operate correctly when the eye-
brows, eyes, nose, or mouth is
hidden due to item that is between
the face and the system.
. If a thick cover is attached to the
steering wheel, then depending on
the position set for the tilt/telescopic
steering wheel, the cover may block
the system’s view of the face, and
the system and the Driver Monitor-
ing System may not operate cor-
rectly.
. Do not attach any stickers to the
user recognition camera or the infra-
red light source (LED). If the user
recognition camera or infrared light
source (LED) is covered by an
obstruction, it will not be possible
to correctly monitor the driver.
. If an accessory is hung from the
inside mirror, correct detection may
not be possible.
. Do not touch the user recognition
camera or the infrared light source
(LED) directly with your fingers. If
there is dirt or a fingerprint on these
parts, it will not be possible to
correctly monitor the driver. If there
is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts,
either wipe them with a soft dry
cloth, or wipe gently with a damp
cloth after first firmly wringing the
water out.
. If the surface of the user recognition
camera or the infrared light source
(LED) becomes scratched, correct
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
379
7
Starting and Operating
(382,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
detection may not be possible. Be
careful that hard objects do not
contact these parts.
. If there is condensation on the user
recognition camera or the infrared
light source (LED), correct detection
may not be possible. If there is
condensation on these parts, wipe
it away with a soft dry cloth.
. When registering a user for user
recognition, avoid closing your eyes
as much as possible.
. If the user recognition success rate
is low, it is possible that the user is
not correctly registered. Delete the
registered data and perform regis-
tration again.
. If a user frequently drives both with
glasses and contact lenses, it is
recommended that registration be
performed both when wearing
glasses and when wearing contact
lenses.
. User recognition starts immediately
after entering the vehicle, however if
the user looks downward or at the
driver side mirror for a long time, the
user may not be recognized.
. When one person among twins or
another pair of persons with similar
facial features is registered, the
other person may be incorrectly
recognized as the registered user
when entering the vehicle.
. If the person in the passenger’s seat
leans into the driver’s seat, or in
other cases when there are two or
more faces near the driver’s seat, the
system may not operate correctly.
. There are cases when the system
concludes that the user’s eyes are
closed when the user is looking
downward during driving, such as
when checking instruments or the
navigation screen. In such cases,
the drowsy driving warning buzzer
may sound or the system may
otherwise not operate correctly.
. If the eyes are narrowed when laugh-
ing or when there is a dazzling
outside light, the system may judge
that the eyes are closed and the
drowsy driving warning buzzer may
sound or the system may otherwise
not operate correctly.
. The drowsy driving or asleep warn-
ing states are recognized from the
length of time and percentage of
time that the eyes are closed. The
drowsy driving warning buzzer will
not sound simply when the driver
feels sleepy or yawns.
. Even when the driver does not feel
sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed
or if he or she blinks frequently, the
drowsy driving warning buzzer may
sound.
. The inattentive driving warning buz-
zer may sound if the driver leans
forward or puts his or her head out of
the window while driving.
. The inattentive driving warning buz-
zer will not sound when the vehicle
is stopped or traveling at slow speed
even if the driver is not looking
ahead.
. The Driver Monitoring System col-
lects and stores data regarding
drivers’ facial features. Facial recog-
nition data is stored locally and does
not leave the vehicle. It is not
transmitted to or stored by SUBARU
or anyone else. The Driver Monitor-
ing System may be disabled and any
stored driver data may be deleted by
following the instructions below. If
the Driver Monitoring System is
disabled, it will be unable to provide
any of its safety or convenience
functions.
Driver Monitoring System
380
(383,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System
setting and the user recognition function setting.
Available functions
Driver Monitoring System*
1
ON OFF
User recognition
function*
2
ON
Inattentive/drowsy
driving warning
Available Not available
User recognition
function
Available Not available
OFF
Inattentive/drowsy
driving warning
Available Not available
User recognition
function
Not available
Not available
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
381
7
Starting and Operating
(384,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Available function items
Driver Monitoring System*
1
ON OFF
User recognition
function*
2
ON
Register User Available Not available
Delete User Available Not available
Delete All Users Available Not available
OFF
Register User Not available Not available
Delete User Available Not available
Delete All Users Available
Not available
*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer to “
Car settings”
�P214.
*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings.
Refer to “
Car settings” �P214.
The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is
registered.
Available functions
The user is registered. The user is not registered.
User recognition function Available
Not available
& User Recognition Function
s07bp01
When a user is registered, it is possible to
retrieve the following settings.
! Meter personalization
s07bp0102
. Combination meter display basic
screen
Displays the screen which the user had
selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
! Center information display perso-
nalization
s07bp0103
. Center information display basic
screen
Displays the screen which the user had
selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
. Fuel consumption screen
Displays the average fuel economy for
past driving by that user.
! Climate control personalization
s07bp0104
. Climate control settings
Retrieves the preferred setting tempera-
ture, airflow mode selection, and other
settings which the user had selected at the
time when he/she last exited the vehicle.
NOTE
When a recognized user exits the
vehicle while the MAX A/C mode is on
Driver Monitoring System
382
(385,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
and the push engine switch is turned
off, the system stores the setting con-
figured before MAX A/C mode was
turned on.
! Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF
status
s07bp0105
Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System
ON/OFF status which the user had se-
lected at the time when he/she last exited
the vehicle.
! Changing the personalization settings
s07bp0106
Item
Meter personalization*
Combination meter display ba-
sic screen
When the customization screen
linked with the synchronized
user function is selected and
the setting is changed, it is
automatically stored.
Climate control personaliza-
tion*
Climate control settings
Center information display
personalization*
Center information display ba-
sic screen/fuel consumption
screen
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status
*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the
conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the
screen was selected and the setting was changed.
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
383
7
Starting and Operating
(386,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Inattentive/Drowsy Driving
Warning
s07bp02
While driving, the Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem monitors possible cases of driver
inattention or drowsiness and warns the
driver.
When the inattentive/drowsy driving warn-
ing activates, the buzzer sounds and an
interrupt display appears.
NOTE
. The inattentive/drowsy driving warn-
ing operates regardless of the status
of the user recognition function.
. The inattentive driving warning does
not activate when the turn signal is
operating or when the select lever is
in the “R” position.
. When the pre-collision brake system
OFF indicator is illuminated on the
combination meter display, the in-
attentive driving warning activates
at the same timing as usual even
when a vehicle ahead or obstacle is
detected. For details about the
EyeSight system, refer to the Own-
er’s Manual supplement for the
EyeSight system.
! Inattentive driving warning
s07bp0201
When the system monitors that the driver
may be inattentive, it warns the driver.
When the inattentive driving warning acti-
vates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt
display appears on the combination meter
display.
When the EyeSight system has detected a
vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward
direction, the inattentive driving warning
may activate at earlier timing than usual.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
NOTE
When Adaptive Cruise Control and the
Lane Centering function are active,
warning screens other than the inatten-
tive driving warning are displayed on
the combination meter display. For de-
tails, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight system.
Driver Monitoring System
384
(387,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Drowsy driving warning
s07bp0202
Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning
is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and
an interrupt display appears.
Combination meter
display
Center information
display
Warning chime
Drowsy driving
Beep, beep... (Con-
tinues until the driver’s
eyes open.)
Very drowsy
Beep, beep, beep,
beep, beep (5 times)
Slightly drowsy
— Beep
Not drowsy — —
—
NOTE
When Adaptive Cruise Control and the Lane Centering function are active, warning
screens other than the drowsy driving warning are displayed on the combination
meter display. For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
& Driver Monitoring System In-
dicator/Warning
s07bp03
1 Driver Monitoring System operation in-
dicator light (green)
2 Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator
light
3 Driver Monitoring System temporary stop
indicator light
4 Driver Monitoring System warning light
(yellow)
The Driver Monitoring System indicator/
warning indicates the status of the Driver
Monitoring System on the combination
meter display.
NOTE
When the Driver Monitoring System
OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop indicator, or Driver
Monitoring System warning is illumi-
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
385
7
Starting and Operating
(388,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
nated, the Driver Monitoring System
function cannot be used. In addition,
the following items cannot be selected.
. Register User
. Delete User
. Delete All Users
! Driver Monitoring System operation
indicator light (green)
s07bp0301
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is operating.
! Driver Monitoring System OFF in-
dicator light
s07bp0302
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is turned off. Even if the
system is turned off, functions such as
inattentive/drowsy driving detection will
remain active when Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol and the Lane Centering function are
ON. For details, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight sys-
tem.
! Driver Monitoring System tempor-
ary stop indicator light
s07bp0303
This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
The Driver Monitoring System stops
temporarily in the following circum-
stances.
. When the temperature of the main
unit of the Driver Monitoring System
is high or low.
. When the Driver Monitoring System
cannot monitor the driver’s eye
movement.
. When the Driver Monitoring System
cannot monitor the driver’s eye-
brows, eyes, nose or mouth.
. When the camera and the infrared
light source (LED) are covered and
the Driver Monitoring System can-
not monitor the driver correctly.
! Driver Monitoring System warning
light (yellow)
s07bp0304
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
& Using the Driver Monitoring
System
s07bp04
! User recognition
s07bp0401
When a user is registered with the user
recognition function, the Driver Monitoring
System performs the following.
1. When the door is opened and the
push-button ignition switch is OFF,
the user recognition screen appears
and the Driver Monitoring system
starts user recognition.
The user recognition screen may not
appear when the door is opened in
some cases, such as when only a short
time has passed after the push-button
ignition switch was turned OFF. In such
cases, user recognition starts when the
door is closed however the user
recognition screen does not appear.
Driver Monitoring System
386
(389,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face forward
for a few moments.
3. When user recognition is completed,
the Hello screen appears on the
combination meter display.
At this time, climate control settings,
combination meter display basic screen,
center information display basic screen,
and customization settings all change
based on the user information.
NOTE
. When a center information display
operation switch is pressed, the
user recognition screen is canceled,
however user recognition con-
tinues.
. If user recognition fails, perform
recognition again following the in-
structions, refer to “When a user is
not recognized” �P387.
. User recognition is not performed
while driving.
! When a user is not recognized
s07bp0402
In the following case, user recognition may
not be possible and “User recognition
stopped.” may be displayed.
. There is an object blocking the camera.
Remove the obstacle and follow the
reference procedure to perform user re-
cognition again.
Refer to “Driver Monitoring System”
�P220.
1 Camera
NOTE
. User recognition may not be possi-
ble when there is dirt or fingerprints
on the user recognition camera. To
clean, either wipe using a soft cloth
or else wipe gently using a mois-
tened cloth that has been thoroughly
wrung out.
. When the synchronized user func-
tion is turned OFF, manual repeat
facial scan is not possible.
& Registering and Deleting a
User
s07bp05
Users can be registered in the Driver
Monitoring System, and registered users
can be deleted. For the user registration
and delete procedures, refer to “Driver
Monitoring System” �P220.
NOTE
. When the Driver Monitoring System
OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring
System temporary stop indicator,
or Driver Monitoring System warn-
ing is illuminated, the following
items cannot be selected.
– Register User
– Delete User
– Delete All Users
. User information can also be deleted
by resetting the center information
– CONTINUED –
Driver Monitoring System
387
7
Starting and Operating
(390,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
display to the factory default set-
tings. When the settings are reset to
the factory default settings, all user
information is deleted. The settings
cannot be reset to the factory default
settings when the Driver Monitoring
System is OFF.
& Driver Monitoring System
ON/OFF Settings
s07bp07
NOTE
. When the Driver Monitoring System
is turned OFF after user recognition
was completed, the user recognition
function stores the Driver Monitor-
ing System ON/OFF state.
. Even when the Driver Monitoring
System is set to OFF, the Driver
Monitoring System automatically
turns ON once the driver’s door is
opened and closed while the vehicle
is stopped. This only occurs when
the user recognition setting is ON.
The system then reverts automati-
cally to the OFF state.
. After the Driver Monitoring System
was turned OFF, if the Driver Mon-
itoring System is turned ON while
the driver’s door is open, user
recognition may not occur correctly.
! To turn on/off the Driver Monitoring
System
s07bp0701
To turn the Driver Monitoring System on
and off, operate the center information
display. Refer to “Car settings” �P214.
When the Driver Monitoring System is
turned OFF, the Driver Monitoring System
OFF indicator on the combination meter
display will illuminate.
NOTE
Even when the Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem is turned off, the user recognition
does not switch on or off automatically.
! User recognition settings
s07bp0702
The Driver Monitoring System User recog-
nition function can be turned ON/OFF. For
the setting procedure, refer to “Car set-
tings” �P214.
NOTE
. The user recognition function
setting cannot be changed for each
individual user.
. The default setting for the user
recognition function is ON.
. When the user recognition function
is turned OFF, the following items
cannot be selected.
– Repeat Facial Scan
– Register User
& How to Get the Source Code
That Uses Open Source Soft-
ware
s07bp09
Free Open-Source Software Information
This product uses Free Open-Source
Software (FOSS).
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL:
http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/
RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0101/
Driver Monitoring System
388
(391,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(392,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(393,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s08
8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First
1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 392
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints ....................................... 392
8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)...... 392
8-4. Catalytic Converter......................................... 393
8-5. Periodic Inspections....................................... 394
8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries ......................... 394
8-7. Frequent Driving Prevents Vehicle Battery
from Discharging .......................................... 394
8-8. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles ...................... 395
8-9. On-Road and Off-Road Driving...................... 396
Before Driving .................................................... 397
During Driving ....................................................397
After Driving....................................................... 398
8-10. Winter Driving ............................................... 398
Operation during Cold Weather........................... 398
Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads ........................ 399
Corrosion Protection .......................................... 400
Snow Tires......................................................... 401
Tire Chains ........................................................ 401
Rocking the Vehicle ........................................... 402
8-11. Loading Your Vehicle ....................................402
Vehicle Capacity Weight ..................................... 403
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 403
Roof Rail............................................................ 404
Roof Tent ........................................................... 405
8-12. Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option).........................406
Connecting a SUBARU Genuine Trailer Hitch...... 408
If Not Towing a Trailer ........................................ 409
8-13. Trailer Towing ................................................409
Warranties and Maintenance............................... 409
Maximum Load Limits ........................................ 409
Trailer Hitches (Dealer Option)............................ 413
When You Do Not Tow a Trailer .......................... 414
Connecting a Trailer ........................................... 414
Trailer Towing Tips............................................. 415
Driving Tips
8
Driving Tips
(394,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
8-1. New Vehicle Break-In
Driving – the First 1,000 miles
(1,600 km)
s08aa
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000
rpm except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast
or slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-
celeration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-
gency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or when brake pads are replaced
with new ones.
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints
s08ab
The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire inflation
pressure label, which is located under
the door latch on the driver’s side. Low
pressure will increase tire wear and fuel
consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. The indication of the ECO area for
power meter shows a reference for
saving fuel. For details, refer to “Power
Meter” �P162.
8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas
(Carbon Monoxide)
s08ac
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
392
(395,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
8-4. Catalytic Converter
s08ad
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring,
backfiring or incomplete combustion),
have your vehicle checked and re-
paired by an authorized SUBARU deal-
er.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the exhaust
system.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Catalytic Converter
393
8
Driving Tips
(396,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
8-5. Periodic Inspections
s08ae
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
8-6. Driving in Foreign Coun-
tries
s08af
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel Requirements”
�P297.
. Comply with all regulations and require-
ments of each country.
8-7. Frequent Driving Pre-
vents Vehicle Battery from
Discharging
s08au
Vehicle batteries are a consumable item. If
the battery charge is not maintained
regularly, the battery will deteriorate and
may require replacement sooner than
expected. The battery is charged while
the hybrid READY indicator light is illumi-
nated. It is recommended to drive the car
for a longer time occasionally to prevent
the vehicle battery from becoming drained,
especially if it is regularly driven only a
short time daily (e.g. only 10 minutes) or if
it is parked for 10 days or more. It may be
possible to recover the state of charge and
maintain the battery performance by driv-
ing for a longer time (e.g. more than 30
minutes). If you cannot drive enough, we
recommend to charge the battery as
needed. If no action is taken, the battery
will become discharged. This is a normal
characteristic of any battery.
Periodic Inspections
394
(397,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
8-8. Driving Tips for AWD Ve-
hicles
s08ag
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the dri-
ver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechan-
ical damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the hybrid
system power to all four wheels. AWD
vehicles provide better traction when driv-
ing on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads
and when moving out of mud, dirt and
sand. By shifting power between the front
and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during accelera-
tion, and added engine braking force
during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging the
AWD system, you should keep the follow-
ing tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
– CONTINUED –
Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles
395
8
Driving Tips
(398,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
conditions than a two wheel drive
vehicle. There is little difference in
handling, however, during extremely
sharp turns or sudden braking. There-
fore, when driving down a slope or
turning corners, be sure to reduce your
speed and maintain an ample distance
from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recom-
mended tire pressure is provided on the
tire inflation pressure label, which is
located on the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
steep hills or dusty roads will necessi-
tate more frequent replacement of the
following items than that specified in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
– Rear differential gear oil
– Continuously variable transmission
fluid
– Front differential gear oil
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehi-
cle. For detailed information, refer to
“Towing” �P435.
8-9. On-Road and Off-Road
Driving
s08ah
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. Never attempt to drive through
pools and puddles, or roads
flooded with water. Water enter-
ing the engine air intake or the
exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage
your vehicle and may cause it to
stall. In this case, contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately. Re-
gardless of its depth, it can wash
away the ground from under your
tires, resulting in possible loss of
traction and even vehicle roll-
over.
CAUTION
. Frequent driving of an AWD mod-
el under hard-driving conditions
such as rough roads or off roads
will necessitate more frequent
replacement of the following
items than that specified in the
maintenance schedule described
in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
Remember that damage done to
your SUBARU while operating it
off-road and not using common
On-Road and Off-Road Driving
396
(399,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
sense precautions such as those
listed here is not eligible for
warranty coverage.
. After driving on gravel roads or
rough roads, check the under-
carriage of the vehicle body for
any damage, deformation, or
paint removal. If you notice any
irregularities, contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance, you can drive your
SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.
But please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither
a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-
terrain vehicle. If you do take your
SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
precautions such as those in the following
list should be taken.
& Before Driving
s08ah09
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a
shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and
cell phone or citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle
and cause injury. Do not pile heavy
loads on the roof. Those loads raise the
vehicle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this
manual.
& During Driving
s08ah10
General precautions:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas
or over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. A vehicle
can much more easily tip over sideways
than it can end over end. Avoid driving
straight up or down slopes that are too
steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk
the wheel and injure your hands.
Instead, drive with your fingers and
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass
or fallen leaves, as they may burn
easily. The exhaust system is very hot
while the engine is running and right
after the engine stops. This could
create a fire hazard.
Precautions when driving under espe-
cially dangerous situations:
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the select lever
back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
On-Road and Off-Road Driving
397
8
Driving Tips
(400,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& After Driving
s08ah11
. Always check your brakes for effective-
ness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal.
Repeat that process several times to
dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that
there is no grass, bush, paper, rags,
stones, sand, etc. adhering to or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the underbody. If
the vehicle is used with these materials
trapped or adhering to the underbody, a
mechanical breakdown or fire could
occur.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components
are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so
they need to be washed thoroughly.
8-10. Winter Driving
s08ai
& Operation during Cold
Weather
s08ai01
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,
a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the 12 V battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce 12 V battery capa-
city. The 12 V battery must be in good
condition to provide enough power for cold
winter starts.
It normally takes longer to start the hybrid
system in very cold weather conditions.
Use an engine oil of a proper grade and
viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy
summer oil will make it harder to start the
hybrid system.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen, use
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
If you fill the washer fluid tank with a fluid
with a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the washer fluid tank
and washer nozzles by operating the
washer for a certain period of time.
Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid
remaining in the piping is too low for the
outside temperature, it may freeze and
block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the washer fluid tank.
. Be careful foreign matter does
not contaminate the washer fluid
when filling the tank. Contamina-
tion could cause malfunctions,
such as clogging the pump.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
Winter Driving
398
(401,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
s08ai0101
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and driving
dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accu-
mulated under the fenders to avoid making
steering difficult. During severe winter
driving, stop when and where it is safe to
do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
s08ai0102
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the hybrid
system running.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
. When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
. Under either of the following
conditions, icing may develop
on the brake system, which could
cause poor braking action.
– When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads
heavily covered with snow
– When the vehicle has been left
parked during a snowstorm
Check for snow or ice buildup on
the suspension, disc brakes and
brake hoses underneath the ve-
hicle. If there is caked snow or
ice, remove it, being careful not
to damage the disc brakes and
brake hoses and ABS harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving.
! Refueling in cold weather
s08ai0103
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an anti-
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for
an extended period, it is best to have the
fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on Snowy and Icy
Roads
s08ai02
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of vehi-
cle control.
– CONTINUED –
Winter Driving
399
8
Driving Tips
(402,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy roads. For
information about braking on slippery
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)” �P327 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control System” �P329.
! Wiper operation when snowing
s08ai0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade
rubbers, use the defroster with the
airflow selection in “
” and the tem-
perature set for maximum warmth until
the wiper blade rubbers are completely
thawed. Refer to “Defrosting” �P265.
. Wiper deicer is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer
to “Defogger and Deicer” �P241.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
use the rear window defogger. Refer to
“Defogger and Deicer” �P241.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in “
” and the
temperature set for maximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
“Windshield washer” �P239.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the
vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer
to “Hazard Warning Flasher” �P162.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that are
suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion Protection
s08ai03
Refer to “Corrosion Protection” �P450.
Winter Driving
400
(403,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Snow Tires
s08ai04
WARNING
. When replacing or installing win-
ter tire(s), all four tires must be
the same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the dri-
ver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechan-
ical damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of tires
designed specifically for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire Chains
s08ai05
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of clear-
ance between the tires and vehicle
body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use of
another type of traction device (such as
spring chains) may be acceptable if use
on your vehicle is recommended by the
device manufacturer, taking into ac-
count tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
structions, especially regarding max-
imum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
– CONTINUED –
Winter Driving
401
8
Driving Tips
(404,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with a
traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the Vehicle
s08ai06
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the select
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the
wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
8-11. Loading Your Vehicle
s08aj
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the cargo
area. Doing so may result in serious
injury.
WARNING
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
Loading Your Vehicle
402
(405,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle Capacity Weight
s08aj01
Vehicle placard
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-
hicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
s08aj02
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side door pillar shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to each
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
– CONTINUED –
Loading Your Vehicle
403
8
Driving Tips
(406,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle
scale, found at a commercial weighing
station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof Rail
s08aj04
1 Roof rails
Cargo can be carried on the roof after
securing the crossbars to the roof rails and
installing an appropriate carrying attach-
ment. When installing crossbars and a
carrying attachment, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is
designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars
and carrying attachment) of no more than
176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to exceed
your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
CAUTION
. When using a carrying attach-
ment, make sure that the total
carrying load of the cargo, cross-
bars and carrying attachment
does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg).
Overloading may cause damage
to the vehicle.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together
with the crossbars and any ap-
propriate carrying attachment
that may be needed. The roof
rails must never be used alone
to carry cargo. Otherwise, da-
mage to the roof or paint, or a
dangerous road hazard due to
loss of cargo could result.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
Loading Your Vehicle
404
(407,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Roof Tent
s08aj14
WARNING
Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof
can adversely affect handling, brak-
ing, and rollover resistance. The
vehicle must never be driven with a
total roof rail load in excess of 176
lbs (80 kg).
CAUTION
. The roof rail load limit for sta-
tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))
applies only when the vehicle is
parked and the load is evenly
distributed left/right and front/
rear and the roof crossbars and
roof tent are tightly secured to
the vehicle. If these conditions
are not met, the load limit will be
lower.
. The maximum load limit of the
roof crossbars must be obtained
from the manufacturer or retailer
of the roof rack. When driving the
vehicle, the maximum roof rail
load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the
crossbar load limit (whichever is
lower).
Roof tents may be used under certain
conditions at your own risk.
! When driving the vehicle
s08aj1401
The total weight on the roof rails, including
the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not
exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176
lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)
– CONTINUED –
Loading Your Vehicle
405
8
Driving Tips
(408,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! When the vehicle is parked on level
ground
s08aj1402
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent
The total weight on the roof rails –
including the roof crossbars, roof tent,
and all occupants and contents in the roof
tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s
roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly
distributed, or the load limit of the roof
crossbars, whichever is lower.
Load limit of the roof rail (A).
B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)
Exceeding this load limit could cause
damage to the vehicle or racking system.
The vehicle must never be driven with
occupants in the roof tent. Before the
vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo
must be removed from the roof tent and
the roof rail load must be restored to within
the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).
Refer to the user manual that accompa-
nied the roof tent for important safety
information and instructions on the proper
installation and use of the tent.
8-12. Trailer Hitch (Dealer
Option)
s08ak
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer Towing” �P409.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the tow load exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
. Be sure your trailer has safety
chains and that each chain will
hold the trailer’s maximum gross
weight. Towing trailers without
safety chains could create a traf-
fic safety hazard if the trailer
separates from the hitch due to
coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option)
406
(409,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and
safety pin for positive locking
placement before towing a trailer.
If the ball mount separates from
the receiver the trailer could
become loose and create a traffic
safety hazard.
. Although towing regulations for
trailer or caravan vehicles vary
by state/region, all regulations
agree that specifications such
as the maximum gross trailer
weight must not exceed the les-
ser of the following:
– Maximum gross trailer weight
– Maximum gross tongue
weight
– GVWR
– GAWR
. Failure to comply with the proce-
dures set forth will not only
compromise your safety, but will
also negate your insurance cov-
erage and/or may violate the state
road and traffic acts and regula-
tions.
. It is recommended to only use the
Genuine Subaru Ball Mount de-
veloped for use with this trailer
hitch available at your Subaru
dealership. Use the hitch only as
a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight dis-
tributing hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. Safety performance is decreased
and there is increased risk of
injury to passengers in the case
of an accident if the SUBARU
genuine trailer hitch or a stan-
dard bumper beam is not in-
stalled. One of them must always
be installed on the vehicle.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
not possible to install the rear
towing hook.
The maximum gross trailer weight and
maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
cated in the following table.
When towing a trailer with brakes
Maximum gross trai-
ler weight
Maximum gross ton-
gue weight
1,500 lbs
(680 kg)
150 lbs
(68 kg)
When towing a trailer without brakes
Maximum gross trai-
ler weight
Maximum gross ton-
gue weight
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
100 lbs
(45 kg)
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
Towing” �P409.
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option)
407
8
Driving Tips
(410,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Connecting a SUBARU Gen-
uine Trailer Hitch
s08ak01
1 Ball mount
2 Hitch pin
3 Safety pin
A Hitch receiver tube
1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch
receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located
on the hitch receiver tube so that the
pin passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin through the hole
located on the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not
come off the hitch receiver.
1 Hitch ball installation point
2 Hooks for safety chains
5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball
that is appropriate for the ball mount
and your trailer. The hitch ball must be
securely installed on the ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to any
part of the vehicle other than the
safety chain hooks.
1 Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
electrical wire harness by individually
activating the brake, stop and turn
signal lights on the trailer.
Trailer Hitch (Dealer Option)
408
(411,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer electrical
wire harness before launching or re-
trieving a watercraft.
& If Not Towing a Trailer
s08ak02
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch electrical wire
harness to protect against possible
damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal
grease.
8-13. Trailer Towing
s08al
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel and air conditioning
system cooling performance.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Drive carefully when
towing a trailer, and always consider the
following conditions.
. Road conditions
. Weather conditions
. Vehicle load weight
. Trailer load weight
Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to
assist you in purchasing a hitch and other
necessary towing equipment appropriate
for your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-
ment other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions for proper installation and
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
manufacturer.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
& Warranties and Maintenance
s08al01
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow
a trailer, more frequent maintenance will
be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be
towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with
any new powertrain component (engine,
transmission, differential, wheel bearings,
etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving.
& Maximum Load Limits
s08al02
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing
409
8
Driving Tips
(412,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
! Total trailer weight
s08al0201
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight in the follow-
ing table.
Trailer Towing
410
(413,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer with brakes 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
When towing a trailer without brakes 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer on an uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
s08al0202
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-
bined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing
411
8
Driving Tips
(414,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification
label located at the bottom of driver’s side
door pillar of your vehicle.
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
s08al0203
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
s08al0204
Tongue load
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and
does not exceed the maximum value. For
details about the trailer tongue load, refer
to “Trailer hitch” “Trailer Hitch (Dealer
Option)” �P406.
Trailer Towing
412
(415,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Jack
2 Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration
above. When weighing the tongue load, be
sure to position the towing coupler at the
height at which it would be during actual
towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
distribution of the load in the trailer. Never
load the trailer with more weight in the
back than in the front; approximately 60
percent of the trailer load should be in the
front and approximately 40 percent in the
rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as
possible on both the left and right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer Hitches (Dealer Op-
tion)
s08al03
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing
413
8
Driving Tips
(416,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Do not use a trailer hitch other than a
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine
SUBARU trailer hitch is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
& When You Do Not Tow a
Trailer
s08al14
CAUTION
. The housing should be kept dirt
and corrosion-free at the points
of contact. The surfaces only
require cleaning with a cloth.
Grease or other lubricants
should never be used.
. If the ball mount is not installed,
the plastic insert and/or bumper
cover should then be installed for
protection and to prevent it from
getting dirty.
When the ball is not used, place the ball
cap and store securely.
& Connecting a Trailer
s08al04
! Trailer brakes
s08al0401
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-
commended, and must be installed prop-
erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-
form with Federal, state/province and/or
other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
s08al0402
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Two chains should be used in
total, one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
crossing each other under the trailer
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
onto the ground in the event the trailer
tongue should disconnect from the hitch
ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
taking tight turn situations into account;
however, be careful not to let them drag on
the ground.
Trailer Towing
414
(417,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Outside mirrors
s08al0403
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard outside mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard outside mirrors, use towing mirrors
that conform with Federal, state/province
and/or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
s08al0404
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s
electrical system requires modifications to
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its
capacity and accommodate wiring
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-
tion of the turn signals and the brake lights
each time you connect a trailer to your
vehicle.
! Tires
s08al0405
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”
�P509.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications. Also check federal, state,
province and/or other applicable regula-
tions.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service representative or profes-
sional to repair the flat tire.
& Trailer Towing Tips
s08al05
CAUTION
. When towing a trailer, touch
“Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/
RCTA)” to deactivate the system.
The system may not operate
properly due to the blocked radar
waves. For details about how to
turn on/off the BSD/RCTA, refer
to “Car settings” �P214.
. For models equipped with the
Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system, consult your
SUBARU dealer for additional
information about towing a trai-
ler.
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent when compared to normal
operation. For safety’s sake, you
should employ extra caution
when towing a trailer and you
should never drive at excessive
speeds. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
. The braking power of the parking
brake may not be sufficient when
stronger braking power is
needed (e.g., when parking on a
steep slope while towing a trai-
ler).
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing
415
8
Driving Tips
(418,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
When towing a trailer on an uphill slope, do
not drive in the Intelligent (I) mode. It is
recommend that you drive in the Sport (S)
mode. However, it is possible to tow a
trailer in any mode of the SI-DRIVE on a
downhill slope.
! Before starting out on a trip
s08al0501
. Check the towing regulations for trailer
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/
region. Failure to comply with the
procedures set forth will not only
compromise your safety, but will also
negate your insurance coverage and/or
may violate the state road and traffic
acts and regulations.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow
the trailer.
. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-
tally with the trailer attached. If the
vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front
and down at the rear, check the total
trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue
load again, then confirm that the load
and its distribution are acceptable.
. Check that the tire rating and pressures
are correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that:
– The trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– The trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer’s brake
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is
operated.
– The safety chains are connected
properly.
– All cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– The outside mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a
significant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combina-
tion before starting out on a trip. In an
area free of traffic, practice turning,
stopping and backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
s08al0502
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss
of control.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
larger than normal turning radius be-
cause the trailer wheels will be closer
than the vehicle wheels to the inside of
the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could
hit your vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer,
causing sway. Crosswinds can be due
to weather conditions or the passing of
large trucks or buses. If swaying oc-
curs, firmly grip the steering wheel and
promptly begin decelerating your vehi-
cle at a gradual pace.
. When passing other vehicles, consider-
able distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can
be difficult and requires experience.
Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and
grip the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand.
Trailer Towing
416
(419,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
To reverse around a corner, perform the
following procedure.
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-
site direction to the way you want to
turn.
2. Once the trailer begins to swing
around, straighten the steering wheel.
3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-
tion.
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
with the trailer, then straighten the
steering again.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop
towing the trailer and have repairs
performed immediately by your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
! Driving on grades
s08al0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if
necessary, use 1st gear) in order to
utilize the engine braking effect and
prevent overheating of your vehicle’s
brakes. Do not make sudden down-
shifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automati-
cally to protect the engine from over-
heating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather,
because the engine and transmission
are relatively prone to overheating, pay
attention to the following items.
– Engine coolant temperature gauge
. If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner
and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. Refer to “If You Park Your
Vehicle in an Emergency” �P420 and
“Engine Overheating” �P434.
– Engine coolant temperature gauge
needle approaches the OVERHEAT
zone. Refer to “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge” �P164.
. When the hybrid system overheat
warning light illuminates, the power
output limits are activated and it will
only be possible to drive the vehicle at
only low speeds. Refer to “Hybrid
System Overheat Warning Light”
�P189.
. Do not use the accelerator pedal to stay
stationary on an uphill slope instead of
using the parking brake or foot brake.
That may cause the transmission fluid
to overheat.
! Parking on a grade
s08al0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer
– CONTINUED –
Trailer Towing
417
8
Driving Tips
(420,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until
the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into the “P” position and shut off
the hybrid system.
Trailer Towing
418
(421,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s09
9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ... 420
9-2. Maintenance Tools.......................................... 420
Under the Rear Floor .......................................... 421
Under the Left Side Front Seat............................ 421
9-3. Flat Tires ......................................................... 422
Sealing a Flat Tire...............................................422
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 430
TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................431
9-4. Jump Starting ................................................. 432
How to Jump Start.............................................. 433
9-5. Engine Overheating ........................................ 434
If Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 434
If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 434
9-6. Towing ............................................................. 435
Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes ............ 436
Using a Flat-Bed Truck ....................................... 439
Using a Dolly ..................................................... 439
9-7. Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic
Parking Brake Cannot Be Released ............440
9-8. Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob
Does Not Operate Properly ..........................440
Locking and Unlocking....................................... 440
Switching Power Status ..................................... 441
Starting Hybrid System ...................................... 441
9-9. Rear Gate – If the Rear Gate Cannot Be
Opened...........................................................442
9-10. Malfunctions of the Center Information
Display ...........................................................442
9-11. Moonroof (If Equipped) – If the Moonroof
Does Not Close .............................................444
9-12. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident...444
To Restart the Hybrid System When Involved
in an Accident.................................................. 444
Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation
When Involved in an Accident .......................... 445
In Case of Emergency
9
In Case of Emergency
(422,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle
in an Emergency
s09aa
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
When the hazard warning flasher are
flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator will also flash.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
9-2. Maintenance Tools
s09ah
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack*
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt)
. Wheel nut wrench
*: The jack can be purchased at a SUBARU
dealer.
If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency
420
(423,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Under the Rear Floor
s09ah12
The screwdriver and towing hook are
stored as shown in the following illustra-
tions.
1 Towing hook (eye bolt)
2 Screwdriver
& Under the Left Side Front Seat
s09ah18
Remove the maintenance tool box cover
under the left side front seat.
The jack, jack handle and wheel nut
wrench are stored as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Under the left side front seat
1 Jack (dealer option)
2 Jack handle
3 Wheel nut wrench
NOTE
For how to use the jack, refer to
“Replacement Procedure” �P483.
Maintenance Tools
421
9
In Case of Emergency
(424,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
9-3. Flat Tires
s09ac
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Sealing a Flat Tire
s09ac03
WARNING
Read these instructions and
warnings carefully before sealing a
flat tire.
Compliance with these instructions
is vital to ensuring vehicle safety.
Noncompliance with these instruc-
tions means risking tire damage,
which can affect vehicle handling
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
This may result in serious injury or
death.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare
tire. If the tire is punctured, you can seal
the flat tire temporarily by using the flat tire
repair kit. You can seal a flat tire caused,
for example, by nails or similar objects with
less than 0.2 in (4 mm). However, depend-
ing on the type and extent of tire damage,
some tires can only be partially sealed or
not sealed at all, and this condition may
cause a loss of tire pressure. A loss of tire
pressure can affect vehicle handling,
leading to the loss of vehicle control.
After sealing the flat tire temporarily,
change the tires with new ones as soon
as possible. We recommend that you have
the sealed tire changed by your nearest
SUBARU dealer. You may reuse the wheel
if the attached sealant is wiped off, but the
valve of the wheel must be replaced with a
new one. If you reuse the wheel without
replacing the valve, air may leak from the
valve. For tire replacement, refer to “Tire
Replacement” �P482.
! Safety precautions when sealing a
flat tire
s09ac0301
Observe the following rules when sealing a
flat tire.
1 Sealing is possible
2 Sealing is not possible
WARNING
. Do not use the flat tire repair kit in
the following cases.
– The tire has already been
damaged as a result of being
driven in the under inflated
condition.
– The tire damage is not located
within the visible tread of the
tire.
– The tire damage is on the
sidewall of the tire.
– When the tire has been taken
off of the wheel.
Flat Tires
422
(425,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
– The wheel or the tire valve of
the flat tire is damaged.
– Two or more tires have been
punctured.
– The expiration date of the
sealant has passed.
– The tire is punctured by
pointed items such as nails
of 0.2 in (4 mm) or larger.
. When inflating the flat tire, if the
tire inflation pressure does not
reach the green zone of the
pressure gauge within 10 min-
utes, do not continue to seal the
tire. We recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
. Drive with caution and avoid
making sudden steering or driv-
ing maneuvers.
. Do not exceed a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not exceed a maximum driv-
ing distance of 125 miles (200
km).
. Do not use tire chains on a sealed
tire.
. If used for a purpose other than
sealing a flat tire, the flat tire
repair kit may cause a severe
accident or injury due to the fact
that compressed air can act as an
explosive or propellant.
. Safely park your vehicle on the
roadside so that you do not
obstruct the flow of traffic and
so that you are able to seal the flat
tire without being in danger.
. Apply the parking brake, even if
the vehicle is parked on a level
road, to make sure that the vehi-
cle will not move.
. Stop the hybrid system before
sealing the flat tire.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flasher while sealing the flat tire.
. Do not attempt to remove foreign
objects like nails or screws that
have penetrated the tire. Leave
them as they are.
. Never leave the flat tire repair kit
unattended while in use.
. Only one tire can be repaired with
one bottle of sealant.
. The tires can be repaired when
the ambient temperature is −228F
(−308C) or higher.
CAUTION
. Remember that the flat tire repair
kit only provides temporary mo-
bility. Regulations concerning
tire repair after usage of flat tire
repair kit may differ from country
to country. We recommend that
you consult your SUBARU dealer
or tire dealer for advice.
. Store the flat tire repair kit safely
and secure it in the cargo area.
Storing it anywhere in the pas-
senger compartment is not advi-
sable because it could strike an
occupant in the event of a sudden
stop or collision and cause injury.
. Use the flat tire repair kit with
original vehicle tires only.
. Do not keep the air compressor
operating for more than 10 min-
utes, otherwise there is a risk of
overheating.
. The temperature of the air com-
pressor may become high. Be
careful not to burn yourself.
. When raining, take measures to
prevent the air compressor from
being exposed directly to the
rain. Exposing to rain may cause
a malfunction.
– CONTINUED –
Flat Tires
423
9
In Case of Emergency
(426,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Do not use air compressors other
than the one in the repair kit.
Using an air compressor other
than the one in the repair kit may
damage the tires.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
air compressor to enable the use
of a power supply or a 12 V
battery other than DC 12 V.
. If a temporary puncture repair is
performed with the repair kit, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) may
not operate normally.
! Location of the flat tire repair kit
s09ac0305
The flat tire repair kit is stored on the left
side of the cargo area.
The sealant bottle is stored under the
cargo area.
! Contents of the flat tire repair kit
s09ac0304
1 Sealant bottle
2 Quick reference guide
3 Air compressor
4 Speed limit label
The above repair kits are packed in a
plastic bag. Return them to the plastic bag
after use.
Flat Tires
424
(427,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Air compressor (front side)
1 Air gauge
2 Power plug
Air compressor (rear side)
1 Hose
2 Compressor switch
Sealant bottle
1 Hose
2 Valve
WARNING
. Do not drink the sealant. If the
sealant is accidentally swal-
lowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
. If the sealant splashes onto your
skin or eyes, wash it away im-
mediately with plenty of water. If
necessary, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
. Keep the flat tire repair kit out of
the reach of children.
. If a person who is allergic to
natural rubber comes in contact
the sealant, allergy symptoms
may occur.
1 Expiration date
CAUTION
Replace the sealant bottle with a
new one before the expiration date
passes.
! How to seal the flat tire
s09ac0302
To seal the flat tire, perform the following
steps.
. First, pump in the sealant and air. Drive
the vehicle for approximately 10 min-
utes or 3 miles (5 km) so that the
sealant can seal the damaged area.
– CONTINUED –
Flat Tires
425
9
In Case of Emergency
(428,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Stop the vehicle again, check and, if
necessary, adjust the pressure of the
damaged tire.
. After that, you can continue to drive
carefully no faster than 50 mph (80
km/h) and within the maximum distance
of 125 miles (200 km).
Inform all other users of the vehicle that the
tire has been temporarily sealed with the
flat tire repair kit and make them aware of
the special driving conditions to be ob-
served.
1. Shake the sealant bottle well. Loosen
the hose.
1 Valve
2. Connect the air compressor hose to
the valve on the bottle.
CAUTION
. Make sure that the air compres-
sor switch is OFF.
. The sealant may leak if the fitting
is not tight enough.
Connect the hose from the bottle to the tire
valve stem tightly.
CAUTION
The sealant may leak if the fitting is
not tight enough.
Flat Tires
426
(429,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3. Turn the bottle upside down and tilt the
bottle cap into the bottle holder of the
air compressor. Make sure that the air
compressor switch is OFF.
4. Connect the power plug of the air
compressor into the accessory power
outlet.
Apply the parking brake and start the
hybrid system. Turn the air compressor
switch on and adjust the air pressure to the
appropriate level (green zone of the air
gauge).
CAUTION
. Do not run the air compressor for
more than 10 minutes as it can
get hot. Be careful not to get
burned.
. If tire pressure doesn’t reach the
green zone for 10 minutes, this kit
will be unable to seal the tire.
Please contact your SUBARU
dealer for help.
– CONTINUED –
Flat Tires
427
9
In Case of Emergency
(430,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
NOTE
. After the compressor starts to oper-
ate, the air pressure will temporarily
rise to 45 psi (300 kPa, 3.0 kgf/cm
2
)
or higher. After about 30 seconds
when all of the sealant is inside the
tire, the air pressure will lower,
representing the air pressure in the
tire.
. In extremely low temperatures −228F
to −48F (−308C to −208C), the vis-
cosity of the sealant increases and
the sealant will flow more slowly. In
such temperatures, bring the sea-
lant into the vehicle to warm it up
before use.
. When mending the tire, if the air
pressure gauge is hard to read, turn
the compressor switch off once to
get an accurate reading.
5. While filling the tire with air, attach the
speed limit label on the position shown
in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not attach the speed limit label in
a position where the label hides the
warning lamp or on the steering
wheel. It may interfere with the
normal operation of the airbag and
lead to a critical failure.
6. Turn the air compressor power switch
off when the air pressure reaches the
green zone of the air gauge.
Remove the power plug from the
accessory power socket.
Flat Tires
428
(431,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Remove the hose after filling the tire with
air and fasten the valve cap.
Connect the hose of the bottle to the valve
of the bottle in a circular fashion to avoid
leakage of the remaining sealant.
CAUTION
The sealant may stain clothing.
7. Stow the kit back in the vehicle and
drive your vehicle immediately for 10
minutes or 3 miles (5 km).
WARNING
. Drive carefully. Do not exceed 50
mph (80 km/h). Driving faster
than that can result in the vehicle
shaking.
. Do not use tire chains on a sealed
tire.
. Do not tow a trailer.
. If heavy vibrations, unsteady
steering behavior or noises oc-
cur while driving, reduce your
speed and drive with caution to
a location where it is safe for you
to stop the vehicle. Recheck the
tire and its pressure. If the tire
pressure is in the red zone of the
air gauge or if there are any
cracks, bumps or similar tire
damage visible, temporary re-
pairs cannot be performed with
the repair kit. We recommend that
you consult with your SUBARU
dealer or road service provider.
8. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles
(5 km), whichever comes first, stop the
vehicle in a safe place to recheck the
air pressure (see step 4).
If necessary, fill the tire with air to the
– CONTINUED –
Flat Tires
429
9
In Case of Emergency
(432,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
appropriate air pressure again and
drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for tire, valve stem and sealant
bottle replacement.
NOTE
Connect the air compressor only to the
tire valve.
CAUTION
. If the air pressure is in red zone of
the air gauge, the kit did not
successfully seal the puncture.
In this case, please stop driving
and contact your SUBARU dealer
for help.
. Do not drive your vehicle with the
sealed tire for more than 125
miles (200 km). Failure to replace
the valve stem may result in air
leakage at the valve stem.
Before the tire is removed from the rim,
inform your SUBARU dealer or other tire
dealer that the tire contains sealant.
CAUTION
The sealant bottle and speed limit
label need to be replaced after using
the flat tire repair kit.
NOTE
New sealant and replacement parts can
be purchased from your authorized
repair shop or SUBARU dealer, and
they should also be installed into the kit
by a specialist. Empty sealant bottles
and replacement parts must be re-
turned to your SUBARU dealer or
disposed of in compliance with local
waste disposal regulations.
! Technical data of air compressor
s09ac0303
Line voltage DC 12 V
Operating voltage DC 10 – 15 V
Amperage
Max. 10 A
& Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.
Models)
s09ac02
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel when
tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
Flat Tires
430
(433,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the tire inflation
pressure label on the door
pillar on the driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat
Tires” �P422.
. When a replacement tire is
mounted or a wheel rim is re-
placed without the original pres-
sure sensor/transmitter being
transferred, the low tire pressure
warning light will illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible for tire and sensor replace-
ment and/or system resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected.
& TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec.
Models)
s09ac05
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic Screens” �P197.
Flat Tires
431
9
In Case of Emergency
(434,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
9-4. Jump Starting
s09ad
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
oughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get med-
ical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the 12 V battery.
. The gas generated by a 12 V
battery explodes if a flame or
spark is brought near it. Do not
smoke or light a match while
jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged 12 V battery is frozen.
It could cause the 12 V battery to
burst or explode.
. Whenever working on or around a
12 V battery, always wear suitable
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
. Do not jump start unless cables in
suitable condition are available.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, drive belt
and any other moving engine
parts. Removing rings, watches
and ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
1 Fuse
WARNING
Never connect the jumper cables to
a fuse near the terminal of the 12 V
battery. Doing so may ignite gases
generated by the 12 V battery and
result in an explosion, which could
damage the electronic devices and
the engine.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
Jump Starting
432
(435,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& How to Jump Start
s09ad01
A Booster battery
B Strut mounting nut
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the dis-
charged battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable
to the negative (−) terminal of the
booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any
other metal.
5. Start the hybrid system of the vehicle
with the booster battery and run it at
moderate speed. Then start the hybrid
– CONTINUED –
Jump Starting
433
9
In Case of Emergency
(436,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
system of the vehicle that has the
discharged battery.
6. Make sure that the Hybrid READY
indicator light is illuminated.
7. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
NOTE
If the hybrid system does not start,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
9-5. Engine Overheating
s09ae
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has
fully cooled down. When the engine
is hot, the coolant is under pressure.
Removing the cap while the engine
is still hot could release a spray of
boiling hot coolant, which could
burn you very seriously.
CAUTION
If the engine overheats, the engine
speed or the vehicle speed may be
reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place immediately.
& If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
s09ae01
Turn off the engine and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
s09ae02
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine Coolant” �P468.
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine Hood”
�P462.
3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning.
If the fan is not turning, immediately
turn off the engine and contact your
authorized dealer for repair.
4. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays in the
overheated zone, turn off the engine.
5. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
mark.
6. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill
the radiator with coolant.
Engine Overheating
434
(437,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
9-6. Towing
s09af
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
WARNING
Avoid towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground. Doing so will
damage the drivetrain and poten-
tially harm the electric motor. This
damage might lead to malfunctions
that could result in a fire.
If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-
mends it be done by your SUBARU dealer
or a commercial towing service.
– CONTINUED –
Towing
435
9
In Case of Emergency
(438,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Towing Hook and Tie-Down
Hooks/Holes
s09af01
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency.
SUBARU recommends towing be done
by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-
cial towing service.
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole clo-
sest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
Front towing hook:
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from
the storage area of the vehicle. For the
tool storage locations, refer to “Main-
tenance Tools” �P420.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-
head screwdriver into the cutout of
the cover and pry open the cover.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until the threads can no
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
Towing
436
(439,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Store the screwdriver, towing hook, wheel
nut wrench and jack handle in their storage
locations.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply an excessive load to the tow-
ing hook.
Rear towing hook:
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from
the storage area of the vehicle. For the
tool storage locations, refer to “Main-
tenance Tools” �P420.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-
head screwdriver into the cutout of
the cover and pry open the cover.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until its thread can no
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Store the screwdriver, towing hook, wheel
nut wrench and jack handle in their storage
locations.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Towing
437
9
In Case of Emergency
(440,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind.
CAUTION
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply an excessive load to
the towing hook.
. When towing another vehicle,
touch “Rear Vehicle Detection
(BSD/RCTA)” to deactivate the
system. The system may not
operate properly due to the
blocked radar waves. For details
about how to turn on/off Rear
Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA),
refer to “Car settings” �P214.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Front tie-down hooks are for tying down
the vehicle. They are not for towing.
Rear tie-down holes:
1 Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
Towing
438
(441,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,
return the plugs to their original places.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a Flat-Bed Truck
s09af02
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each
safety chain should be equally tigh-
tened and care must be taken not to
pull the chains so tightly that the
suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
Transport by flat-bed truck may
cause the headlights to become
misaligned. In such a case, have
the headlight alignment checked by
a SUBARU dealer after transporting
the vehicle by flat-bed truck.
& Using a Dolly
s09af06
When towing a vehicle, use a dolly to lift all
four wheels off the ground as illustrated.
While towing with the dolly, maintain a safe
speed and avoid sudden stops or sharp
turns. Regularly inspect the dolly and the
vehicle to ensure everything is secure.
Towing
439
9
In Case of Emergency
(442,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
9-7. Electronic Parking Brake
– If the Electronic Parking
Brake Cannot Be Released
s09an
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have
your SUBARU dealer release the electro-
nic parking brake.
9-8. Access Key Fob – If Ac-
cess Key Fob Does Not Op-
erate Properly
s09ap
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key fob and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key fob and the push-
button ignition switch.
The following functions may be inoperable
because of strong radio signals in the
surrounding area or a low battery condition
of the access key fob.
. Locking/unlocking all the doors includ-
ing rear gate
. Switching the power status
. Starting the hybrid system
In such cases, perform the following
procedure. When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged, replace it with a new
one. Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob” �P501.
& Locking and Unlocking
s09ap01
1 Release button
2 Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
emergency key in the procedure described
in “Locking and Unlocking from the Out-
side” �P143.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the emergency key back to the
access key fob.
Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released
440
(443,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Switching Power Status
s09ap02
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the
push-button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is
completed, a chime (ding) will sound.
At the same time, the status of the
push-button ignition switch changes to
either of the following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
“ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated,
press the push-button ignition switch
with the brake pedal released. The
status of the push-button ignition
switch then changes to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Starting Hybrid System
s09ap03
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the
push-button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is
completed, a chime (ding) will sound.
At the same time, the push-button
ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position,
while depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the hybrid system does not start even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
441
9
In Case of Emergency
(444,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
9-9. Rear Gate – If the Rear
Gate Cannot Be Opened
s09ag
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by pressing the rear gate opener
button, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch. Remove the access cover at
the bottom-center of the rear gate trim
using a flat-head screwdriver.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers be-
cause doing so may cause an injury.
Always use a flat-head screwdriver
or a similar tool.
1 Rear gate lock release lever
2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to
the right position using a flat-head
screwdriver or a similar tool. Then the
rear gate will open.
9-10. Malfunctions of the
Center Information Display
s09av
If the following screens are displayed,
temporary errors or malfunctions may
occur in the center information display.
If they are only temporary errors, the
following procedure may help to eliminate
them.
Shutting down the screen
Rear Gate – If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened
442
(445,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Freezing the screen
Blacking out or turning the screen blue
Error A
Error B
Error C
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition switch once to the
“OFF” position, then start the hybrid
system.
– CONTINUED –
Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
443
9
In Case of Emergency
(446,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Volume knob
3. If the center information display cannot
be recovered even though the hybrid
system has been restarted, press and
hold the volume button for more than
10 seconds. The center information
display will start up again.
4. If the center information display is not
recovered by restarting it, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
9-11. Moonroof (If Equipped)
– If the Moonroof Does Not
Close
s09aj
If the moonroof does not close, have the
system checked by a SUBARU dealer.
9-12. If Your Vehicle Is In-
volved in an Accident
s09ar
& To Restart the Hybrid System
When Involved in an Accident
s09ar02
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the hybrid system. If you
find that fuel has leaked on the
ground, do not try to restart the
hybrid system. The fuel system has
been damaged and is in need of
repair. Immediately contact the near-
est automotive service facility. Con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage. However,
depending on the impact conditions at the
time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off
system may not operate.
Perform the following procedures to restart
the hybrid system after the system is
activated.
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
Moonroof – If the Moonroof Does Not Close
444
(447,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the hybrid system.
& Automatic Door Locking/Un-
locking Operation When In-
volved in an Accident
s09ar03
When the automatic door locking/unlock-
ing function is ON, all the doors will be
locked automatically while driving. For
further details, refer to “Automatic Door
Locking/Unlocking” �P145.
When the vehicle sustains a strong impact
which may trigger the airbags to deploy,
the door locks may be unlocked automa-
tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-
erally, an impact sustained from a rear end
collision does not trigger the airbags to
deploy. However if the impact is strong
enough to deploy the airbags, it can also
trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the automatic
door locking/unlocking function will be
suspended and the doors will remain
unlocked.
Confirm the safety of the surroundings first
and carry out the following to retrieve the
automatic door locking/unlocking function.
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the im-
pact, the emergency unlocking may not
function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. The doors unlock automatically
while driving.
. With all doors shut, the doors
unlock when pressing the lock
side of the power door locking
switch.
. The automatic door locking/un-
locking function does not oper-
ate.
If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident
445
9
In Case of Emergency
(448,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(449,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s10
10-1. Exterior Care ................................................. 448
Washing ............................................................. 448
Waxing and Polishing .........................................449
Cleaning Alloy Wheels ........................................449
10-2. Corrosion Protection .................................... 450
Most Common Causes of Corrosion.................... 450
To Help Prevent Corrosion.................................. 450
10-3. Cleaning the Interior .....................................451
Seat Fabric Material ........................................... 451
Leather Seat Materials........................................ 451
Synthetic Leather Upholstery ............................. 452
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches,
Combination Meter, and Other Plastic
Surface ............................................................ 452
Center Information Display ................................. 452
Cleaning the High Voltage Battery Air Intake....... 452
Appearance Care
10
Appearance Care
(450,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
10-1. Exterior Care
s10aa
& Washing
s10aa01
CAUTION
. When using detergent to wash
your vehicle, use plenty of water
and thoroughly rinse away the
detergent so that none remains
on the brake calipers. If the
brakes (brake calipers) are wet,
the braking distance will be long-
er. To dry the brakes (brake
calipers), drive the vehicle at a
safe speed while lightly pressing
the brake pedal to warm up the
brakes (brake calipers).
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine and hybrid system trouble
or a malfunction of the power
steering.
. When washing inner fenders, un-
derbody, bumpers and protrud-
ing objects such as exhaust
pipes and exhaust finishers, be
careful to prevent injuries from
contacting sharp ends.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
. If the climate control system is
operating when you wash the
vehicle, do not set the air inlet
selection of the climate control to
outside air circulation mode.
There is a risk that water may
enter the vehicle through the air
inlets.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in an
automatic car wash, make sure before-
hand that the car wash is of suitable
type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
light.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
and bird droppings should be washed off
by using a light detergent, as required. If
you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
brush when washing down underbody,
inner fenders and suspension to effec-
tively remove mud and dirt off.
! Washing the underbody
s10aa0101
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,
floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful
effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
Exterior Care
448
(451,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy
roads, wash the mud and sand off the
underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to mud
and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-
edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing sus-
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a pressure washer
s10aa0102
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle
and the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If you are unable to remove a stain
easily using the pressure washer, wash
the area by hand. Note that some
pressure washers may spray hot or
high pressure water that will damage
the vehicle body paint, damage or
deform moldings or other resin parts,
or cause water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and Polishing
s10aa02
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
face with a fine-grained compound. Never
polish just the affected area, but include
the surrounding area as well. Always
polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
grain compound is recommended. Never
use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser
grained compounds have a smaller grain-
size number and could damage the paint.
After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
polishing with a compound or an incorrect
polishing technique will result in removing
the paint layer and exposing the under-
coat. When in doubt, it is always best to
contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto
paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning Alloy Wheels
s10aa04
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of
any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left
on too long, it may be difficult to clean
off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean
the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thor-
oughly with water. Do not clean the
– CONTINUED –
Exterior Care
449
10
Appearance Care
(452,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
wheels with a stiff brush or expose them
to a high-speed washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy
wheels) with water as soon as possible
when it has been splashed with sea
water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or
other agents.
10-2. Corrosion Protection
s10ab
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most Common Causes of
Corrosion
s10ab01
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas
where there is more salt in the air, or in
areas where there is considerable
industrial pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range
just above freezing.
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To Help Prevent Corrosion
s10ab02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
. Roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment (except the exhaust system) or
should be replaced. Contact your
Corrosion Protection
450
(453,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of
maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion. Oc-
casionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-
age. In such a garage, corrosion can be
caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into
the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
10-3. Cleaning the Interior
s10ac
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat Fabric Material
s10ac01
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner.
Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
make sure it does not affect the fabric
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its
instructions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather Seat Materials
s10ac02
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause leather to become
brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain
its resiliency, leather should be cleaned
monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.
Before cleaning leather upholstery, va-
cuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and
lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm
water and mild soap, taking care not to
soak the leather or allow water to pene-
trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle
circular motion while cleaning the leather -
do not rub or apply extreme pressure.
Wipe the leather again with another clean,
slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue
and dry with a soft cloth.
Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt
spots may be treated with a commercial
leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning
solvents, leather oils, varnishes or
polishes on your leather as it will dry out
the leather finish.
– CONTINUED –
Cleaning the Interior
451
10
Appearance Care
(454,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
You will discover that each leather seat
section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,
which is characteristic of genuine leather.
& Synthetic Leather Upholstery
s10ac03
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be
used on leather or synthetic interior
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Instrument Panel, Console
Panel, Switches, Combina-
tion Meter, and Other Plastic
Surface
s10ac04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the
instrument panel, center console, combi-
nation meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or gasoline, or
strong cleaning agents that con-
tain those solvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents that
contain silicone on the vehicle
audio system, electrical compo-
nents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
& Center Information Display
s10ac11
To clean the center information display,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely
dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened
with neutral detergent then carefully wipe
off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the display(s).
Doing so could damage the moni-
tor’s components.
. Do not wipe the display(s) with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, gasoline, or
any other volatile substance.
Such cleaning fluid could erase
the lettering on the switches on
the display(s).
& Cleaning the High Voltage
Battery Air Intake
s10ac12
Be sure that you clean the high voltage
battery air intake if there is dust or dirt on
the high voltage battery air intake, or if the
following messages are displayed on the
Cleaning the Interior
452
(455,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
combination meter display: “High Voltage
Battery Cooling Performance Reduced”
and “Battery Air Cooling Filter Is Clogged
Check Owner’s Manual”.
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. When dust accumulates on the cover
of the high voltage battery air intake,
remove the dust using a vacuum
cleaner.
3. Start the hybrid system and check that
“High Voltage Battery Cooling Perfor-
mance Reduced” and “Battery Air
Cooling Filter Is Clogged Check Own-
er’s Manual” are no longer displayed
on the combination meter display. You
may need to drive for about 20 minutes
in order to clear the warning message.
If these messages continue to be
displayed after you drive the vehicle
for a while, have the vehicle inspected
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
When cleaning the high voltage
battery air intake, observe the fol-
lowing: Failure to do so may cause a
vehicle breakdown, or vehicle fire,
and result in electric shock, other
serious injuries or even death.
. Do not clean the high voltage
battery air intake using water or
any liquid.
. Do not clean the high voltage
battery air intake while the hybrid
system is running.
. Do not put hands or feet in the
high voltage battery air intake.
CAUTION
When cleaning the high voltage
battery air intake, pay attention to
the following. Failure to do so may
result in a decrease in the output of
the high voltage battery or a vehicle
malfunction.
. Do not use an air blow gun for
cleaning to keep dust from enter-
ing the high voltage battery air
intake.
. Do not put water or any foreign
materials in the high voltage
battery air intake.
NOTE
. When using the vehicle in the follow-
ing conditions, clean the high vol-
tage battery air intake every 15,535
miles (25,000 km).
– Frequent use of the car
– High-traffic locations such as
large cities
– Cold regions
– Dusty areas
. If it is difficult to remove dust and
sand from the area around the high
voltage battery intake, it is recom-
mended to use a vacuum cleaner
with a plastic brush.
Cleaning the Interior
453
10
Appearance Care
(456,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(457,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s11
11-1. Maintenance Schedule ................................. 457
11-2. Maintenance Precautions ............................. 457
Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 458
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 459
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment While the Engine Is Running ....... 459
11-3. Maintenance Tips.......................................... 460
When Replacing Parts ........................................ 460
Removing and Reinstalling Clips ........................ 460
11-4. Engine Hood.................................................. 462
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview ................... 464
11-6. Engine Oil ...................................................... 465
Engine Oil Consumption .....................................465
Checking the Oil Level........................................465
Changing the Oil and Oil Filter............................ 466
Recommended Grade and Viscosity.................... 467
Synthetic Oil.......................................................467
11-7. Cooling System............................................. 467
Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections ...................468
Engine Coolant................................................... 468
Inverter with Converter Assembly Coolant .......... 469
11-8. Air Cleaner Element...................................... 470
Replacing the Air Cleaner Element......................471
11-9. Spark Plugs ................................................... 472
Recommended Spark Plugs ................................ 472
11-10. Drive Belt ..................................................... 472
11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid ............................................................... 472
11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear
Differential Gear Oil ......................................473
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ................... 473
11-13. Brake Fluid ...................................................473
Checking the Fluid Level .................................... 473
Recommended Brake Fluid................................. 474
11-14. Brake Pedal ..................................................474
11-15. Replacement of Brake Pad .........................474
Breaking-In of New Brake Pads .......................... 475
11-16. Tires and Wheels .........................................475
Types of Tires .................................................... 475
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 476
Tire Inspection ................................................... 477
Tire Pressures and Wear .................................... 478
Wheel Balance ................................................... 480
Wear Indicators .................................................. 480
Rotational Direction of Tires............................... 481
Tire Rotation ...................................................... 481
Tire Replacement ............................................... 482
Wheel Replacement............................................ 483
Replacement Procedure ..................................... 483
11-17. Alloy Wheels ................................................486
11-18. Windshield Washer Fluid ............................487
11-19. Replacement of Wiper Blades ....................488
Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly ..................... 489
Window Wiper Blade Rubber .............................. 490
Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly .................. 491
Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber...................... 491
Maintenance and Service
11
Maintenance and Service
(458,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-20. Battery ......................................................... 492
12 V Battery........................................................ 492
High Voltage Battery ........................................... 493
11-21. Fuses ........................................................... 494
11-22. Installation of Accessories......................... 495
11-23. Replacing Bulbs.......................................... 495
Headlights .......................................................... 496
Rear Combination Lights.................................... 496
Back-Up Light .................................................... 497
License Plate Light ............................................ 498
Other Bulbs ....................................................... 499
Adjusting Headlight Aim..................................... 499
11-24. Replacing Battery ........................................500
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob................. 501
Maintenance and Service
(459,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-1. Maintenance Schedule
s11aa
U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”. For details, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet”. For details, read the separate
“Warranty and Service Booklet”.
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required to
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
11-2. Maintenance Precau-
tions
s11ab
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by
yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this sec-
tion on general maintenance and service
for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar appara-
tus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the hybrid system
running in a poorly ventilated
area, such as a garage or other
closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or 12 V
battery. This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance Schedule
457
11
Maintenance and Service
(460,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-
ter for these wiring. If your SRS
airbag or seatbelt pretensioner
needs service, consult your near-
est SUBARU dealer.
. Check the inside of the engine
compartment to see if there are
any cloths and tools left. If they
are left inside, they may be a
cause of malfunction and fire.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi-
cals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU.
SUBARU warranties do not cover any
part of the vehicle which is damaged by
adding or applying chemicals and/or
solvents other than those approved or
recommended by SUBARU.
& Before Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
s11ab01
WARNING
. Always stop the hybrid system
and apply the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after the
engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even when
the hybrid system is stopped. If
your body or clothes come into
contact with a rotating fan, that
could result in serious injury. To
avoid risk of injury, perform the
following precautions.
– Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
the access key fob out from
the vehicle.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system tem-
porarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the hybrid
system.
Maintenance Precautions
458
(461,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& When Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
s11ab03
CAUTION
. Do not contact the cover while
checking the components in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause your hand to slip off
the cover and result in an unex-
pected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
tely. Doing so may result in a burn
or other injury. Note that the oil
filter becomes very hot when the
engine is running and remains
hot for some time after the engine
has stopped.
& When Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
While the Engine Is Running
s11ab02
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, drive belt and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
1 Safety stand
For any maintenance and inspection per-
formed on AWD models which requires a
running engine and wheels turning, jack up
all four wheels or use free rollers to prevent
the vehicle from moving. Never race the
engine or brake suddenly.
Maintenance Precautions
459
11
Maintenance and Service
(462,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-3. Maintenance Tips
s11bi
& When Replacing Parts
s11bi04
For information about replacement parts
for maintenance, contact any authorized
SUBARU dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
& Removing and Reinstalling
Clips
s11bi01
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
element or specific bulbs.
! Removing clips
s11bi0101
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
! Type A and D clips
s11bi010107
Type A clips
Type D clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
Maintenance Tips
460
(463,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Type B clips
s11bi010102
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown
in the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
! Type C clips
s11bi010103
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
! Reinstalling clips
s11bi0102
Type A clips
Type B clips
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance Tips
461
11
Maintenance and Service
(464,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Type C clips
Type D clips
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of the
clip into the hole.
11-4. Engine Hood
s11ac
CAUTION
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
. Check that the end of the hood
prop is inserted into the slot. If it
is not inserted properly, the hood
may drop and cause injury.
NOTE
If the base of the hood prop is jammed,
put the hood prop back in position
without applying excessive force.
Opening the engine hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
position.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
Engine Hood
462
(465,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
1 Grip
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
Hold the grip for handling the hood
prop.
Closing the engine hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm)
above its closed position and then let it
drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
Engine Hood
463
11
Maintenance and Service
(466,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview
s11ad
1 Inverter with converter assembly coolant
reservoir (page 469)
2 Brake fluid reservoir (page 473)
3 Main fuse box (page 494)
4 12 V Battery (page 492)
5 Washer fluid tank (page 487)
6 Radiator cap (page 468)
7 Engine oil filler cap (page 465)
8 Engine coolant reservoir (page 468)
9 Engine oil filter (page 466)
10 Engine oil level gauge (page 465)
11 Coolant pipe cap (page 469)
12 Air cleaner case (page 470)
Engine Compartment Overview
464
(467,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-6. Engine Oil
s11ae
CAUTION
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Other-
wise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine Oil Consumption
s11ae07
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance in-
tervals:
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of
time)
. When towing a trailer
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more
frequently. Different drivers in the same
car may experience different results. If
your oil consumption rate is greater than
expected, contact your authorized
SUBARU dealer who may perform a test
under controlled conditions.
& Checking the Oil Level
s11ae01
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the hybrid system. If you check
the oil level just after stopping the
hybrid system, wait for at least 5
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan before checking the level.
1 Oil level gauge
2 Oil filler cap
3 Oil filter
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right and
left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you
may be injured accidentally strain-
ing yourself.
– CONTINUED –
Engine Oil
465
11
Maintenance and Service
(468,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
1 Full level
2 Low level
3 Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must
be judged by the lowest of the two
levels. If the oil level is below the low
level mark, add oil so that the full level
is reached.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to touch the engine
oil filter when removing the oil
filler cap. Doing so may result in a
burn, a pinched finger, or may
cause some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above
the full level when the engine is cold.
. After adding or changing the engine
oil, warm up the engine and stop it
on a level surface, then start the
engine after a lapse of 1 minute or
more. Confirm that the warning light
has turned off after the engine has
started. Refer to “Engine Low Oil
Level Warning Light” �P172.
& Changing the Oil and Oil Filter
s11ae02
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently made, or when driving in ex-
tremely cold weather.
NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-
trained expert. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for changing the
engine oil and oil filter. Fully trained
mechanics are on standby at a
SUBARU dealer to utilize the special
tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also,
used oils are properly disposed of.
. If performing oil replacement your-
self, observe the local regulations
and dispose of waste oil properly.
Engine Oil
466
(469,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
s11ae03
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine Oil” �P506.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic Oil
s11ae05
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using syn-
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
Oil” �P506. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
11-7. Cooling System
s11af
WARNING
. Never remove the radiator cap
until the engine has been shut off
and has cooled down completely.
Since the coolant is under pres-
sure, you may suffer serious
burns from a spray of boiling
hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
. Be careful of the rotating cooling
fan when the engine hood is
open. When the engine tempera-
ture is high, the cooling fan in the
engine compartment may oper-
ate when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position, even if the
engine is stopped. Touching the
cooling fan while it is rotating
may result in injury.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
that does not require the first
change for 11 years/137,500
miles (11 years/220,000 km). Do
not mix this coolant with any
– CONTINUED –
Cooling System
467
11
Maintenance and Service
(470,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. When neces-
sary to top up the coolant for any
reason, use only SUBARU
SUPER COOLANT.
If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling Fan, Hose and Con-
nections
s11af03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
1 Normal operating range
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Refer to “Engine Coolant Tem-
perature Gauge” �P164.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” �P494. If the fuse is not
blown, have the cooling system checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
If the frequent addition of coolant is
necessary between vehicle service visits,
it is recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, da-
mage, or looseness.
& Engine Coolant
s11af02
! Checking the coolant level
s11af0201
1 “FULL” level mark
2 “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level, such as at fuel
stops.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is
cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to
the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve
tank is empty, remove the radiator cap
and refill coolant up to just below the
filler neck as shown in the following
illustration.
Cooling System
468
(471,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Fill up to this level.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, check the radiator cap for
debris and the gasket rubber for
damage.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
4. Reinstall the cap and check that the
rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
! Changing the coolant
s11af0202
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
& Inverter with Converter As-
sembly Coolant
s11af05
! Checking the coolant level
s11af0501
WARNING
Never remove the reservoir cap for
inverter with converter assembly
coolant until the hybrid system has
been shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is
cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, remove the reser-
voir cap and add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark.
– CONTINUED –
Cooling System
469
11
Maintenance and Service
(472,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 “FULL” level mark
2 “LOW” level mark
3. After refilling the reserve tank, check
the reservoir cap for debris and the
gasket rubber for damage.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill inverter
with converter assembly coolant
when adding it. If coolant touches
the exhaust pipe, it may cause a
bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
inverter with converter assembly
coolant gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
. Do not splash the inverter with
converter assembly coolant over
painted parts. The alcohol con-
tained in the inverter with con-
verter assembly coolant may da-
mage the paint surface.
4. Reinstall the cap and check that the
rubber gaskets inside the reservoir cap
are in the proper position.
! Changing the coolant
s11af0502
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
11-8. Air Cleaner Element
s11ag
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters in-
take air but also stops flames if the
engine backfires. If the air cleaner
element is not installed when the
engine backfires, you could be
burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter
screen. When the air cleaner element is
perforated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the air
cleaner element.
Air Cleaner Element
470
(473,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Replacing the Air Cleaner
Element
s11ag01
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under
extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
1 Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth
and install a new air cleaner element.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the
air cleaner case (front).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE
Install the air cleaner element so that
the surface with “UPR” printed on it
faces upward.
Air Cleaner Element
471
11
Maintenance and Service
(474,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-9. Spark Plugs
s11ah
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have the
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
& Recommended Spark Plugs
s11ah01
Refer to “Electrical System” �P509.
11-10. Drive Belt
s11ai
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the drive belt should be done according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
11-11. Continuously Variable
Transmission Fluid
s11ay
There is no fluid level gauge. It is un-
necessary to check the continuously vari-
able transmission fluid level. However, if
necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
for inspection.
Spark Plugs
472
(475,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-12. Front Differential Gear
Oil and Rear Differential Gear
Oil
s11bl
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
s11bl01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to “Front
Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil”
�P508.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
11-13. Brake Fluid
s11ao
& Checking the Fluid Level
s11ao01
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Visually check the brake fluid level of the
reservoir monthly on the even surface.
1 “MAX” level line
2 “MIN” level line
Be sure to check the brake fluid level from
the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level
is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed contain-
er.
– CONTINUED –
Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil
473
11
Maintenance and Service
(476,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Recommended Brake Fluid
s11ao02
Refer to “Fluids” �P508.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
11-14. Brake Pedal
s11ar
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
11-15. Replacement of Brake
Pad
s11at
CAUTION
. If you continue to drive despite
the scraping noise from the audi-
ble brake pad wear indicator, it
will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replace-
ment.
. It is recommended that you dis-
connect the 12 V battery before
replacing the brake pad. How-
ever, it is dangerous to discon-
nect the 12 V battery. Have your
SUBARU dealer replace the brake
pad.
Brake Pedal
474
(477,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
The disc brakes have audible wear in-
dicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Breaking-In of New Brake
Pads
s11at01
When replacing the brake pad, use only
genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-
ment, the new parts must be broken in.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Brake pad
s11at0101
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph
(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal
lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
11-16. Tires and Wheels
s11av
& Types of Tires
s11av01
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are all season tires.
! All season tires
s11av0101
All season tires are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However, all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
s11av0102
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or
icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
475
11
Maintenance and Service
(478,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
s11av0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However,
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.
Models)
s11av02
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by
sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused
by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on
the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi-
cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9
kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for every difference of
108F (5.68C) between the temperature in
the garage and the temperature outside.
By way of example, the following table
shows the required tire pressures that
correspond to various outside tempera-
tures when the temperature in the garage
is 608F (15.58C).
Example:
Tire size: 225/55R18 98V
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.58C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
308F (−18C) 38 (260, 2.6) 36 (250, 2.5)
108F (−128C) 40 (275, 2.8) 38 (265, 2.6)
−108F (−238C) 42 (290, 2.9)
41 (280, 2.8)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not go off, the
tire pressure monitoring system may not
be functioning normally. In this event, go to
a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by an
increase in the outside air temperature or
by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned on or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
Tires and Wheels
476
(479,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Other-
wise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious perso-
nal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure to
the COLD tire pressure shown on
the tire inflation pressure label on
the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, refer to “Flat Tires” �P422.
When a replacement tire is mounted
or a wheel rim is replaced without
the original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low tire
pressure warning light will illumi-
nate steadily after blinking for ap-
proximately one minute. This indi-
cates the TPMS is unable to monitor
all four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
! TPMS valve self-registration
s11av0201
When the wheels are replaced (such as
when installing snow tires) or when a new
TPMS valve is mounted on a new installed
wheel, you will need to perform TPMS
valve self-registration. Refer to the follow-
ing procedure to perform TPMS valve self-
registration.
1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves on
the vehicle.
2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
value. For information about the spe-
cified value of the tire pressure, refer to
“Tires” �P509.
3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40
km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until
the low tire pressure warning light turns
off.
NOTE
. When installing TPMS valves, use
only genuine SUBARU parts.
. Registration of TPMS valves can
also be done at a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer.
& Tire Inspection
s11av03
Check on a daily basis that the tires
are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer im-
mediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires
strike curbs or are subjected
to harsh treatment as when the
vehicle is driven on a rough
surface, they can suffer da-
mage that cannot be seen with
the naked eye. This type of
damage does not become evi-
dent until time has passed. Try
not to drive over curbs, pot-
holes or on other rough sur-
faces. If doing so is unavoid-
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
477
11
Maintenance and Service
(480,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
able, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less,
and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also,
make sure the tires are not
pressed against the curb when
you park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration
while driving or find it difficult
to steer the vehicle in a
straight line, one of the tires
and/or wheels may be da-
maged. Drive slowly to the
nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire Pressures and Wear
s11av04
Maintaining the correct tire pres-
sures helps to maximize the tires’
service lives and is essential for
good running performance. Check
and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire at least once a
month and before any long journey.
Tire inflation pressure label
Check the tire pressures when the
tires are cold. Use a pressure
gauge to adjust the tire pressures
to the values shown on the tire
inflation pressure label. The tire
inflation pressure label is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases
the tire pressures. Also, the tire
pressures are affected by the out-
side temperature. It is best to check
tire pressure outdoors before driv-
ing the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire
increases by approximately
4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
)
when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold
when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or
has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires
to adjust pressure. Doing so
will result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from
controllability and ride comfort, and
they cause the tires to wear abnor-
mally.
Tires and Wheels
478
(481,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Correctly inflated tires (tread
worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering
is responsive. Rolling resistance is
low, so fuel consumption is also
lower.
. Under inflated tires (tread worn at
shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel
consumption is also higher.
. Over inflated tires (tread worn in
center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road sur-
face bumps and dips, possibly
resulting in vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly be-
come hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
479
11
Maintenance and Service
(482,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
& Wheel Balance
s11av05
Each wheel was correctly balanced
when your vehicle was new, but the
wheels will become unbalanced as
the tires become worn during use.
Wheel imbalance causes the steer-
ing wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts
from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-
bility. It can also cause steering and
suspension system problems and
abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
that the wheels are not correctly
balanced, have them checked and
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire
repairs and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel align-
ment causes the tires to wear
on one side and reduces the
vehicle’s running stability.
Contact your SUBARU dealer
if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is de-
signed to hold each wheel at a
certain alignment (relative to the
other wheels and to the road) for
optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear Indicators
s11av06
1 New tread
2 Worn tread
3 Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the
tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indi-
cator becomes visible, the tire
Tires and Wheels
480
(483,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
is worn beyond the acceptable
limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. The resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident
.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread
regularly and replace the tires
before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
& Rotational Direction of Tires
s11av11
Example of rotational direction
marked on the sidewall
1 Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing for-
ward direction when the wheels are
fitted.
& Tire Rotation
s11av07
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-
unidirectional tires
1 Front
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
481
11
Maintenance and Service
(484,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Vehicles equipped with unidi-
rectional tires
1 Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to
wheel. Move the tires to the posi-
tions shown in the illustration each
time they are rotated. For the tire
rotation schedule, refer to the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts
are correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel
nuts again and retighten any nut
that has become loose.
& Tire Replacement
s11av08
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires
fitted as standard equipment are optimally
matched to the characteristics of the
vehicle and were selected to give the best
possible combination of running perfor-
mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
essential for every tire to have a size and
construction matching those shown on the
tire inflation pressure label. For more
details about tire inflation pressure, refer
to “Tires” �P509.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the dri-
ver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechan-
ical damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
Tires and Wheels
482
(485,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel Replacement
s11av09
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat tire, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driving
approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If
any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
& Replacement Procedure
s11av13
WARNING
. Use only the jack and the jack
handle provided with your vehi-
cle. The jack supplied with the
vehicle is designed only for chan-
ging a tire. Never put any part of
your body under the vehicle while
the vehicle is being supported by
the jack. Doing so could result in
serious injury or death.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in
serious injury or death.
. Before jacking up the vehicle, be
sure that there are no occupants
or cargo on board.
. Do not jack up the vehicle with an
object on or underneath the jack.
The jack can be unstable and this
can result in a severe accident.
. Always turn off the hybrid system
before raising the flat tire off the
ground using the jack. Never
swing or push the vehicle sup-
ported with the jack. The jack can
come out of the jacking point due
to a jolt and this can result in
serious injury or death.
. All passengers must exit the
vehicle before you raise it with
the jack. Raising the vehicle with
someone inside of it could result
in serious injury or death.
. Do not start the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Doing so
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
483
11
Maintenance and Service
(486,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor
backing plate when removing and
installing the tire. A bent backing
plate may scrape against the disc
rotor and cause noise while the
vehicle is in motion.
NOTE
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking
up the vehicle using a garage jack.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the hybrid
system.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
select lever in the “P” position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
unload all occupants and luggage from
the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the tire to
be replaced.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools are stored under the floor of
the cargo area and under the driver’s
seat. Refer to “Maintenance Tools”
�P420.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
7. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the
tire to be replaced.
Tires and Wheels
484
(487,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
8. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the
jack head engages firmly into the jack-
up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the hole of
the wheel nut wrench.
10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the
vehicle higher than necessary.
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the tire to
be replaced.
12. Before putting the new tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and
hub with a cloth.
13. Put on the new tire. Replace the wheel
nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the new tire is
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an
accident.
14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Tires and Wheels
485
11
Maintenance and Service
(488,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in
the illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque,
refer to “Tires” �P509. Never use your
foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe
extension on the wrench because you
may exceed the specified torque. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at the
nearest automotive service facility.
16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
11-17. Alloy Wheels
s11bm
Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-
maged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed and
replaced for tire rotation or to change a
flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is
loose, tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU
parts designed for alloy wheels.
. When stacking and storing removed
tires, place shock-absorbing material
between the tires to protect the wheels
from becoming scratched.
Alloy Wheels
486
(489,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-18. Windshield Washer
Fluid
s11ax
Windshield washer fluid warning light
When there is only a small amount of
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning light will appear.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid
as follows.
1 “FULL” mark
Remove the washer fluid tank filler cap,
then add fluid until it reaches the “FULL”
mark on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid.
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
If you fill the washer fluid tank with a fluid
with a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the washer fluid tank
and washer nozzles by operating the
washer for a certain period of time.
Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid
remaining in the piping is too low for the
outside temperature, it may freeze and
block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the washer fluid tank.
– CONTINUED –
Windshield Washer Fluid
487
11
Maintenance and Service
(490,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Be careful foreign matter does
not contaminate the washer fluid
when filling the tank. Contamina-
tion could cause malfunctions,
such as clogging the pump.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
11-19. Replacement of Wiper
Blades
s11az
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and rear window
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not,
however, use detergent to clean the blade
rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth
(and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive
cleaner) when you clean the blade rub-
bers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade
strongly, the black coating component will
peel off, which will cause the wiper to
judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that
the rubber has not come loose. After
cleaning the window glass and wiper blade
rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean
water. Rinse the window until the water
does not form beads on the glass. This
indicates that the glass is clean.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the pas-
senger-side wiper arm, first raise
the driver-side wiper arm. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the wind-
shield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached posi-
tions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the wind-
shield.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
Replacement of Wiper Blades
488
(491,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield Wiper Blade As-
sembly
s11az01
NOTE
Do not lower the wiper arm while the
wiper blade assembly is removed.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
First raise the driver’s side wiper arm
and then raise the front passenger’s
side wiper arm.
CAUTION
Hold the wiper arm when replacing
the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
blade, may result in blade deforma-
tion.
1 Lock knob
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by
hand, push the lock knob to release the
lock, and then pull out the wiper blade
assembly.
NOTE
Do not use a hard object to push the
lock knob. The lock knob may be
scratched.
3. When installing the wiper blade as-
sembly, align it with the wiper arm
connection part and then slide it in the
opposite direction of removal to install.
After installing the wiper blade assem-
bly, check that the connection part is
locked completely.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of Wiper Blades
489
11
Maintenance and Service
(492,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Window Wiper Blade Rubber
s11az05
Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.
1 Slit
1. Pull the wiper blade rubber from the
right side in the order of (1), (2) and (3)
until the slit on the wiper blade can be
seen position.
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber
through the slit to remove it.
3. Insert a new wiper blade rubber into
the slit. Do not insert the wiper blade
rubber into the wrong slit.
Replacement of Wiper Blades
490
(493,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Rear Window Wiper Blade
Assembly
s11az03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
& Rear Window Wiper Blade
Rubber
s11az04
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1 Metal spines
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of Wiper Blades
491
11
Maintenance and Service
(494,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the
metal spines from the old blade rubber
and install them in the new blade
rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained
properly, the wiper may scratch the rear
window glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in
place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
11-20. Battery
s11ba
& 12 V Battery
s11ba02
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any 12 V battery, be sure to
extinguish all cigarettes,
matches, and lighters. Never ex-
pose a 12 V battery to an open
flame or electric sparks. Batteries
give off a gas which is highly
flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working
near any 12 V battery. Never lean
over a 12 V battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
Battery
492
(495,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the 12 V battery.
. Charge the 12 V battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling.
1 Cap
2 Upper level
3 Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water. Refer to
“Electrical System” �P509.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the 12 V battery
because it will shorten battery life.
NOTE
To avoid battery drain, do not use
electric power (e.g., lights, wipers,
climate control, seat heaters, etc.) for
longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off. If using the radio, room
lights or other electrical equipment
with the hybrid system off, even if the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” position,
the 12 V battery will drain.
& High Voltage Battery
s11ba03
The operation of the engine and regen-
erative brakes charges the high voltage
battery. Because of this, you do not have to
charge the high voltage battery from an
outside source.
However, in order to maintain the battery in
good condition, drive the vehicle at least
once every 2 to 3 months for at least 30
minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If you leave
the vehicle for a long time, the battery may
discharge.
Battery
493
11
Maintenance and Service
(496,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
11-21. Fuses
s11bb
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
NOTE
Fuse rating and used circuit are de-
scribed on behind each fuse box cover.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
1 Spare fuses
2 Fuse puller
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in
the engine compartment. Also, the spare
fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse
box cover.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller
when removing it from the main fuse box.
1 Good
2 Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the corre-
sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover.
Fuses
494
(497,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a pro-
blem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
repairs.
11-22. Installation of Acces-
sories
s11bd
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories
on your vehicle.
11-23. Replacing Bulbs
s11be
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
Chart” �P511. For replacement,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Do not touch the glass portion of the
light bulb with bare hands. When
holding the glass portion is unavoid-
able, hold it with a clean dry cloth to
avoid getting moisture and grease
on the bulb. If there are any finger-
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol. Also, if the
bulb is scratched or dropped, it may
blow out or crack.
– CONTINUED –
Installation of Accessories
495
11
Maintenance and Service
(498,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Headlights
s11be18
LED headlight warning light
The LED headlight warning light illumi-
nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
We recommend that you have your vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
& Rear Combination Lights
s11be05
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clips of the covers.
2. Remove the side cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
4. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly rearward to remove it from the
vehicle.
Replacing Bulbs
496
(499,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
1 Rear turn signal light
6. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
7. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
8. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
9. Reconnect the electrical connector.
10. Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged
part of the combination light assembly
securely to each holder of the vehicle
side.
11. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
12. Reinstall the side cover.
& Back-Up Light
s11be50
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing Bulbs
497
11
Maintenance and Service
(500,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch. Apply a flat-head screwdriver
to the light cover as shown in the
illustration, and pry the light cover off
from the rear gate trim.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
& License Plate Light
s11be07
1. License plate light must be pushed
inwards, then pulled out to be re-
moved.
Replacing Bulbs
498
(501,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the
license plate light cover.
& Other Bulbs
s11be29
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
& Adjusting Headlight Aim
s11be57
1 Adjustment screw A
2 Adjustment screw B
! Before checking the headlight aim-
ing
s11be5701
1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of
gasoline and the area around the
headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Sit in the driver’s seat.
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
! Headlight aim adjustment
s11be5702
1 Adjustment direction mark
1. Turn the screw A clockwise or counter-
clockwise to adjust it.
Remember the direction of the rotation
and number of rotations.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing Bulbs
499
11
Maintenance and Service
(502,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
1 Adjustment direction mark
2. Turn screw B the same number of turns
and in the same direction as step 2.
NOTE
. If the headlight aim cannot be ad-
justed, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
. To inspect of the headlight aim
position, consult a SUBARU dealer.
11-24. Replacing Battery
s11bk
The access key fob battery may be
discharged under the following conditions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable.
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable.
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard
distance.
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key fob when
replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the ac-
cess key fob when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals.
It may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU
dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key fob functions
properly.
. To clear the access key fob battery
warning message after replacing the
battery, carry the key fob into the
vehicle. Then, without depressing
the brake pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position and then
to the “OFF” position.
– If the access key fob battery
warning message does not dis-
Replacing Battery
500
(503,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
appear even after you replace the
battery, it is possible that another
access key fob, other than the
one you are holding, is nearby
and the warning message is
responding to that access key
fob. Replace the battery of the
second access key fob as well
and follow the same procedure.
– Do not perform the warning mes-
sage clearing procedure while
holding two or more access key
fobs.
& Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob
s11bk01
CAUTION
. When removing or fitting the
access key fob cover, make sure
that the plastic part does not
come off or become misaligned.
. Before replacing the battery, re-
move any static electricity.
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or
equivalent
1 Release button
2 Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap
to remove the cover.
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
side facing upward as shown in the
figure.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing Battery
501
11
Maintenance and Service
(504,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
by fitting the projections and recesses
together.
Replacing Battery
502
(505,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s12
12-1. Specifications ............................................... 504
Dimensions ........................................................504
Engine................................................................ 505
Fuel....................................................................505
Electric Motor (Traction Motor)............................505
High Voltage Battery ........................................... 506
Engine Oil .......................................................... 506
Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil...508
Fluids ................................................................. 508
Engine Coolant................................................... 509
Inverter with converter assembly coolant ............ 509
Electrical System................................................509
Tires .................................................................. 509
Brake Disc ......................................................... 510
12-2. Bulb Chart......................................................511
Safety Precautions ............................................. 511
Bulb Chart ......................................................... 512
12-3. Vehicle Identification.....................................514
12-4. Function Settings ..........................................515
Function Settings and Adjustments on
the Center Information Display ......................... 515
Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding
Center Information Display ............................... 515
Function Settings and Adjustments Performed
by a Dealer ...................................................... 515
Specifications
12
Specifications
(506,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
12-1. Specifications s12aa
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
s12aa01
in (mm)
Item
Overall length 176.4 (4,480)
Overall width 70.9 (1,800)
Overall height 63.0 (1,600)
Wheel base 105.1 (2,670)
Tread
Front 61.2 (1,555)
Rear 61.2 (1,555)
Ground clearance*
1
8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
Specifications
504
(507,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Engine
s12aa02
Engine model FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 12.0
Firing order
1 – 3 – 2 – 4
& Fuel
s12aa08
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “
Fuel” �P297.
& Electric Motor (Traction Motor)
s12aa23
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 88 kW
Maximum torque
199 lbf·ft (270 N·m, 27.5 kgf·m)
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
505
12
Specifications
(508,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& High Voltage Battery
s12aa24
Type Lithium-ion battery
Voltage 3.7 V/cell
Capacity 4.3 (4.5
*
) Ah
Quantity 70 cells
Overall voltage
259 V
*: According to standardized test methods (SAE J2288)
& Engine Oil
s12aa14
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine Oil” �P465.
NOTE
Have the procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended that
you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
s12aa1401
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described in the following.
! Alternative engine oil
s12aa1402
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on
the temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
Specifications
506
(509,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. When adding oil, you may use different brands together as long as they are the same ILSAC or API classification and SAE
viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.
Oil grade
(If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, use the following alternative oil.)
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
ILSAC (International Lubricant Spe-
cification Advisory Committee) GF-
6B, which can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark (Shield
mark)
0W-16 synthetic oil is the required oil for
optimum engine performance and protec-
tion. Conventional oil may be used if syn-
thetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-16 synthetic oil is not available, 0W-
20 conventional oil may be used if replen-
ishment is needed but should be changed
to 0W-16 synthetic oil at the next oil
change.
· Adding the oil from L to F
level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9
Imp qt)
· Changing the oil and oil
filter:
4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9
Imp qt)
· Changing the oil:
4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7
Imp qt)
ILSAC (International Lubricant Spe-
cification Advisory Committee) GF-
6A, which can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark (Starburst
mark)
API (American Petroleum Institute)
classification SP with the words “RE-
SOURCE CONSERVING”
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
507
12
Specifications
(510,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil
s12aa13
Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)
API classification GL-5 (75W-90)
Oil capacity*
1
1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*
2
“Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil” �P473
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. Check the oil level after refilling the gearbox with oil.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.
& Fluids
s12aa10
Fluid Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Continuously variable transmission
fluid
Consult your SUBARU dealer. 6.2 US qt (5.9 liters, 5.2 Imp qt)
“
Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion Fluid” �P472
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake
fluid
—
“
Brake Fluid” �P473
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
Specifications
508
(511,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Engine Coolant
s12aa11
Coolant capacity Coolant type
7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “
Cooling System” �P467.
& Inverter with converter assembly coolant
s12aa29
Coolant capacity Coolant type
1.8 US qt (1.7 liters, 1.5 Imp qt)
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “
Cooling System” �P467.
& Electrical System
s12aa03
Battery type 75D23L
Spark plugs
DILKAR7Q8(NGK)
& Tires
s12aa05
Tire size 225/55R18 98V
Wheel size 18 6 7 J
Pressure
Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*
1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “
Replacement Procedure” �P483.
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
509
12
Specifications
(512,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Brake Disc
s12aa18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Specifications
510
(513,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
12-2. Bulb Chart
s12ac
& Safety Precautions
s12ac03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
– CONTINUED –
Bulb Chart
511
12
Specifications
(514,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Bulb Chart
s12ac04
NOTE
Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Bulb Chart
512
(515,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Wattage Bulb No.
1 Vanity mirror lights 12 V-2 W —
2 Map lights 12 V-8 W —
3 Dome light 12 V-8 W —
4 Backup light 12 V-16 W W16W
5 Cargo area light 12 V-5 W W5W
6 License plate lights 12 V-5 W W5W
7 Rear turn signal lights 12 V-21 W WY21W
A Low and high beam headlights — —
Daytime running light — —
B Front fog lights — —
C Front turn signal lights — —
D Parking lights — —
Accessory lamp — —
E Front side marker light — —
F Side turn signal lights — —
G High-mounted stop light — —
H Stop lights — —
I Tail and stop lights — —
Rear side marker lights — —
Bulb Chart
513
12
Specifications
(516,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
12-3. Vehicle Identification
s12ad
1 Vehicle identification number (under the
floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
2 Emission control label
3 Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle
placard)
4 Certification label
5 Vehicle identification number
6 Model number label
7 Fuel label
8 Air conditioner label
Vehicle Identification
514
(517,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
12-4. Function Settings s12ag
& Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display
s12ag01
Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to
“Center Information Display (CID)” �P199.
& Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display
s12ag02
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 149
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
142
& Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer
s12ag03
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
Alarm system
Monitoring start delay time (after closing doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light illumination ON/OFF OFF
Keyless access with push-button Audible signal volume* Level 1 to 7 Level 6
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal volume* Level 1 to 7 Level 6
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto dimmer cancel
Sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer
cancel
OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/
Max
Mid
High beam assist function High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear
wiper
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation Operation/Non-operation
U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation
Other models: Operation
*: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.
Function Settings
515
12
Specifications
(518,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(519,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s13
13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 518
13-2. Tire Information ............................................ 518
Tire Labeling ......................................................518
Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure.................520
Glossary of Tire Terminology ..............................521
Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices .....526
Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine ............... 526
Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle
Load Capacities................................................ 529
Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading
on Handling and Stopping and on Tires ............ 529
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit........... 530
13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards.....530
TREADWEAR ..................................................... 531
TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 531
TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 531
13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA)...................532
13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada
in Order to Report a Safety Concern
Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) .................532
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(520,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
13-1. For U.S.A.
s13aa
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
13-2. Tire Information
s13ab
& Tire Labeling
s13ab01
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
s13ab0101
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
s13ab010101
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as
passenger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating
Descriptions
s13ab010102
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
For U.S.A.
518
(521,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum
load a tire can carry at the
speed indicated by its speed
symbol, at maximum inflation
pressure.
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s cap-
ability to travel at established
and predetermined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
s13ab0102
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. Here is a brief review of
the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
Type A
(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(3) Tire Size Code
(4) Tire Type Code (Optional,
within 4 letters)
(5) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
519
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(522,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Type B
(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Plant Code
(3) Manufacturer’s Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
! Other markings
s13ab0103
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
s13ab010301
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inflated. For example, “350 kPa
(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
! Maximum load rating
s13ab010302
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction type
s13ab010303
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
s13ab010304
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
STER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-
ing (UTQG)
s13ab010305
For details, refer to “Uniform Tire
Quality Grading Standards” �P530.
& Recommended Tire Inflation
Pressure
s13ab02
! Recommended cold tire in-
flation pressure
s13ab0201
For the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires, refer to “
Tires” �P509.
Tire Information
520
(523,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
! Vehicle placard
s13ab0202
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adverse safety conse-
quences of under-inflation
s13ab0203
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper
inflation
s13ab0204
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a short
distance warms up the tires and
increases the tire pressures. Also,
the tire pressures are affected by
the outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before
driving the vehicle. When a tire
becomes warm, the air inside it
expands, causing the tire pressure
to increase. Be careful not to mis-
takenly release air from a warm tire
to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of Tire Terminology
s13ab03
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
521
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(524,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white letter-
ing or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or
deeper than the same mold-
ing on the other sidewall of
the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that
must always face outward
when mounting on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
Tire Information
522
(525,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
523
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(526,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance between rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or pro-
tective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound
from the cord material in the side-
wall.
. Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index
equal to or greater than 110, com-
pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan-
dard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered
Surfaces, and that is marked with
an Alpine Symbol “
” on at least
one sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
Tire Information
524
(527,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section) and
dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
525
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(528,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
& Tire Care – Maintenance and
Safety Practices
s13ab04
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious da-
mage, nails, and stones. At the
same time, check the tires for
abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become
visible. When a tire’s tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the
tire is worn beyond the accepta-
ble limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at even low
speeds in wet weather can cause
the vehicle to hydroplane. Possi-
ble resulting loss of vehicle con-
trol can lead to an accident.
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 6,000 miles (10,000
km). For details about tire rota-
tion, refer to “
Tire Rotation”
�P481
. Replace any damaged
or unevenly worn tire at the time
of rotation. After tire rotation,
adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are
correctly tightened. For informa-
tion about the tightening torque
and tightening sequence for the
wheel nuts, refer to “
Flat Tires”
�P422.
& Vehicle Load Limit – How to
Determine
s13ab05
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side
B-pillar. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue load
of a trailer (if applicable))
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con-
figurations
s13ab0501
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples:
Tire Information
526
(529,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo
can be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to two), the calculations
are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
527
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(530,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or
more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =
176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo
can be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
Tire Information
528
(531,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or
more.
& Determining Compatibility of
Tire and Vehicle Load Capa-
cities
s13ab06
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse Safety Conse-
quences of Overloading on
Handling and Stopping and
on Tires
s13ab07
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
– CONTINUED –
Tire Information
529
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(532,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could
break or experience accelerated
wear that will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
s13ab08
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and
there will be five 150 lbs (68 kg)
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650
lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step
4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to deter-
mine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
13-3. Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards
s13ac
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
530
(533,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
All passenger car tires must con-
form to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& TREADWEAR
s13ac02
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C
s13ac03
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteris-
tics.
& TEMPERATURE A, B, C
s13ac04
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
531
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
(534,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
13-4. Reporting Safety De-
fects (USA)
s13ah
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Subaru of America, Inc. To
contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.
gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE, West Building, Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.
gov.
13-5. How to Contact Trans-
port Canada in Order to Re-
port a Safety Concern
Relating to the Vehicle
(Canada)
s13cf
Reporting Safety Defects (USA)
532
(535,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(536,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(537,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
s14
Index
14
Index
(538,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
There is an illustrated index in this Owner’s Manual. If you have
difficulty finding your target items in the index, try to use the
illustrated index.
Illustrated index ......................................................... 13
A
Abbreviation ................................................................ 4
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .................................... 327
Warning light ........................................................ 174
Access key fob ......................................................... 126
Warning indicator.................................................. 180
Accessories ............................................................. 495
Accessory power outlet ............................................. 280
Activation of valet mode ............................................ 226
Air cleaner element ................................................... 470
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control....................................... 259
Manual climate control system ............................... 260
Air filtration system ................................................... 267
Airflow mode selection............................................... 260
Alarm system ........................................................... 147
All-Wheel Drive......................................................... 395
All-Wheel Drive warning light.................................. 178
Alloy wheel .............................................................. 486
Cleaning .............................................................. 449
Antenna................................................................... 272
Roof antenna ....................................................... 272
Arming the system .................................................... 147
Armrest .................................................................... 56
Ashtray.................................................................... 288
Assist grip................................................................ 289
Audio
Antenna .............................................................. 272
Set ..................................................................... 272
Auto dimmer cancel function...................................... 166
Auto on/off headlights ............................................... 227
Sensor................................................................ 229
Auto Vehicle Hold..................................................... 338
Function.............................................................. 338
ON indicator light ................................................. 177
ON/OFF icon ....................................................... 205
Auto-dimming mirror ................................................. 243
Auto-dimming mirror/compass............................. 243, 244
Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................... 235
Warning light ....................................................... 186
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR)................................................ 58
Automatic Vehicle Shut Down function ........................ 307
B
Battery .................................................................... 492
12 V battery ........................................................ 492
Drainage reduction functions ................................. 161
High voltage ........................................................ 493
Jump starting....................................................... 432
Replacement (access key fob)............................... 501
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........ 314
Blind Spot Detection (BSD) ....................................... 358
Booster cushion ......................................................... 83
Booster seat .............................................................. 83
Bottle holder ............................................................ 279
Brake ...................................................................... 325
Index
536
(539,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Breaking-in of new brake pads ............................... 475
Disc .................................................................... 510
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .................. 326
Fluid............................................................ 473, 508
Pad ..................................................................... 475
Parking................................................................ 336
Pedal .................................................................. 474
Tips..................................................................... 325
Brake system ........................................................... 325
Assist .................................................................. 326
Warning light ........................................................ 175
BSD/RCTA............................................................... 357
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................... 361
OFF indicator ............................................... 187, 363
Warning indicator.......................................... 187, 363
Warning volume.................................................... 362
Bulb
Chart................................................................... 511
Replacement........................................................ 495
C
Camera
Multi View Monitor ................................................ 344
Rear view camera................................................. 352
Cargo area
Cover .................................................................. 292
Light.................................................................... 275
Tie-down hooks .................................................... 294
Catalytic converter .................................................... 393
Center console ......................................................... 278
Center console tray................................................... 278
Center information display (CID) ................................ 199
11.6-inch display models ....................................... 201
Cleaning ............................................................. 452
Display Off .......................................................... 205
Center tray .............................................................. 277
Changing
Coolant ............................................................... 469
Engine oil and oil filter .......................................... 466
Washer fluid ........................................................ 487
Charge warning light ................................................. 172
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light ..................................................................... 171
Checking
Coolant level ................................................ 468, 469
Fluid level (brake fluid).......................................... 473
Fluid level (washer fluid) ....................................... 487
Oil level (engine oil).............................................. 465
Child restraint systems ................................................ 72
Installation of a booster cushion.............................. 83
Installation of a booster seat................................... 83
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt........................... 77
Lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .................... 85
Top tether anchorages ........................................... 90
Child safety ................................................................ 5
Locks.................................................................. 149
Chime
Light ................................................................... 227
Seatbelt .............................................................. 167
Cleaning
Alloy wheels ........................................................ 449
Center information display..................................... 452
Index
537
14
Index
(540,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Exterior care ........................................................ 448
High voltage battery air intake ................................ 452
Interior................................................................. 451
Ventilation grille .................................................... 266
Climate control system .............................................. 256
Automatic ............................................................ 259
Manual ................................................................ 260
Clock....................................................................... 225
Coat hook................................................................ 290
Combination meter display (color LCD) ....................... 190
Compass ......................................................... 243, 244
Continuously variable transmission (CVT).................... 316
Fluid............................................................ 472, 508
Coolant............................................................ 468, 509
Changing ............................................................. 469
Temperature gauge ............................................... 164
Cooling system......................................................... 467
Corrosion protection.................................................. 450
Cup holder............................................................... 278
Front passenger’s ................................................. 278
Rear passenger’s ................................................. 279
D
Daytime running light (DRL) system............................ 233
Defogger ................................................................. 241
Defrosting ................................................................ 265
Deicer ..................................................................... 241
Differential gear oil.................................................... 473
Dimensions .............................................................. 504
Disarming the alarm system....................................... 148
Display Off............................................................... 205
Dome light............................................................... 274
Door
Locks.................................................................. 143
Open indicator ..................................................... 178
Unlock selection function....................................... 132
Double trip meter...................................................... 163
Drainage reduction functions............................... 146, 161
Drive belts ............................................................... 472
Driver Monitoring System ................................... 220, 378
OFF indicator light......................................... 188, 385
Operation indicator light ................................. 188, 385
Register user....................................................... 220
Temporary stop indicator light ......................... 189, 385
Warning light ................................................ 188, 385
DriverFocus ............................................................. 378
Driving
All-Wheel Drive model .......................................... 395
Drinking ................................................................. 7
Drugs .................................................................... 7
Foreign countries ................................................. 394
Off road .............................................................. 396
Pets....................................................................... 8
Snowy and icy roads ............................................ 399
Tips ............................................................. 322, 395
Tired or sleepy........................................................ 7
Winter................................................................. 398
Driving using both the electric motor and engine ............ 30
Driving using only the electric motor ............................. 29
Dynamic Ventilation .................................................. 261
Index
538
(541,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
E
Electric motor (traction motor) .................................... 505
Electrical system....................................................... 509
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system......... 328
Warning............................................................... 176
Electronic parking brake .................................... 336, 440
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ....... 338
Indicator light........................................................ 176
Switch ................................................................. 336
Warning....................................................... 176, 341
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................ 57
Energy flow screen .................................................... 33
Engine..................................................................... 505
Compartment overview.......................................... 464
Coolant........................................................ 468, 509
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 6, 392
Hood ................................................................... 462
Hood open warning light ........................................ 178
Hood release knob................................................ 462
Low oil level warning indicator................................ 172
Oil............................................................... 465, 506
Overheating ......................................................... 434
Starting & stopping ............................................... 304
EV (Electric Vehicle)
Drive mode ........................................................... 31
Drive mode indicator ............................................. 189
Drive mode switch ................................................. 31
Indicator .............................................................. 189
Event data recorder .................................................... 11
Exterior care ............................................................ 448
F
Flat tire repair kit ...................................................... 424
Technical data of air compressor............................ 430
Flat tires.................................................................. 422
Floor mat................................................................. 290
Fluid
Brake.................................................................. 473
Continuously variable transmission......................... 472
Fluid level ........................................................... 508
Fog light.................................................................. 235
Indicator light....................................................... 187
Switch................................................................. 235
Front
Differential gear oil ........................................ 473, 508
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators... 170
Passenger’s seatbelt warning light ......................... 167
Seatbelt pretensioners ........................................... 68
Front seats ................................................................ 44
Forward and backward adjustment.......................... 47
Head restraint adjustment ...................................... 48
Manual seat ......................................................... 47
Power seat........................................................... 47
Reclining......................................................... 47, 48
Seat height adjustment .......................................... 47
Fuel ................................................................. 297, 505
Consumption indicator .......................................... 197
Economy hints ..................................................... 392
Filler door and cap ............................................... 298
Gauge ................................................................ 164
Low fuel warning light ........................................... 177
Requirements ............................................... 297, 505
Index
539
14
Index
(542,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Tank capacity ....................................................... 505
Fuses ...................................................................... 494
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................. 403
General precautions when starting/stopping hybrid
system ................................................................. 304
Glove box ................................................................ 277
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)......................... 403
H
Hazard warning flasher...................................... 162, 420
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ............................................................. 48
Rear seat.............................................................. 54
Headlight ................................................................. 227
Aim adjustment..................................................... 499
Beam leveler........................................................ 235
Control switch ...................................................... 227
Flasher ................................................................ 230
Indicator light........................................................ 186
Warning light ........................................................ 186
Welcome lighting function ...................................... 228
Heated Steering Wheel system .................................. 253
High beam assist
Function .............................................................. 230
Indicator .............................................................. 186
High/low beam change (dimmer) ................................ 230
High voltage battery ............................................ 35, 506
High voltage battery and high voltage battery air
intake .................................................................... 39
Hill descent control ................................................... 333
Hill start assist ......................................................... 342
HomeLink
®
............................................................... 244
Hook
Cargo tie-down .................................................... 294
Coat ................................................................... 290
Convenient tie-down............................................. 294
Shopping bag ...................................................... 291
Towing and tie-down............................................. 436
Horn ....................................................................... 254
Hose and connections............................................... 468
Hybrid fail lamp ........................................................ 189
Hybrid READY indicator light ..................................... 189
Hybrid system
Features .............................................................. 28
Operation mode .................................................... 29
Overheat warning light .......................................... 189
Precautions .......................................................... 35
Warning message ............................................ 40, 42
Hybrid vehicle driving tips............................................ 40
I
Icy road surface warning indicator .............................. 188
Illumination brightness control .................................... 165
Immobilizer .............................................................. 140
Indicator/Indicator light
Auto Vehicle Hold.......................................... 177, 338
BSD/RCTA OFF................................................... 187
Door open........................................................... 178
Driver Monitoring System OFF............................... 188
Driver Monitoring System operation................. 188, 385
Index
540
(543,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Driver Monitoring System temporary stop ........ 189, 385
Electronic parking brake ................................ 176, 336
EV (Electric Vehicle) ............................................. 189
EV (Electric Vehicle) drive mode............................. 189
Front fog light ....................................................... 187
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF.......... 170
Headlight ............................................................. 186
High beam ................................................... 186, 227
High beam assist .......................................... 186, 230
Hill descent control ....................................... 187, 333
Hybrid READY ..................................................... 189
Intelligent (I) mode ........................................ 185, 323
Pedestrian alert system OFF.................................. 189
RAB OFF.............................................. 188, 369, 376
Select lever/Gear position ...................................... 186
SI-DRIVE..................................................... 185, 323
Sonar Audible Alarm OFF...................................... 188
Sport (S) mode............................................. 185, 323
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF ....................... 186
Turn signal........................................................... 186
Vehicle detected in adjacent lane............................ 187
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF....................... 180, 329
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation................ 179, 329
X-MODE...................................................... 187, 332
Inside mirror............................................................. 242
Interior lights ............................................................ 274
Inverter with converter assembly coolant
reservoir ................................................ 464, 469, 509
J
Jack and jack handle ........................................ 420, 421
Jack handle ............................................................. 421
Jump starting ........................................................... 432
K
Key
Access key fob ............................................. 126, 141
Replacement ....................................................... 140
Keyless access with push-button start system ............. 126
Disabling keyless access functions......................... 135
Locking and unlocking doors ................................. 129
Warning chimes and warning indicator............. 138, 180
When access key fob does not operate properly...... 440
Keyless entry system ................................................ 141
L
Lane Change Assist (LCA) ........................................ 358
Lap belt pretensioner .................................................. 70
Leather seat materials............................................... 451
LED headlight warning light ................................ 186, 496
LED headlights......................................................... 496
License plate light .................................................... 498
Light
Back-up ....................................................... 497, 512
Cargo area................................................... 275, 512
Control switch...................................................... 227
Daytime running................................................... 233
Dome .................................................. 274, 495, 512
Front fog ............................................................. 235
Front position................................................ 227, 512
Front side marker.......................................... 227, 512
License plate ................................................ 498, 512
Index
541
14
Index
(544,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Map ............................................................ 274, 512
Rear combination.......................................... 496, 512
Rear gate ............................................................ 512
Rear turn signal ..................................... 236, 496, 512
Tail and stop ........................................................ 512
Turn signal................................................... 236, 512
Vanity mirror................................................. 276, 512
Loading your vehicle ................................................. 402
Low fuel warning light................................................ 177
Low tire pressure warning light ................................... 173
Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) ........... 85
M
Maintenance
Precautions.......................................................... 457
Schedule ............................................................. 457
Seatbelt ................................................................ 66
Tips..................................................................... 460
Tools ................................................................... 420
Malfunction indicator light (Check Engine warning
light)..................................................................... 171
Manual
Climate control ..................................................... 260
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ............... 321
Seat ..................................................................... 47
Map light .................................................. 274, 495, 512
Maximum load limits.................................................. 409
Meter display mode................................................... 192
Meters and gauges ................................................... 162
Mirror defogger......................................................... 241
Mirrors..................................................................... 242
Moonroof.......................................................... 154, 444
Switch................................................................. 155
N
New vehicle break-in driving ...................................... 392
O
Odometer ................................................................ 163
Off road driving ........................................................ 396
Oil filter ................................................................... 466
Oil level
Differential gear ................................................... 473
Engine ................................................................ 465
Warning light ....................................................... 172
Oil pressure warning light .......................................... 172
On-road and off-road driving ......................................... 9
One-touch lane changer ............................................ 236
Outside
Mirror defogger .................................................... 241
Mirrors ................................................................ 251
Overheating engine .................................................. 434
P
Parking your vehicle
Parking brake ...................................................... 336
Tips .................................................................... 341
Passenger seatbelt reminder ..................................... 167
Pedestrian alert system............................................... 32
Periodic inspections.................................................. 394
Petrol fuel................................................................ 297
PIN Code Access ..................................................... 132
Index
542
(545,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Power
Outlets ................................................................ 280
Outside mirrors..................................................... 252
Seat ..................................................................... 47
Steering............................................................... 324
Steering warning light............................................ 178
USB power supply ................................................ 281
Window switches .................................................. 150
Windows.............................................................. 150
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 71, 122
Preparing to drive ..................................................... 303
Push-button
Ignition switch ...................................................... 160
Starting and stopping engine.................................. 304
R
Rear
Combination lights ................................................ 496
Differential gear oil........................................ 473, 508
Gate.................................................................... 442
Turn signal light .................................................... 496
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA).......................... 351, 358
Rear gate ................................................................ 153
Rear Seat Reminder .................................................. 72
Rear seatbelt warning light......................................... 169
Rear seats ................................................................ 50
Armrest ................................................................ 56
Folding down......................................................... 51
Head restraint adjustment ....................................... 54
Rear view camera..................................................... 352
Rear window
Defogger............................................................. 241
Wiper and washer switch ...................................... 240
Wiper blade rubber............................................... 491
Wiper blades ....................................................... 491
Recommended
Brake fluid........................................................... 508
Continuously variable transmission fluid.................. 508
Differential gear oil ............................................... 473
Engine oil............................................................ 506
Spark plugs ......................................................... 509
Refueling................................................................. 299
Remote control mirror switch ..................................... 252
Remote engine start system ...................................... 309
Replacing battery ................................................. 314
Remote keyless entry system .................................... 141
Replacing battery ................................................. 500
Replacement
Access key fob battery.......................................... 501
Air cleaner element .............................................. 471
Brake pad ........................................................... 474
Cabin air filter ...................................................... 267
Key .................................................................... 140
Remote engine start transmitter battery .................. 314
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................ 142
Tire..................................................................... 482
Wheel ................................................................. 483
Wiper blade rubber............................................... 488
Wiper blades ....................................................... 488
Replacing bulbs ....................................................... 495
Back-up light ....................................................... 497
Index
543
14
Index
(546,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Headlight ............................................................. 496
License plate light................................................. 498
Rear combination light........................................... 496
Rear turn signal light ............................................. 496
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
OFF indicator ........................................ 188, 369, 376
ON/OFF setting .................................................... 376
Warning indicator................................... 188, 369, 376
Reverse Automatic Braking system............................. 366
Rocking the vehicle................................................... 402
Roof
Antenna............................................................... 272
Roof rails ................................................................. 404
Roof tent ................................................................. 405
S
Safety
Precautions when driving.......................................... 5
Symbol ................................................................... 4
Warnings ................................................................ 3
Sealing flat tire ......................................................... 422
Flat tire repair kit .................................................. 424
How to seal.......................................................... 425
Safety precautions ................................................ 422
Seat
Fabric.................................................................. 451
Front .................................................................... 44
Heater .................................................................. 49
Manual seat .......................................................... 47
Power seat............................................................ 47
Rear seat.............................................................. 50
Seatbelt................................................................. 5, 56
Extender .............................................................. 66
Fastening ............................................................. 58
Maintenance......................................................... 66
Pretensioners ....................................................... 68
Safety tips............................................................ 56
Warning light and chime........................................ 167
Security
Alarm system....................................................... 147
Immobilizer.......................................................... 140
Indicator light....................................................... 185
Select lever ............................................................. 317
Position indicator.................................................. 186
Shift lock function................................................. 319
Shift paddle ............................................................. 321
Shopping bag hook................................................... 291
Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 69
SI-DRIVE ................................................................ 323
Indicator.............................................................. 185
Intelligent (I) mode indicator ........................... 185, 323
Mode .................................................................. 323
Sport (S) mode indicator ....................................... 323
Switch................................................................. 323
Snow tires ........................................................ 401, 476
Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 399
Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator ............................ 188
Sounding a panic alarm ............................................ 142
Spark plugs ...................................................... 472, 509
Specifications........................................................... 504
Speedometer ........................................................... 162
Index
544
(547,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag)................................................................ 5, 91
System monitors................................................... 120
System servicing .................................................. 121
System warning light .............................. 101, 120, 170
Starting and stopping hybrid system............................ 304
State emission testing (U.S. only) ............................... 302
Steering lock ............................................................ 308
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ......................... 234
OFF indicator light ........................................ 186, 234
Warning light ........................................................ 186
Steering wheel
Heated Steering Wheel system .............................. 253
Lock.................................................................... 308
Power steering ..................................................... 324
Tilt/telescopic ....................................................... 252
Warning light ........................................................ 178
Storage compartment................................................ 277
Summer tires............................................................ 475
Sun visors................................................................ 275
Sunshade ................................................................ 156
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) airbag ............... 91
Curtain airbag ................................................ 99, 113
Driver’s airbag................................................ 99, 101
Far-side airbag ............................................... 99, 113
Front passenger’s airbag ................................. 99, 101
Front seat side airbag ..................................... 99, 113
Knee airbag ................................................... 99, 101
Rear seat side airbag ...................................... 99, 113
Seat cushion airbag ............................................... 99
Surround View Monitor .............................................. 344
Synthetic leather upholstery....................................... 452
T
Temperature gauge................................................... 164
Tether (child restraint system) ................................ 85, 90
Tie-down hooks........................................................ 436
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ..................................... 252
Tire.................................................................. 475, 509
All season ........................................................... 475
Chains ................................................................ 401
Information .......................................................... 518
Inspection ........................................................... 477
Pressures and wear ............................................. 478
Replacement ....................................................... 482
Rotation .............................................................. 481
Size and pressure ................................................ 509
Summer .............................................................. 475
Types ................................................................. 475
Winter (snow) ...................................................... 476
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) .......................................... 173, 334, 430, 476
Screen................................................................ 335
Warning light ....................................................... 173
Tires and wheels ...................................................... 475
Tools....................................................................... 420
Top tether anchorages .......................................... 85, 90
Towing .................................................................... 435
Flat-bed truck ...................................................... 439
Hooks ................................................................. 436
Tie-down hooks ................................................... 436
Weight ................................................................ 409
Index
545
14
Index
(548,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Trailer
Connecting .......................................................... 408
Hitch ........................................................... 406, 413
Towing................................................................. 409
Towing tips........................................................... 415
Trip meter ................................................................ 163
Turn signal
Indicator lights ...................................................... 186
Lever................................................................... 236
Light.................................................................... 496
U
USB power supply .................................................... 281
V
Valet mode............................................................... 226
Vanity mirror............................................................. 276
Light............................................................ 276, 495
Vehicle
Capacity weight .................................................... 403
Identification......................................................... 514
Symbols ................................................................. 5
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light ................................................ 180
Operation indicator light......................................... 179
Warning light ........................................................ 179
Ventilator ................................................................. 256
W
Warning and indicator lights ....................................... 166
Warning chimes
Driver Monitoring System ...................................... 385
Keyless access with push-button start system ......... 180
Seatbelt .............................................................. 167
Warning indicator
Keyless access with push-button start system ......... 180
Warning light
Pedestrian alert system ........................................ 189
Warning light/Warning indicator
ABS.................................................................... 174
Access key.......................................................... 180
All-Wheel Drive.................................................... 178
Automatic headlight beam leveler........................... 186
Brake system....................................................... 175
BSD/RCTA .......................................................... 187
Charge ............................................................... 172
CHECK ENGINE.................................................. 171
Disc brake pad wear............................................. 326
Driver Monitoring System ............................... 188, 385
Engine hood open ................................................ 178
Engine low oil level .............................................. 172
Front passenger’s seatbelt .................................... 167
Hybrid fail lamp.................................................... 189
Hybrid system overheat ........................................ 189
Icy road surface ................................................... 188
Keyless access with push-button start system ......... 180
LED headlight............................................... 186, 496
Low fuel.............................................................. 177
Low tire pressure .......................................... 173, 334
Oil pressure......................................................... 172
Pedestrian alert system ........................................ 189
Index
546
(549,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
Power steering ............................................. 178, 324
RAB ..................................................... 188, 369, 377
Rear seatbelt........................................................ 169
Seatbelt ............................................................... 167
SRS airbag system ................................ 101, 120, 170
Steering Responsive Headlight............................... 186
Vehicle Dynamics Control ...................................... 179
Windshield washer fluid......................................... 178
Warranties .................................................................. 2
Washing .................................................................. 448
Waxing and polishing ................................................ 449
Wear indicators ........................................................ 480
Welcome lighting function .......................................... 228
Wheel
Alloy.................................................................... 486
Balance ............................................................... 480
Nut tightening torque............................................. 509
Replacement........................................................ 483
Windows.................................................................. 150
Windshield
Washer fluid......................................................... 487
Washer fluid warning light ...................................... 178
Wiper and washer switches ................................... 238
Wiper blades........................................................ 489
Wiper deicer......................................................... 241
Winter
Driving................................................................. 398
Tires............................................................ 401, 476
Wiper and washer..................................................... 237
Wiper deicer............................................................. 241
Wireless charger....................................................... 282
X
X-MODE.................................................................. 331
Indicator.............................................................. 187
Index
547
14
Index
(550,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(551,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(552,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(553,1)
北米Model "A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
北米Model"A1670BE-B" EDITED: 2025/ 8/ 28
GAS STATION REFERENCE
S99AA
& Fuel
S99AA01
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90
RON) or higher.
& Fuel Octane Rating
S99AA02
! AKI
S99AA0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI).
! RON
S99AA0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
& Limit of Ethanol Content
S99AA09
No more than 15%
& Fuel Tank Capacity
S99AA03
16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)
& Engine Oil
S99AA04
Use only the following oils.
. ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Com-
mittee) GF-6B, which can be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Shield mark)
. or ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory
Committee) GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst mark)
. or API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SP with
the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine Oil”
�P506.
& Engine Oil Capacity
S99AA05
4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.
Check the oil level using an oil level gauge after refilling the
engine with oil. For more details about maintenance and
service, refer to “Engine Oil” �P465.
& Cold Tire Pressure
S99AA06
Refer to “Tires” �P509.
